Knowledge of the Higher Worlds

Rudolf Steiner
(Written 1904 – 1905; GA 10)

Knowledge of the Higher Worlds and Its Attainment constitutes a
fundamental guide to the anthroposophical path of cognition or
knowledge. In human consciousness, faculties are sleeping that, if
awakened, lead to life-giving wisdom. With great clarity and warmth,
Rudolf Steiner details the exercises and moral qualities to be cultivated on
the path to a conscious experience of supersensible realities.



RUDOLF STEINER,
philosopher, scientist and
educator, (1861–1925), has
achieved world-wide fame as
the originator of the Science of
the Spirit known as
Anthroposophy, and as a
pioneer of genius in a variety
of fields of learning.
“Steiner's gift to the world
was a moral and meditative
way to objective vision, a way
appropriate to the
psychological and
physiological constitution of Western man. If accepted in the spirit of
humility, altruism and truthfulness in which it was given, it could bridge the
existing cleft between a man's religious conviction and his intellect and will.
It could add comprehension to our existing knowledge and thus revive the
vision without which our generation will hardly find the solution to its
problems.”
Franz Winkler, M.D., Man the Bridge between Two Worlds.
“That the academic world has managed to dismiss Steiner's works as
inconsequential and irrelevant, is one of the intellectual wonders of the
twentieth century. Anyone who is willing to study those vast works with an
open mind (let us say, a hundred of his titles) will find himself faced with one
of the greatest thinkers of all time, whose grasp of the modern sciences is
equaled only by his profound learning in the ancient ones.”
Russell W. Davenport, The Dignity of Man.





2
Contents

Preface to the Third Edition
Preface to the Fifth Edition
Preface to the Edition of May 1918

I. How Is Knowledge of the High Worlds Attained?
II. The Stages of Initiation
o Preparation
o Enlightenment
o The Control of Thoughts and Feelings
III. Initiation
IV. Some Practical Aspects
V. The Conditions of Esoteric Training
VI. Some Results of Initiation
VII. The Transformation of Dream Life
VIII. The Continuity of Consciousness
IX. The Splitting of the Human Personality
during Spiritual Training
X. The Guardian of the Threshold
XI. Life and Death. The Greater Guardian
of the Threshold
Appendix
3

Preface to the Third Edition
Herewith appear in book form my expositions originally published as
single essays under the title Knowledge of the Higher Worlds and Its
Attainment. For the present, this volume offers the first part; one that is
to follow will constitute the continuation. This work on a development
of man that will enable him to grasp the supersensible worlds cannot be
presented to the public in a new form without certain comments which
I shall now make. The communications it contains concerning the
development of the human soul are intended to fill various needs.
First of all, something is to be offered those people who feel drawn to
the results of spiritual research, and who must raise the question:
“Well, whence do these persons derive their knowledge who claim the
ability to tell us something of the profound riddles of life?” — Spiritual
science does this. Whoever wishes to observe the facts leading to such
claims must rise to supersensible cognition. He must follow the path I
have endeavored to describe in this book. On the other hand, it would
be an error to imagine these disclosures of spiritual science to be
valueless for one who lacks the inclination or the possibility to pursue
this path himself. In order to establish the facts through research, the
ability to enter the supersensible worlds is indispensable; but once they
have been discovered and communicated, even one who does not
perceive them himself can be adequately convinced of their truth. A
large proportion of them can be tested offhand, simply by applying
ordinary common sense in a genuinely unprejudiced way. Only, one
must not let this open-mindedness become confused by any of the pre-
conceived ideas so common in human life. Someone can easily believe,
for example, that some statement or other contradicts certain facts
established by modern science. In reality, there is no such thing as a
scientific fact that contradicts spiritual science; but there can easily
seem to be contradictions unless scientific conclusions are consulted
abundantly and without prejudice. The student will find that the more
open-mindedly he compares spiritual science with positive scientific
achievements, the more clearly is complete accord to be seen.
Another category of spiritual-scientific disclosures, it is true, will be
found to elude purely mental judgment more or less; but the right
relation to these also will be achieved without great difficulty by one
who understands that not the mind alone but healthy feeling as well is
qualified to determine what is true. And when this feeling does not
permit itself to bewarpedby alikingor antipathy for someopinionor
4
other, but really allows higher knowledge to act without prejudice, a
corresponding sentient judgment results.
And there are many more ways of confirming this knowledge for those
who cannot or do not wish to tread the path into the supersensible
world. Such people can feel very clearly what value this knowledge has
in life, even when it comes to them only through the communications
of those engaged in spiritual research. Not everyone can immediately
achieve spiritual vision; but the discoveries of those who have it can be
health-giving life-nourishment for all. For everyone can apply them;
and whoever does so will soon discover what life in every branch can
be with their aid, and what it lacks without them. The results of
supersensible knowledge, when properly employed in life, prove to be
— not unpractical, but rather, practical in the highest sense.
One who does not himself intend to follow the path to higher
knowledge, but is interested in the facts it reveals, can ask: How does
the seer arrive at these facts? To such a one this book is intended to
picture the path in such a way that even one not following it can
nevertheless have confidence in thecommunications of the person who
has done so . Realizing how the spiritual scientist works, he can
approve, and say to himself: The impression made upon me by the
description of this path to higher worlds makes clear why the facts
reported seem reasonable. Thus this book is intended to help those who
want their sense of truth and feeling for truth concerning the
supersensible world strengthened and assured.
No less, however, does it aim to offer aid to those who themselves seek
the way to supersensible knowledge. The truth of what is here set forth
will best be verified by those who achieve its reality within themselves.
Anyone with this intention will do well to keep reminding himself that
in an exposition on the development of the soul, more is called for than
becoming acquainted with the substance, which is frequently the aim in
other expositions. It is necessary to familiarize oneself intimately with
the presentation. One must postulate the following: no single matter is
to be comprehended only by means of what is said about the matter
itself, but by means of much else that is disclosed concerning totally
different matters. This will develop the conception that what is vital is
to be found not in any single truth but in the harmony of all truths. This
must be seriously considered by anyone intending to carry out the
exercises. An exercise can be rightly understood and even rightly
executed, and yet produce a wrong effect unless another be added to it
— one that will resolve the one-sidedness of the first into a harmony of
the soul. Whoever reads this book in an intimate way, so that the
reading resembles an inner experience, will not merely familiarize
himself with its content: one passage will evoke a certain feeling,
5
another passage another feeling; and in that way he will learn how
much importance should be seen in the one or the other in the
development of his soul. He will also find out in what form he should
try this or that exercise, what form best suits his particular
individuality. When one has to do, as is the case here, with descriptions
of processes that are to be experienced, it is necessary to refer again
and again to the content; for it will become manifest that much can be
satisfactorily assimilated only after trial, which in turn reveals certain
finer points that at first are bound to be overlooked.
Even those readers who do not intend to take the way prescribed will
find much in the book that can be of service to the inner life, such as
maxims, suggestions that throw light on various puzzling problems,
and so on.
And those who have had experiences in their lives that serve, to some
extent, as an initiation through life may derived a certain satisfaction
from finding clarified through co-ordination what had haunted them as
separate problems — things they already knew, but perhaps without
having been able to consolidate them in adequate conceptions.

6

Preface to the Fifth Edition
In preparing this new edition of Knowledge of the Higher Worlds
and Its Attainment I have gone over every detail of the subject as I had
presented it over ten years ago. The urge to make such a review is
natural in the case of disclosures concerning soul experiences and paths
such as are indicated in this book. There can be no portion of what is
imparted which does not remain intimately a part of the one who
communicates it, or which does not contain something that perpetually
works upon his soul. And it is inevitable that this work of the soul
should be joined by an endeavor to enhance the clarity and lucidity of
the presentation as given years before. This engendered what I have
endeavored to accomplish in this new edition. All the essential
elements of the expositions, all the principal points, have remained as
they were; yet important changes have been made. In many passages I
have been able to increase the accuracy of characterization in detail,
and this seemed to me important. If anyone wishes to apply what is
imparted in this book to his own spiritual life, it is important that he
should be able to contemplate the paths in question by means of a
characterization as exact as possible. Misconceptions can arise in far
greater measure in connection with the description of inner spiritual
processes than with that of facts in the physical world. The mobility of
the soul life, the danger of losing sight of how different it is from all
life in the physical world — this and much else renders such
misunderstandings possible. In preparing this new edition I have
directed my attention to finding passages in which misconceptions
might arise, and I have endeavored to forestall them.
At the time I wrote the essays that constitute this book, much had
to be discussed in a different way from today, because at that time I
had to allude in a different manner to the substance of what had been
published since then concerning facts of cognition of the spiritual
worlds. In my Occult Science, in The Spiritual Guidance of Mankind,
in A Road to Self-Knowledge and the Threshold of the Spiritual World,
as well as in other writings, spiritual processes are described whose
existence, to be sure, was already inevitably indicated in this book ten
years ago, but in words differing from those that seem right today. In
connection with a great deal not described in this book I had to explain
at that time that it could be learned by oral communication. Much of
what this referred to has since been published. But these allusions
perhaps did not wholly exclude the possibility of erroneous ideas in the
reader's mind. It might be possible, for instance, to imagine that
something much more vital in the personal relations between the seeker
for spiritual schooling and this or that teacher than is intended. I trust I
have here succeeded, by presenting details in a certain way, in
7
emphasizing more strongly that for one seeking spiritual schooling in
accord with present spiritual conditions an absolutely direct relation to
the objective spiritual world is of far greater importance than a relation
to the personality of a teacher. The latter will gradually become merely
the helper; he will assume the same position in spiritual schooling as a
teacher occupies, in conformity with modern views, in any other field
of knowledge. I believe I have sufficiently stressed the fact that the
teacher's authority and the pupil's faith in him should play no greater
part in spiritual schooling than in any other branch of knowledge or
life. A great deal depends, its seems to me, upon an increasingly true
estimate of this relation between the one who carries on spiritual
research and those who develop an interest in the results of his
research. Thus I believe I have improved the book wherever I was in a
position, after ten years, to find what needs improving.
A second part is to be added to this first part, bringing further
explanations of the frame of mind that can lead a man to the experience
of the higher worlds.
The new edition of the book, the printing completed, lay before
me when the great war now being experienced by mankind broke out. I
must write these prefatory remarks while my soul is deeply moved by
the destiny-laden event.
Berlin, September 7, 1914.
Rudolph Steiner

8
Preface to the Edition of May 1918
In working over this new edition I found only minor changes in its
substance necessary; but I have added an appendix in which I have
endeavored to explain more clearly the psychological foundations to
which the disclosures contained in the book must be traced if they are to
be accepted without risk of misunderstanding. I believe that the contents
of the appendix will also serve to show many an opponent of
anthroposophical spiritual science that his judgment is based upon a
misconception of the nature of this spiritual science; that he does not see
what it really is.
Rudolph Steiner
9
I
How Is Knowledge of the Higher Worlds Attained?
Conditions
There slumber in every human being faculties by means of which he can
acquire for himself a knowledge of higher worlds. Mystics, Gnostics,
Theosophists — all speak of a world of soul and spirit which for them is
just as real as the world we see with our physical eyes and touch with our
physical hands. At every moment the listener may say to himself: that, of
which they speak, I too can learn, if I develop within myself certain
powers which today still slumber within me. There remains only one
question — how to set to work to develop such faculties. For this purpose,
they only can give advice who already possess such powers. As long as
the human race has existed there has always been a method of training, in
the course of which individuals possessing these higher faculties gave
instruction to others who were in search of them. Such a training is called
occult (esoteric) training, and the instruction received therefrom is called
occult (esoteric) teaching, or spiritual science. This designation naturally
awakens misunderstanding. The one who hears it may very easily be
misled into the belief that this training is the concern of a special,
privileged class, withholding its knowledge arbitrarily from its fellow-
creatures. He may even think that nothing of real importance lies behind
such knowledge, for if it were a true knowledge — he is tempted to think
— there would be no need of making a secret of it; it might be publicly
imparted and its advantages made accessible to all. Those who have been
initiated into the nature of this higher knowledge are not in the least
surprised that the uninitiated should so think, for the secret of initiation
can only be understood by those who have to a certain degree experienced
this initiation into the higher knowledge of existence. The question may be
raised: how, then, under these circumstances, are the uninitiated to
develop any human interest in this so-called esoteric knowledge? How and
why are they to seek for something of whose nature they can form no
idea? Such a question is based upon an entirely erroneous conception of
the real nature of esoteric knowledge. There is, in truth, no difference
between esoteric knowledge and all the rest of man's knowledge and
proficiency. This esoteric knowledge is no more of a secret for the average
human being than writing is a secret for those who have never learned it.
And just as all can learn to write who choose the correct method, so, too,
can all who seek the right way become esoteric students and even
teachers. In one respect only do the conditions here differ from those that
apply to external knowledge and proficiency. The possibility of acquiring
the art of writing may be withheld from someone through poverty, or
through the conditions of civilization into which he is born; but for the
10
attainment of knowledge and proficiency in the higher worlds, there is no
obstacle for those who earnestly seek them.
Many believe that they must seek, at one place or another, the masters of
higher knowledge in order to receive enlightenment. Now in the first
place, whoever strives earnestly after higher knowledge will shun no
exertion and fear no obstacle in his search for an initiate who can lead him
to the higher knowledge of the world. On the other hand, everyone may be
certain that initiation will find him under all circumstances if he gives
proof of an earnest and worthy endeavor to attain this knowledge. It is a
natural law among all initiates to withhold from no man the knowledge
that is due him but there is an equally natural law which lays down that no
word of esoteric knowledge shall be imparted to anyone not qualified to
receive it. And the more strictly he observes these laws, the more perfect
is an initiate. The bond of union embracing all initiates is spiritual and not
external, but the two laws here mentioned form, as it were, strong clasps
by which the component parts of this bond are held together. You may live
in intimate friendship with an initiate, and yet a gap severs you from his
essential self, so long as you have not become an initiate yourself. You
may enjoy in the fullest sense the heart, the love of an initiate, yet he will
only confide his knowledge to you when you are ripe for it. You may
flatter him; you may torture him; nothing can induce him to betray
anything to you as long as you, at the present stage of your evolution, are
not competent to receive it into your soul in the right way.
The methods by which a student is prepared for the reception of higher
knowledge are minutely prescribed. The direction he is to take is traced
with unfading, everlasting letters in the worlds of the spirit where the
initiates guard the higher secrets. In ancient times, anterior to our history,
the temples of the spirit were also outwardly visible; today, because our
life has become so unspiritual, they are not to be found in the world visible
to external sight; yet they are present spiritually everywhere, and all who
seek may find them.
Only within his own soul can a man find the means to unseal the lips of an
initiate. He must develop within himself certain faculties to a definite
degree, and then the highest treasures of the spirit can become his own.
He must begin with a certain fundamental attitude of soul. In spiritual
science this fundamental attitude is called the path of veneration, of
devotion to truth and knowledge. Without this attitude no one can become
a student. The disposition shown in their childhood by subsequent students
of higher knowledge is well known to the experienced in these matters.
There are children who look up with religious awe to those whom they
venerate. For such people they have a respect which forbids them, even in
the deepest recess of their heart, to harbor any thought of criticism or
11
opposition. Such children grow up into young men and women who feel
happy when they are able to look up to anything that fills them with
veneration. From the ranks of such children are recruited many students of
higher knowledge. Have you ever paused outside the door of some
venerated person, and have you, on this your first visit, felt a religious awe
as you pressed on the handle to enter the room which for you is a holy
place? If so, a feeling has been manifested within you which may be the
germ of your future adherence to the path of knowledge. It is a blessing
for every human being in process of development to have such feelings
upon which to build. Only it must not be thought that this disposition leads
to submissiveness and slavery. What was once a childlike veneration for
persons becomes, later, a veneration for truth and knowledge. Experience
teaches that they can best hold their heads erect who have learnt to
venerate where veneration is due; and veneration is always fitting when it
flows from the depths of the heart.
If we do not develop within ourselves this deeply rooted feeling that there
is something higher than ourselves, we shall never find the strength to
evolve to something higher. The initiate has only acquired the strength to
lift his head to the heights of knowledge by guiding his heart to the depths
of veneration and devotion. The heights of the spirit can only be climbed
by passing through the portals of humility. You can only acquire right
knowledge when you have learnt to esteem it. Man has certainly the right
to turn his eyes to the light, but he must first acquire this right. There are
laws in the spiritual life, as in the physical life. Rub a glass rod with an
appropriate material and it will become electric, that is, it will receive the
power of attracting small bodies. This is in keeping with a law of nature. It
is known to all who have learnt a little physics. Similarly, acquaintance
with the first principles of spiritual science shows that every feeling of true
devotion harbored in the soul develops a power which may, sooner or
later, lead further on the path of knowledge.
The student who is gifted with this feeling, or who is fortunate enough to
have had it inculcated in a suitable education, brings a great deal along
with him when, later in life, he seeks admittance to higher knowledge.
Failing such preparation, he will encounter difficulties at the very first
step, unless he undertakes, by rigorous self-education, to create within
himself this inner life of devotion. In our time it is especially important
that full attention be paid to this point. Our civilization tends more toward
critical judgment and condemnation than toward devotion and selfless
veneration. Our children already criticize far more than they worship. But
every criticism, every adverse judgment passed, disperses the powers of
the soul for the attainment of higher knowledge in the same measure that
all veneration and reverence develops them. In this we do not wish to say
anything against our civilization. There is no question here of leveling
criticism against it. To this critical faculty, this self-conscious human
12
judgment, this “test all things and hold fast what is best,” we owe the
greatness of our civilization. Man could never have attained to the science,
the industry, the commerce, the rights relationships of our time, had he not
applied to all things the standard of his critical judgment. But what we
have thereby gained in external culture we have had to pay for with a
corresponding loss of higher knowledge of spiritual life. It must be
emphasized that higher knowledge is not concerned with the veneration of
persons but the veneration of truth and knowledge.
Now, the one thing that everyone must acknowledge is the difficulty for
those involved in the external civilization of our time to advance to the
knowledge of the higher worlds. They can only do so if they work
energetically at themselves. At a time when the conditions of material life
were simpler, the attainment of spiritual knowledge was also easier.
Objects of veneration and worship stood out in clearer relief from the
ordinary things of the world. In an epoch of criticism ideals are lowered;
other feelings take the place of veneration, respect, adoration, and wonder.
Our own age thrusts these feelings further and further into the background,
so that they can only be conveyed to man through his every-day life in a
very small degree. Whoever seeks higher knowledge must create it for
himself. He must instill it into his soul. It cannot be done by study; it can
only be done through life. Whoever, therefore, wishes to become a student
of higher knowledge must assiduously cultivate this inner life of devotion.
Everywhere in his environment and his experiences he must seek motives
of admiration and homage. If I meet a man and blame him for his
shortcomings, I rob myself of power to attain higher knowledge; but if I
try to enter lovingly into his merits, I gather such power. The student must
continually be intent upon following this advice. The spiritually
experienced know how much they owe to the circumstance that in face of
all things they ever again turn to the good, and withhold adverse
judgement. But this must not remain an external rule of life; rather it must
take possession of our innermost soul. Man has it in his power to perfect
himself and, in time, completely to transform himself. But this
transformation must take place in his innermost self, in his thought-life. It
is not enough that I show respect only in my outward bearing; I must have
this respect in my thoughts. The student must begin by absorbing this
devotion into this thought-life. He must be wary of thoughts of disrespect,
of adverse criticism, existing in his consciousness, and he must endeavor
straightaway to cultivate thoughts of devotion.
Every moment that we set ourselves to discover in our consciousness
whatever there remains in it of adverse, disparaging and critical judgement
of the world and of life; every such moment brings us nearer to higher
knowledge. And we rise rapidly when we fill our consciousness in such
moments with thoughts evoking in us admiration, respect and veneration
for the world and for life. It is well known to those experienced in these
13
matters that in every such moment powers are awakened which otherwise
remain dormant. In this way the spiritual eyes of man are opened. He
begins to see things around him which he could not have seen before. He
begins to understand that hitherto he had only seen a part of the world
around him. A human being standing before him now presents a new and
different aspect. Of course, this rule of life alone will not yet enable him to
see, for instance, what is described as the human aura, because for this still
higher training is necessary. But he can rise to this higher training if he has
previously undergone a rigorous training in devotion. (In the last chapter
of his book Theosophy, the author describes fully the Path of Knowledge;
here it is intended to give some practical details.)
Noiseless and unnoticed by the outer world is the treading of the Path of
Knowledge. No change need be noticed in the student. He performs his
duties as hitherto; he attends to his business as before. The transformation
goes on only in the inner part of the soul hidden from outward sight. At
first his entire inner life is flooded by this basic feeling of devotion for
everything which is truly venerable. His entire soul-life finds in this
fundamental feeling its pivot. J ust as the sun's rays vivify everything
living, so does reverence in the student vivify all feelings of the soul.
It is not easy, at first, to believe that feelings like reverence and respect
have anything to do with cognition. This is due to the fact that we are
inclined to set cognition aside as a faculty by itself — one that stands in no
relation to what otherwise occurs in the soul. In so thinking we do not bear
in mind that it is the soul which exercises the faculty of cognition; and
feelings are for the soul what food is for the body. If we give the body
stones in place of bread, its activity will cease. It is the same with the soul.
Veneration, homage, devotion are like nutriment making it healthy and
strong, especially strong for the activity of cognition. Disrespect,
antipathy, underestimation of what deserves recognition, all exert a
paralyzing and withering effect on this faculty of cognition. For the
spiritually experienced this fact is visible in the aura. A soul which harbors
feelings of reverence and devotion produces a change in its aura. Certain
spiritual colorings, as they may be called, yellow-red and brown-red in
tone, vanish and are replaced by blue-red tints. Thereby the cognitional
faculty is ripened; it receives intelligence of facts in its environment of
which it had hitherto no idea. Reverence awakens in the soul a
sympathetic power through which we attract qualities in the beings around
us, which would otherwise remain concealed.
The power obtained through devotion can be rendered still more effective
when the life of feeling is enriched by yet another quality. This consists in
giving oneself up less and less to impressions of the outer world, and to
develop instead a vivid inner life. A person who darts from one impression
of the outer world to another, who constantly seeks distraction, cannot find
14
the way to higher knowledge. The student must not blunt himself to the
outer world, but while lending himself to its impressions, he should be
directed by his rich inner life. When passing through a beautiful mountain
district, the traveler with depth of soul and wealth of feeling has different
experiences from one who is poor in feeling. Only what we experience
within ourselves unlocks for us the beauties of the outer world. One
person sails across the ocean, and only a few inward experiences pass
through his soul; another will hear the eternal language of the cosmic
spirit; for him are unveiled the mysterious riddles of existence. We must
learn to remain in touch with our own feelings and ideas if we wish to
develop any intimate relationship with the outer world. The outer world
with all its phenomena is filled with splendor, but we must have
experienced the divine within ourselves before we can hope to discover it
in our environment.
The student is told to set apart moments in his daily life in which to
withdraw into himself, quietly and alone. He is not to occupy himself at
such moments with the affairs of his own ego. This would result in the
contrary of what is intended. He should rather let his experiences and the
messages from the outer world re-echo within his own completely silent
self. At such silent moments every flower, every animal, every action will
unveil to him secrets undreamt of. And thus he will prepare himself to
receive quite new impressions of the outer world through quite different
eyes. The desire to enjoy impression after impression merely blunts the
faculty of cognition; the latter, however, is nurtured and cultivated if the
enjoyment once experienced is allowed to revel its message. Thus the
student must accustom himself not merely to let the enjoyment
reverberate, as it were, but rather to renounce any further enjoyment, and
work upon the past experience. The peril here is very great. Instead of
working inwardly, it is very easy to fall into the opposite habit of trying to
exploit the enjoyment. Let no one underestimate the fact that immense
sources of error here confront the student. He must pass through a host of
tempters of his soul. They would all harden his ego and imprison it within
itself. He should rather open it wide to all the world. It is necessary that he
should seek enjoyment, for only through enjoyment can the outer world
reach him. If he blunts himself to enjoyment he is like a plant which
cannot any longer draw nourishment from its environment. Yet if he stops
short at the enjoyment he shuts himself up within himself. He will only be
something to himself and nothing to the world. However much he may
live within himself, however intensely he may cultivate his ego — the
world will reject him. To the world he is dead. The student of higher
knowledge considers enjoyment only as a means of ennobling himself for
the world. Enjoyment is to him like a scout informing him about the
world; but once instructed by enjoyment, he passes on to work. He does
not learn in order to accumulate learning as his own treasure, but in order
that he may devote his learning to the service of the world.
15
In all spiritual science there is a fundamental principle which cannot be
transgressed without sacrificing success, and it should be impressed on the
student in every form of esoteric training. It runs as follows: All
knowledge pursued merely for the enrichment of personal learning and the
accumulation of personal treasure leads you away from the path; but all
knowledge pursued for growth to ripeness within the process of human
ennoblement and cosmic development brings you a step forward. This law
must be strictly observed, and no student is genuine until he has adopted it
as a guide for his whole life. This truth can be expressed in the following
short sentence: Every idea which does not become your ideal slays a force
in your soul; every idea which becomes your ideal creates within you life-
forces.
Inner Tranquility
At the very beginning of his course, the student is directed to the path of
veneration and the development of the inner life. Spiritual science now
also gives him practical rules by observing which he may tread that path
and develop that inner life. These practical rules have no arbitrary origin.
They rest upon ancient experience and ancient wisdom, and are given out
in the same manner, wheresoever the ways to higher knowledge are
indicated. All true teachers of the spiritual life are in agreement as to the
substance of these rules, even though they do not always clothe them in
the same words. This difference, which is of a minor character and is more
apparent than real, is due to circumstances which need not be dwelt upon
here.
No teacher of the spiritual life wishes to establish a mastery over other
persons by means of such rules. He would not tamper with anyone's
independence. Indeed, none respect and cherish human independence
more than the spiritually experienced. It was stated in the preceding pages
that the bond of union embracing all initiates is spiritual, and that two laws
form, as it were, clasps by which the component parts of this bond are held
together. Whenever the initiate leaves his enclosed spiritual sphere and
steps forth before the world, he must immediately take a third law into
account. It is this: Adapt each one of your actions, and frame each one of
your words in such a way that you infringe upon no one's free-will.
The recognition that all true teachers of the spiritual life are permeated
through and through with this principle will convince all who follow the
practical rules proffered to them that they need sacrifice none of their
independence.
One of the first of these rules can be expressed somewhat in the following
words of our language: Provide for yourself moments of inner tranquility,
and in these moments learn to distinguish between the essential and the
16
non-essential. It is said advisedly: “expressed in the words of our
language.” Originally all rules and teachings of spiritual science were
expressed in a symbolical sign-language, some understanding of which
must be acquired before its whole meaning and scope can be realized. This
understanding is dependent on the first steps toward higher knowledge,
and these steps result from the exact observation of such rules as are here
given. For all who earnestly will, the path stands open to tread.
Simple, in truth, is the above rule concerning moments of inner
tranquility; equally simple is its observation. But it only achieves its
purpose when it is observed in as earnest and strict a manner as it is, in
itself, simple. How this rule is to be observed will, therefore, be explained
without digression.
The student must set aside a small part of his daily life in which to concern
himself with something quite different from the objects of his daily
occupation. The way, also, in which he occupies himself at such a time
must differ entirely from the way in which he performs the rest of his daily
duties. But this does not mean that what he does in the time thus set apart
has no connection with his daily work. On the contrary, he will soon find
that just these secluded moments, when sought in the right way, give him
full power to perform his daily task[s]. Nor must it be supposed that the
observance of this rule will really encroach upon the time needed for the
performance of his duties. Should anyone really have no more time at his
disposal, five minutes a day will suffice. It all depends on the manner in
which these five minutes are spent.
During these periods the student should wrest himself entirely free from
his work-a-day life. His thoughts and feelings should take on a different
coloring. His joys and sorrows, his cares, experiences and actions must
pass in review before his soul; and he must adopt such a position that he
may regard all his sundry experiences from a higher point of view.
We need only bear in mind how, in ordinary life, we regard the
experiences and actions of others quite differently from our own. This
cannot be otherwise, for we are interwoven with our own actions and
experiences, whereas those of others we only contemplate. Our aim in
these moments of seclusion must be so to contemplate and judge our own
actions and experiences as though they applied not to ourselves but to
some other person. Suppose, for example, a heavy misfortune befalls us.
How different would be our attitude toward a similar misfortune had it
befallen our neighbor. This attitude cannot be blamed as unjustifiable; it is
part of human nature, and applies equally to exceptional circumstances
and to the daily affairs of life. The student must seek the power of
confronting himself, at certain times, as a stranger. He must stand before
himself with the inner tranquility of a judge. When this is attained, our
17
own experiences present themselves in a new light. As long as we are
interwoven with them and stand, as it were, within them, we cling to the
non-essential just as much as to the essential. If we attain the calm inner
survey, the essential is severed from the non-essential. Sorrow and joy,
every thought, every resolve, appear different when we confront ourselves
in this way. It is as though we had spent the whole day in a place where
we beheld the smallest objects at the same close range as the largest, and
in the evening climbed a neighboring hill and surveyed the whole scene at
a glance. Then the various parts appear related to each other in different
proportions from those they bore when seen from within. This exercise
will not and need not succeed with present occurrences of destiny, but it
should be attempted by the student in connection with the events of
destiny already experienced in the past. The value of such inner tranquil
self-contemplation depends far less on what is actually contemplated than
on our finding within ourselves the power which such inner tranquility
develops.
For every human being bears a higher man within himself besides what we
may call the work-a-day man. This higher man remains hidden until he is
awakened. And each human being can himself alone awaken this higher
being within himself. As long as this higher being is not awakened, the
higher faculties slumbering in every human being, and leading to
supersensible knowledge, will remain concealed. The student must resolve
to persevere in the strict and earnest observation of the rule here given, so
long as he does not feel within himself the fruits of this inner tranquility.
To all who thus persevere the day will come when spiritual light will
envelop them, and a new world will be revealed to an organ of sight of
whose presence within them they were never aware.
And no change need take place in the outward life of the student in
consequence of this new rule. He performs his duties and, at first, feels the
same joys, sorrows, and experiences as before. In no way can it estrange
him from life; he can rather devote himself the more thoroughly to this life
for the remainder of the day, having gained a higher life in the moments
set apart. Little by little this higher life will make its influence felt on his
ordinary life. The tranquility of the moments set apart will also affect
everyday existence. In his whole being he will grow calmer; he will attain
firm assurance in all his actions, and cease to be put out of countenance by
all manner of incidents. By thus advancing he will gradually become more
and more his own guide, and allow himself less and less to be led by
circumstances and external influences. He will soon discover how great a
source of strength is available to him in these moments thus set apart. He
will begin no longer to get angry at things which formerly annoyed him;
countless things he formerly feared cease to alarm him. He acquires a new
outlook on life. Formerly he may have approached some occupation in a
fainthearted way. He would say: “Oh, I lack the power to do this as well as
18
I could wish.” Now this thought does not occur to him, but rather a quite
different thought. Henceforth he says to himself: “I will summon all my
strength to do my work as well as I possibly can.” And he suppresses the
thought which makes him faint-hearted; for he knows that this very
thought might be the cause of a worse performance on his part, and that in
any case it cannot contribute to the improvement of his work. And thus
thought after thought, each fraught with advantage to his whole life, flows
into the student's outlook. They take the place of those that had a
hampering, weakening effect. He begins to steer his own ship on a secure
course through the waves of life, whereas it was formerly battered to and
fro by these waves.
This calm and serenity react on the whole being. They assist the growth of
the inner man, and, with the inner man, those faculties also grow which
lead to higher knowledge. For it is by his progress in this direction that the
student gradually reaches the point where he himself determines the
manner in which the impressions of the outer world shall affect him. Thus
he may hear a word spoken with the object of wounding or vexing him.
Formerly it would indeed have wounded or vexed him, but now that he
treads the path to higher knowledge, he is able — before the word has
found its way to his inner self — to take from it the sting which gives it
the power to wound or vex. Take another example. We easily become
impatient when we are kept waiting, but — if we tread the path to higher
knowledge — we so steep ourselves in our moments of calm with the
feeling of the uselessness of impatience that henceforth, on every occasion
of impatience, this feeling is immediately present within us. The
impatience that was about to make itself felt vanishes, and an interval
which would otherwise have been wasted in expressions of impatience
will be filled by useful observations, which can be made while waiting.
Now, the scope and significance of these facts must be realized. We must
bear in mind that the higher man within us is in constant development. But
only the state of calm and serenity here described renders an orderly
development possible. The waves of outward life constrain the inner man
from all sides if, instead of mastering this outward life, it masters him.
Such a man is like a plant which tries to expand in a cleft in the rock and is
stunted in growth until new space is given it. No outward forces can
supply space to the inner man. It can only be supplied by the inner calm
which man himself gives to his soul. Outward circumstances can only alter
the course of his outward life; they can never awaken the inner spiritual
man. The student must himself give birth to a new and higher man within
himself.
This higher man now becomes the inner ruler who directs the
circumstances of the outer man with sure guidance. As long as the outer
man has the upper hand and control, this inner man is his slave and
19
therefore cannot unfold his powers. If it depends on something other than
myself whether I should get angry or not, I am not master of myself, or, to
put it better, I have not yet found the ruler within myself. I must develop
the faculty of letting the impressions of the outer world approach me only
in the way in which I myself determine; then only do I become in the real
sense a student. And only in as far as the student earnestly seeks this
power can he reach the goal. It is of no importance how far anyone can go
in a given time; the point is that he should earnestly seek. Many have
striven for years without noticing any appreciable progress; but many of
those who did not despair, but remained unshaken, have then quite
suddenly achieved the inner victory.
No doubt a great effort is required in many stations of life to provide these
moments of inner calm; but the greater the effort needed, the more
important is the achievement. In spiritual science everything depends upon
energy, inward truthfulness, and uncompromising sincerity with which we
confront our own selves, with all our deeds and actions, as a complete
stranger.
But only one side of the student's inner activity is characterized by this
birth of his own higher being. Something else is needed in addition. Even
if he confronts himself as a stranger it is only himself that he
contemplates; he looks on those experiences and actions with which he is
connected through his particular station of life. He must now disengage
himself from it and rise beyond to a purely human level, which no longer
has anything to do with his own special situation. He must pass on to the
contemplation of those things which would concern him as a human being,
even if he lived under quite different circumstances and in quite a different
situation. In this way something begins to live within him which ranges
above the purely personal. His gaze is directed to worlds higher than those
with which every-day life connects him. And thus he begins to feel and
realize, as an inner experience, that he belongs to those higher worlds.
These are worlds concerning which his senses and his daily occupation
can tell him nothing. Thus he now shifts the central point of his being to
the inner part of his nature. He listens to the voices within him which
speak to him in his moments of tranquility; he cultivates an intercourse
with the spiritual world. He is removed from the every-day world. Its
noise is silenced. All around him there is silence. He puts away everything
that reminds him of such impressions from without. Calm inward
contemplation and converse with the purely spiritual world fill his soul. —
Such tranquil contemplation must become a natural necessity in the life of
the student. He is now plunged in a world of thought. He must develop a
living feeling for this silent thought-activity. He must learn to love what
the spirit pours into him. He will soon cease to feel that this thought-world
is less real than the every-day things which surround him. He begins to
deal with his thoughts as with things in space, and the moment approaches
20
when he begins to feel that which reveals itself in the silent inward
thought-work to be much higher, much more real, than the things in space.
He discovers that something living expresses itself in this thought-world.
He sees that his thoughts do not merely harbor shadow-pictures, but that
through them hidden beings speak to him. Out of the silence, speech
becomes audible to him. Formerly sound only reached him through his
ear; now it resounds through his soul. An inner language, an inner word is
revealed to him. This moment, when first experienced, is one of greatest
rapture for the student. An inner light is shed over the whole external
world, and a second life begins for him. Through his being there pours a
divine stream from a world of divine rapture.
This life of the soul in thought, which gradually widens into a life in
spiritual being, is called by Gnosis, and by Spiritual Science, Meditation
(contemplative reflection). This meditation is the means to supersensible
knowledge. But the student in such moments must not merely indulge in
feelings; he must not have indefinite sensations in his soul. That would
only hinder him from reaching true spiritual knowledge. His thoughts
must be clear, sharp and definite, and he will be helped in this if he does
not cling blindly to the thoughts that rise within him. Rather must he
permeate himself with the lofty thoughts by which men already advanced
and possessed of the spirit were inspired at such moments. He should start
with the writings which themselves had their origin in just such revelation
during meditation. In the mystic, gnostic and spiritual scientific literature
of today the student will find such writings, and in them the material for
his meditation. The seekers of the spirit have themselves set down in such
writings the thoughts of the divine science which the Spirit has directed
his messengers to proclaim to the world.
Through such meditation a complete transformation takes place in the
student. He begins to form quite new conceptions of reality. All things
acquire a fresh value for him. It cannot be repeated too often that this
transformation does not alienate him from the world. He will in no way be
estranged from his daily tasks and duties, for he comes to realize that the
most insignificant action he has to accomplish, the most insignificant
experience which offers itself to him, stands in connection with cosmic
beings and cosmic events. When once this connection is revealed to him in
his moments of contemplation, he comes to his daily activities with a new,
fuller power. For now he knows that his labor and his suffering are given
and endured for the sake of a great, spiritual, cosmic whole. Not
weariness, but strength to live springs from meditation.
With firm step the student passes through life. No matter what it may
bring him, he goes forward erect. In the past he knew not why he labored
and suffered, but now he knows. It is obvious that such meditation leads
more surely to the goal if conducted under the direction of experienced
21
persons who know of themselves how everything may best be done; and
their advice and guidance should be sought. Truly, no one loses his
freedom thereby. What would otherwise be mere uncertain groping in the
dark becomes under this direction purposeful work. All who apply to those
possessing knowledge and experience in these matters will never apply in
vain, only they must realize that what they seek is the advice of a friend,
not the domination of a would-be ruler. It will always be found that they
who really know are the most modest of men, and that nothing is further
from their nature than what is called the lust for power.
When, by means of meditation, a man rises to union with the spirit, he
brings to life the eternal in him, which is limited by neither birth nor death.
The existence of this eternal being can only be doubted by those who have
not themselves experienced it. Thus meditation is the way which also
leads man to the knowledge, to the contemplation of his eternal,
indestructible, essential being; and it is only through meditation that man
can attain to such knowledge. Gnosis and Spiritual Science tell of the
eternal nature of this being and of its reincarnation. The question is often
asked: Why does a man know nothing of his experiences beyond the
borders of life and death? Not thus should we ask, but rather: How can we
attain such knowledge? In right meditation the path is opened. This alone
can revive the memory of experiences beyond the border of life and death.
Everyone can attain this knowledge; in each one of us lies the faculty of
recognizing and contemplating for ourselves what genuine Mysticism,
Spiritual Science, Anthroposophy, and Gnosis teach. Only the right means
must be chosen. Only a being with ears and eyes can apprehend sounds
and colors; nor can the eye perceive if the light which makes things visible
is wanting. Spiritual Science gives the means of developing the spiritual
ears and eyes, and of kindling the spiritual light; and this method of
spiritual training: (1) Preparation; this develops the spiritual senses. (2)
Enlightenment; this kindles the spiritual light. (3) Initiation; this
establishes intercourse with the higher spiritual beings.
22
II
The Stages of Initiation
The information given in the following chapters constitutes steps in an
esoteric training, the name and character of which will be understood by
all who apply this information in the right way. It refers to the three stages
through which the training of the spiritual life leads to a certain degree of
initiation. But only so much will here be explained as can be publicly
imparted. These are merely indications extracted from a still deeper and
more intimate doctrine. In esoteric training itself a quite definite course of
instruction is followed. Certain exercises enable the soul to attain to a
conscious intercourse with the spiritual world. These exercises bear about
the same relation to what will be imparted in the following pages, as the
instruction given in a higher strictly disciplined school bears to the
incidental training. But impatient dabbling, devoid of earnest
perseverance, can lead to nothing at all. The study of Spiritual Science can
only be successful if the student retain what has already been indicated in
the preceding chapter, and on the basis of this proceed further.
The three stages which the above-mentioned tradition specifies, are as
follows: (1) preparation; (2) enlightenment; (3) initiation. It is not
altogether necessary that the first of these three stages should be
completed before the second can be begun, nor that the second, in turn, be
completed before the third be started. In certain respects it is possible to
partake of enlightenment, and even of initiation, and in other respects still
be in the preparatory stage. Yet it will be necessary to spend a certain time
in the stage of preparation before any enlightenment can begin; and, at
least in some respects, enlightenment must be completed before it is even
possible to enter upon the stage of initiation. But in describing them it is
necessary, for the sake of clarity, that the three stages be made to follow in
order.
Preparation
Preparation consists in a strict and definite cultivation of the life of
thought and feeling, through which the psycho-spiritual body becomes
equipped with higher senses and organs of activity in the same way that
natural forces have fitted the physical body with organs built out of
indeterminate living matter.
To begin with, the attention of the soul is directed to certain events in the
world that surrounds us. Such events are, on the one hand, life that is
budding, growing, and flourishing, and on the other hand, all phenomena
connected with fading, decaying, and withering. The student can observe
these events simultaneously, wherever he turns his eyes and on every
23
occasion they naturally evoke in him feelings and thoughts; but in
ordinary circumstances he does not devote himself sufficiently to them.
He hurries on too quickly from impression to impression. It is necessary,
therefore, that he should fix his attention intently and consciously upon
these phenomena. Wherever he observes a definite kind of blooming and
flourishing, he must banish everything else from his soul, and entirely
surrender himself, for a short time, to this one impression. He will soon
convince himself that a feeling which heretofore in a similar case, would
merely have flitted through his soul, now swells out and assumes a
powerful and energetic form. He must now allow this feeling to
reverberate quietly within himself while keeping inwardly quite still. He
must cut himself off from the outer world, and simply and solely follow
what his soul tells him of this blossoming and flourishing.
Yet it must not be thought that much progress can be made if the senses
are blunted to the world. First look at the things as keenly and as intently
as you possibly can; then only let the feeling which expands to life, and
the thought which arises in the soul, take possession of you. The point is
that the attention should be directed with perfect inner balance upon both
phenomena. If the necessary tranquility be attained and you surrender
yourself to the feeling which expands to life in the soul, then, in due time,
the following experience will ensue. Thoughts and feelings of a new kind
and unknown before will be noticed uprising in the soul. Indeed, the more
often the attention be fixed alternately upon something growing,
blossoming and flourishing, and upon something else that is fading and
decaying, the more vivid will these feelings become. And just as the eyes
and ears of the physical body are built by natural forces out of living
matter, so will the organs of clairvoyance build themselves out of the
feelings and thoughts thus evoked. A quite definite form of feeling is
connected with growth and expansion, and another equally definite with
all that is fading and decaying. But this is only the case if the effort be
made to cultivate these feelings in the way indicated. It is possible to
describe approximately what these feelings are like. A full conception of
them is within the reach of all who undergo these inner experiences.
If the attention be frequently fixed on the phenomena of growing,
blooming and flourishing, a feeling remotely allied to the sensation of a
sunrise will ensue, while the phenomena of fading and decaying will
produce an experience comparable, in the same way, to the slow rising of
the moon on the horizon. Both these feelings are forces which, when duly
cultivated and developed to ever increasing intensity, lead to the most
significant spiritual results. A new world is opened to the student if he
systematically and deliberately surrenders himself to such feelings. The
soul-world, the so-called astral plane, begins to dawn upon him. Growth
and decay are no longer facts which make indefinite impressions on him
as of old, but rather they form themselves into spiritual lines and figures of
24
which he had previously suspected nothing. And these lines and figures
have, for the different phenomena, different forms. A blooming flower, an
animal in the process of growth, a tree that is decaying, evoke in his soul
different lines. The soul world (astral plane) broadens out slowly before
him. These lines and figures are in no sense arbitrary. Two students who
have reached the corresponding stage of development will always see the
same lines and figures under the same conditions. J ust as a round table
will be seen as round by two normal persons, and not as round by one and
square by the other, so too, at the sight of a flower, the same spiritual
figure is presented to the soul. And just as the forms of animals and plants
are described in ordinary natural history, so too, the spiritual scientist
describes or draws the spiritual forms of the process of growth and decay,
according to species and kind.
If the student has progressed so far that he can perceive the spiritual forms
of those phenomena which are physically visible to his external sight, he is
then not far from the stage where he will behold things which have no
physical existence, and which therefore remain entirely hidden (occult)
from those who have not received suitable instruction and training.
It should be emphasized that the student must never lose himself in
speculations on the meaning of one thing or another. Such intellectualizing
will only draw him away from the right road. He should look out on the
world with keen, healthy senses and quickened power of observation, and
then give himself up to the feeling that arises within him. He should not
try to make out, through intellectual speculation, the meaning of things,
but rather allow the things to disclose themselves. It should be remarked
that artistic feeling, when coupled with a quiet introspective nature, forms
the best preliminary condition for the development of spiritual faculties.
This feeling pierces through the superficial aspect of things, and in so
doing touches their secrets.
A further point of importance is what spiritual science calls orientation in
the higher worlds. This is attained when the student is permeated, through
and through, with the conscious realization that feelings and thoughts are
just as much veritable realities as are tables and chairs in the world of the
physical senses. In the soul and thought world, feelings and thoughts react
upon each other just as do physical objects in the physical world. As long
as the student is not vividly permeated with this consciousness, he will not
believe that a wrong thought in his mind may have as devastating an effect
upon other thoughts that spread life in the thought world as the effect
wrought by a bullet fired at random upon the physical objects it hits. He
will perhaps never allow himself to perform a physically visible action
which he considers to be wrong, though he will not shrink from harboring
wrong thoughts and feelings, for these appear harmless to the rest of the
world. There can be no progress, however, on the path to higher
25
knowledge unless we guard our thoughts and feelings in just the same way
we guard out steps in the physical world. If we see a wall before us, we do
not attempt to dash right through it, but turn aside. In other words, we
guide ourselves by the laws of the physical world. There are such laws,
too, for the soul and thought world, only they cannot impose themselves
on us from without. They must flow out of the life of the soul itself. This
can be attained if we forbid ourselves to harbor wrong thoughts and
feelings. All arbitrary flitting to and fro in thought, all accidental ebbing
and flowing of emotion must be forbidden in the same way. In so doing
we do not become deficient in feeling. On the contrary, if we regulate our
inner life in this way, we shall soon find ourselves becoming rich in
feelings and creative with genuine imagination. In the place of petty
emotionalism and capricious flights of thought, there appear significant
emotions and thoughts that are fruitful. Feelings and thoughts of this kind
lead the student to orientation in the spiritual world. He gains a right
position in relation to the things of the spiritual world; a distinct and
definite result comes into effect in his favor. J ust as he, as a physical man,
finds his way among physical things, so, too, his path now leads him
between growth and decay, which he has already come to know in the way
described above. On the one hand, he follows all processes of growing and
flourishing and, on the other, of withering and decaying in a way that is
necessary for his own and the world's advancement.
The student has also to bestow a further care on the world of sound. He
must discriminate between sounds that are produced by the so-called inert
(lifeless) bodies, for instance, a bell, or a musical instrument, or a falling
mass, and those which proceed from a living creature (an animal or a
human being.) When a bell is struck, we hear the sound and connect a
pleasant feeling with it; but when we hear the cry of an animal, we can,
besides our own feeling, detect through it the manifestation of an inward
experience of the animal, whether of pleasure or pain. It is with the latter
kind of sound that the student sets to work. He must concentrate his whole
attention on the fact that the sound tells him of something that lies outside
his own soul. He must immerse himself in this foreign thing. He must
closely unite his own feeling with the pleasure or pain of which the sound
tells him. He must get beyond the point of caring whether, for him, the
sound is pleasant or unpleasant, agreeable or disagreeable, and his soul
must be filled with whatever is occurring in the being from which the
sound proceeds. Through such exercises, if systematically and deliberately
performed, the student will develop within himself the faculty of
intermingling, as it were, with the being from which the sound proceeds.
A person sensitive to music will find it easier than one who is unmusical
to cultivate his inner life in this way; but no one should suppose that a
mere sense for music can take the place of this inner activity. The student
must learn to feel in this way in the face of the whole of nature. This
implants a new faculty in his world of thought and feeling. Through her
26
resounding tones, the whole of nature begins to whisper her secrets to the
student. What was hitherto merely incomprehensible noise to his soul
becomes by this means a coherent language of nature. And whereas
hitherto he only heard sound from the so-called inanimate objects, he now
is aware of a new language of the soul. Should he advance further in this
inner culture, he will soon learn that he can hear what hitherto he did not
even surmise. He begins to hear with the soul.
To this, one thing more must be added before the highest point in this
region can be attained. Of very great importance for the development of
the student is the way in which he listens to others when they speak. He
must accustom himself to do this in such a way that, while listening, his
inner self is absolutely silent. If someone expresses an opinion and another
listens, assent or dissent will, generally speaking, stir in the inner self of
the listener. Many people in such cases feel themselves impelled to an
expression of their assent, or more especially, of their dissent. In the
student, all such assent or dissent must be silenced. It is not imperative
that he should suddenly alter his way of living by trying to attain at all
times to this complete inner silence. He will have to begin by doing so in
special cases, deliberately selected by himself. Then quite slowly and by
degrees, this new way of listening will creep into his habits, as of itself. In
spiritual research this is systematically practiced. The student feels it his
duty to listen, by way of practice, at certain times to the most
contradictory views and, at the same time, bring entirely to silence all
assent, and more especially, all adverse criticism. The point is that in so
doing, not only all purely intellectual judgment be silenced, but also all
feelings of displeasure, denial, or even assent. The student must at all
times be particularly watchful lest such feelings, even when not on the
surface, should still lurk in the innermost recess of the soul. He must
listen, for example, to the statements of people who are, in some respects,
far beneath him, and yet while doing so suppress every feeling of greater
knowledge or superiority. It is useful for everyone to listen in this way to
children, for even the wisest can learn incalculably much from children.
The student can thus train himself to listen to the words of others quite
selflessly, completely shutting down his own person and his opinions and
way of feeling. When he practices listening without criticism, even when a
completely contradictory opinion is advanced, when the most hopeless
mistake is committed before him, he then learns, little by little, to blend
himself with the being of another and become identified with it. Then he
hears through the words into the soul of the other. Through continued
exercise of this kind, sound becomes the right medium for the perception
of soul and spirit. Of course it implies the very strictest self-discipline, but
the latter leads to a high goal. When these exercises are practiced in
connection with the other already given, dealing with the sounds of nature,
the soul develops a new sense of hearing. She is now able to perceive
manifestations from the spiritual world which do not find their expression
27
in sounds perceptible to the physical ear. The perception of the “inner
word” awakens. Gradually truths reveal themselves to the student from the
spiritual world. He hears speech uttered to him in a spiritual way. Only to
those who, by selfless listening, train themselves to be really receptive
from within, in stillness, unmoved by personal opinion or feeling only to
such can the higher beings speak of whom spiritual science tells. As long
as one hurls any personal opinion or feeling against the speaker to whom
one must listen, the beings of the spiritual world remain silent.
All higher truths are attained through such inwardly instilled speech, and
what we hear from the lips of a true spiritual teacher has been experienced
by him in this manner. But this does not mean that it is unimportant for us
to acquaint ourselves with the writings of spiritual science before we can
ourselves hear such inwardly instilled speech. On the contrary, the reading
of such writings and the listening to the teachings of spiritual science are
themselves means of attaining personal knowledge. Every sentence of
spiritual science we hear is of a nature to direct the mind to the point
which must be reached before the soul can experience real progress. To
the practice of all that has here been indicated must be added the ardent
study of what the spiritual researchers impart to the world. In all esoteric
training such study belongs to the preparatory period, and all other
methods will prove ineffective if due receptivity for the teachings of the
spiritual researcher is lacking. For since these instructions are culled from
the living inner word, from the living inwardly instilled speech, they are
themselves gifted with spiritual life. They are not mere words; they are
living powers. And while you follow the words of one who knows, while
you read a book that springs from real inner experience, powers are at
work in your soul which make you clairvoyant, just as natural forces have
created out of living matter your eyes and your ears.
Enlightenment
Enlightenment proceeds from very simple processes. Here, too, it is a
matter of developing certain feelings and thoughts which slumber in every
human being and must be awakened. It is only when these simple
processes are carried out with unfailing patience, continuously and
conscientiously, that they can lead to the perception of the inner light-
forms. The first step is taken by observing different natural objects in a
particular way; for instance, a transparent and beautifully formed stone (a
crystal), a plant, and an animal. The student should endeavor, at first, to
direct his whole attention to a comparison of the stone with the animal in
the following manner. The thoughts here mentioned should pass through
his soul accompanied by vivid feelings, and no other thought, no other
feeling, must mingle with them and disturb what should be an intensely
attentive observation. The student says to himself: “The stone has a form;
the animal also has a form. The stone remains motionless in its place. The
28
animal changes its place. It is instinct (desire) which causes the animal to
change its place. Instincts, too, are served by the form of the animal. Its
organs and limbs are fashioned in accordance with these instincts. The
form of the stone is not fashioned in accordance with desires, but in
accordance with desireless force.” (The fact here mentioned, in its bearing
on the contemplation of crystals, is in many ways distorted by those who
have only heard of it in an outward, exoteric manner, and in this way such
practices as crystal-gazing have their origin Such manipulations are based
on a misunderstanding. They have been described in many books, but they
never form the subject of genuine esoteric teaching.)
By sinking deeply into such thoughts, and while doing so, observing the
stone and the animal with rapt attention, there arise in the soul two quite
separate kinds of feelings. From the stone there flows into the soul the one
kind of feeling, and from the animal the other kind. The attempt will
probably not succeed at first, but little by little, with genuine and patient
practice, these feelings ensue. Only, this exercise must be practiced over
and over again. At first the feelings are only present as long as the
observation lasts. Later on they continue, and then they grow to something
which remains living in the soul. The student has then but to reflect, and
both feelings will always arise, even without the contemplation of an
external object. Out of these feelings and the thoughts that are bound up
with them, the organs of clairvoyance are formed. If the plant should then
be included in this observation, it will be noticed that the feeling flowing
from it lies between the feelings derived from the stone and the animal, in
both quality and degree. The organs thus formed are spiritual eyes. The
students gradually learns, by their means, to see something like soul and
spirit colors. The spiritual world with its lines and figures remains dark as
long as he has only attained what has been described as preparation;
through enlightenment this world becomes light. Here it must also be
noted that the words “dark” and “light,” as well as the other expressions
used, only approximately describe what is meant. This cannot be
otherwise if ordinary language is used, for this language was created to
suit physical conditions. Spiritual science describes that which, for
clairvoyant organs, flows from the stone, as blue, or blue-red; and that
which is felt as coming from the animal as red or red-yellow. In reality,
colors of a spiritual kind are seen. The color proceeding the plant is green
which little by little turns into a light ethereal pink. The plant is actually
that product of nature which in higher worlds resembles, in certain
respects, its constitution in the physical world. The same does not apply to
the stone and the animal. It must now be clearly understood that the
above-mentioned colors only represent the principal shades in the stone,
plant and animal kingdom. In reality, all possible intermediate shades are
present. Every stone, every plant, every animal has its own particular
shade of color. In addition to these there are also the beings of the higher
worlds who never incarnate physically, but who have their colors, often
29
wonderful, often horrible. Indeed, the wealth of color in these higher
worlds is immeasurably greater than in the physical world.
Once the faculty of seeing with spiritual eyes has been acquired, one then
encounters sooner or later the beings here mentioned, some of them
higher, some lower than man himself--beings that never enter physical
reality.
If this point has been reached, the way to a great deal lies open. But it is
inadvisable to proceed further without paying careful heed to what is said
or otherwise imparted by the spiritual researcher. And for that, too, which
has been described, attention paid to such experienced guidance is the very
best thing. Moreover, if a man has the strength and the endurance to travel
so far that he fulfills the elementary conditions of enlightenment, he will
assuredly seek and find the right guidance.
But in any circumstances, one precaution is necessary, failing which it
were better to leave untrodden all steps on the path to higher knowledge. It
is necessary that the student should lose none of his qualities as a good and
noble man, or his receptivity for all physical reality. Indeed, throughout
his training he must continually increase his moral strength, his inner
purity, and his power of observation. To give an example: during the
elementary exercises on enlightenment, the student must take care always
to enlarge his sympathy for the animal and the human worlds, and his
sense for the beauty of nature. Failing this care, such exercises would
continually blunt that feeling and that sense; the heart would become
hardened, and the senses blunted, and that could only lead to perilous
results.
How enlightenment proceeds if the student rises, in the sense of the
foregoing exercises, from the stone, the plant, and the animal, up to man,
and how, after enlightenment, under all circumstances the union of the
soul with the spiritual world is effected, leading to initiation--with these
things the following chapters will deal, in as far as they can and may do
so.
In our time the path to spiritual science is sought by many. It is sought in
many ways, and many dangerous and even despicable practices are
attempted. It is for this reason that they who claim to know something of
the truth in these matters place before others the possibility of learning
something of esoteric training. Only so much is here imparted as accords
with this possibility. It is necessary that something of the truth should
become known, in order to prevent error causing great harm. No harm can
come to anyone following the way here described, so long as he does not
force matters. Only, one thing should be noted: no student should spend
more time and strength upon these exercises than he can spare with due
30
regard to his station in life and to his duties; nor should he change
anything, for the time being, in the external conditions of his life through
taking this path. Without patience no genuine results can be attained. After
doing an exercise for a few minutes, the student must be able to stop and
continue quietly his daily work, and not thought of these exercises should
mingle with the day's work. NO one is of use as an esoteric student or will
ever attain results of real value who has not learned to wait in the highest
and best sense of the word.
The Control of Thoughts and Feelings
When the student seeks the path leading to higher knowledge in the way
described in the preceding chapter, he should not omit to fortify himself;
throughout his work, with one ever present thought. He must never cease
repeating to himself that he may have made quite considerable progress
after a certain interval of time, though it may not be apparent to him in the
way he perhaps expected; otherwise he can easily lose heart and abandon
all attempts after a short time. The powers and faculties to be developed
are of a most subtle kind, and differ entirely in their nature from the
conceptions previously formed by the student. He had been accustomed to
occupy himself exclusively with the physical world; the world of spirit
and soul had been concealed from his vision and concepts. It is therefore
not surprising if he does not immediately notice the powers of soul and
spirit now developing in him. In this respect there is a possibility of
discouragement for those setting out on the path to higher knowledge, if
they ignore the experience gathered by responsible investigators. The
teacher is aware of the progress made by his pupil long before the latter is
conscious of it He knows how the delicate spiritual eyes begin to form
themselves long before the pupil is aware of this, and a great part of what
he has to say is couched in such terms as to prevent the pupil from losing
patience and perseverance before he can himself gain knowledge of his
own progress. The teacher, as we know, can confer upon the pupil no
powers which are not already latent within him, and his sole function is to
assist in the awakening of slumbering faculties. But what he imparts out of
his own experience is a pillar of strength for the one wishing to penetrate
through darkness to light. Many abandon the path to higher knowledge
soon after having set foot upon it, because their progress is not
immediately apparent to them. And even when the first experiences begin
to dawn upon the pupil, he is apt to regard them as illusions, because he
had formed quite different conceptions of what he was going to
experience. He loses courage, either because he regards these first
experiences as being of no value, or because they appear to him to be so
insignificant that he cannot believe they will lead him to any appreciable
results within a measurable time. Courage and self-confidence are two
beacons which must never be extinguished on the path to higher
knowledge. No one will ever travel far who cannot bring himself to repeat,
31
over and over again, an exercise which has failed, apparently, for a
countless number of times.
Long before any distinct perception of progress, there rises in the student,
from the hidden depths of the soul, a feeling that he is on the right path.
This feeling should be cherished and fostered, for it can develop into a
trustworthy guide. Above all, it is imperative to extirpate the idea that any
fantastic, mysterious practices are required for the attainment of higher
knowledge. It must be clearly realized that a start has to be made with the
thoughts and feelings with which we continually live, and that these
feelings and thoughts must merely be given a new direction. Everyone
must say to himself: “In my own world of thought and feeling the deepest
mysteries lie hidden, only hitherto I have been unable to perceive them.”
In the end it all resolves itself into the fact that man ordinarily carries
body, soul and spirit about with him, and yet is conscious in a true sense
only of his body, and not of his soul and spirit. The student becomes
conscious of soul and spirit, just as the ordinary person is conscious of his
body. Hence it is highly important to give the proper direction to thoughts
and feelings, for then only can the perception be developed of all that is
invisible in ordinary life. One of the ways by which this development may
be carried out will now be indicated. Again, like almost everything else so
far explained, it is quite a simple matter. Yet its results are of the greatest
consequence, if the necessary devotion and sympathy be applied.
Let the student place before himself the small seed of a plant, and while
contemplating this insignificant object, form with intensity the right kind
of thoughts, and through these thoughts develop certain feelings. In the
first place let him clearly grasp what he really sees with his eyes. Let him
describe to himself the shape, color and all other qualities of the seed.
Then let his mind dwell upon the following train of thought: “Out of the
seed, if planted in the soil, a plant of complex structure will grow.” Let
him build up this plant in his imagination, and reflect as follows: “What I
am now picturing to myself in my imagination will later on be enticed
from the seed by the forces of earth and light. If I had before me an
artificial object which imitated the seed to such a deceptive degree that my
eyes could not distinguish it from a real seed, no forces of earth or light
could avail to produce from it a plant.” If the student thoroughly grasps
this thought so that it becomes an inward experience, he will also be able
to form the following thought and couple it with the right feeling: “All that
will ultimately grow out of the seed is now secretly enfolded within it as
the force of the whole plant. In the artificial imitation of the seed there is
no such force present. And yet both appear alike to my eyes. The real seed,
therefore, contains something invisible which is not present in the
imitation.” It is on this invisible something that thought and feeling are to
be concentrated. (Anyone objecting that a microscopical examination
would reveal the difference between the real seed and the imitation would
32
only show that he had failed to grasp the point. The intention is not to
investigate the physical nature of the object, but to use it for the
development of psycho-spiritual forces.)
Let the student fully realize that this invisible something will transmute
itself later on into a visible plant, which he will have before him in its
shape and color. Let him ponder on the thought: “The invisible will
become visible. If I could not think, then that which will only become
visible later on could not already make its presence felt to me.” Particular
stress must be laid on the following point: what the student thinks he must
also feel with intensity. In inner tranquility, the thought mentioned above
must become a conscious inner experience, to the exclusion of all other
thoughts and disturbances. And sufficient time must be taken to allow the
thought and the feeling which is coupled with it to bore themselves into
the soul, as it were. If this be accomplished in the right way, then after a
time — possibly not until after numerous attempts — an inner force will
make itself felt. This force will create new powers of perception. The grain
of seed will appear as if enveloped in a small luminous cloud. In a
sensible-supersensible way, it will be felt as a kind of flame. The center of
this flame evokes the same feeling that one has when under the impression
of the color lilac, and the edges as when under the impression of a bluish
tone. What was formerly invisible now becomes visible, for it is created
by the power of the thoughts and feelings we have stirred to life within
ourselves. The plant itself will not become visible until later, so that the
physically invisible now reveals itself in a spiritually visible way.
It is not surprising that all this appears to many as illusion. “What is the
use of such visions,” they ask, “and such hallucinations?” And many will
thus fall away and abandon the path. But this is precisely the important
point: not to confuse spiritual reality with imagination at this difficult
stage of human evolution, and further-more, to have the courage to press
onward and not become timorous and faint-hearted. On the other hand,
however, the necessity must be emphasized of maintaining unimpaired
and of perpetually cultivating that healthy sound sense which distinguishes
truth from illusion. Fully conscious self-control must never be lost during
all these exercises, and they must be accompanied by the same sane, sound
thinking which is applied to the details of every-day life. To lapse into
reveries would be fatal. The intellectual clarity, not to say the sobriety of
thought, must never for a moment be dulled. The greatest mistake would
be made if the student's mental balance were disturbed through such
exercises, if he were hampered in judging the matters of his daily life as
sanely and as soundly as before. He should examine himself again and
again to find out if he has remained unaltered in relation to the
circumstances among which he lives, or whether he may perhaps have
become unbalanced. Above all, strict care must be taken not to drift at
random into vague reveries, or to experiment with all kinds of exercises.
33
The trains of thought here indicated have been tested and practiced in
esoteric training since the earliest times, and only such are given in these
pages. Anyone attempting to use others devised by himself, or of which he
may have heard or read at one place or another, will inevitably go astray
and find himself on the path of boundless chimera.
As a further exercise to succeed the one just described, the following may
be taken: Let the student place before him a plant which has attained the
stage of full development. Now let him fill his mind with the thought that
the time will come when this plant will wither and die. “Nothing will be
left of what I now see before me. But this plant will have developed seeds
which, in their turn, will develop to new plants. I again become aware that
in what I see, something lies hidden which I cannot see. I fill my mind
entirely with the thought: this plant with its form and colors, will in time
be no more. But the reflection that it produces seeds teaches me that it will
not disappear into nothing. I cannot at present see with my eyes that which
guards it from disappearance, any more than I previously could discern
the plant in the grain of seed. Thus there is something in the plant which
my eyes cannot see. If I let this thought live within me, and if the
corresponding feeling be coupled with it, then, in due time, there will
again develop in my soul a force which will ripen into a new perception.”
Out of the plant there again grows a kind of spiritual flame-form, which is,
of course, correspondingly larger than the one previously described. The
flame can be felt as being greenish-blue in the center, and yellowish-red at
the outer edge.
It must be explicitly emphasized that the colors here described are not seen
as the physical eyes see colors, but that through spiritual perception the
same feeling is experienced as in the case of a physical color-impression.
To apprehend blue spiritually means to have a sensation similar to the one
experienced when the physical eye rests on the color blue. This fact must
be noted by all who intend to rise to spiritual perception. Otherwise they
will expect a mere repetition of the physical in the spiritual. This could
only lead to the bitterest deception.
Anyone having reached this point of spiritual vision is the richer by a great
deal, for he can perceive things not only in their present state of being but
also in their process of growth and decay. He begins to see in all things the
spirit, of which physical eyes can know nothing. And therewith he has
taken the first step toward the gradual solution, through personal vision, of
the secret of birth and death. For the outer senses a being comes into
existence through birth, and passes away through death. This, however, is
only because these senses cannot perceive the concealed spirit of the
being. For the spirit, birth and death are merely a transformation, just as
the unfolding of the flower from the bud is a transformation enacted
before our physical eyes. But if we desire to learn this through personal
34
vision we must first awaken the requisite spiritual sense in the way here
indicated.
In order to meet another objection, which may be raised by certain people
who have some psychic experience, let it at once be admitted that there are
shorter and simpler ways, and that there are persons who have acquired
knowledge of the phenomena of birth and death through personal vision,
without first going through all that has here been described. There are, in
fact, people with considerable psychic gifts who need but a slight impulse
in order to find themselves already developed. But they are the exceptions,
and the methods described above are safer and apply equally to all. It is
possible to acquire some knowledge of chemistry in an exceptional way,
but if you wish to become a chemist you must follow the recognized and
reliable course.
An error fraught with serious consequences would ensue if it were
assumed that the desired result could be reached more easily if the grain of
seed or the plant mentioned above were merely imagined, were merely
pictured in the imagination. This might lead to results, but not so surely as
the method here. The vision thus attained would, in most cases, be a mere
fragment of the imagination, the transformation of which into genuine
spiritual vision would still remain to be accomplished. It is not intended
arbitrarily to create visions, but to allow reality to create them within
oneself. The truth must well up from the depths of our own soul; it must
not be conjured forth by our ordinary ego, but by the beings themselves
whose spiritual truth we are to contemplate.
Once the student has found the beginnings of spiritual vision by means of
such exercises, he may proceed to the contemplation of man himself.
Simple phenomena of human life must first be chosen. But before making
any attempt in this direction it is imperative for the student to strive for the
absolute purity of his moral character. He must banish all through of ever
using knowledge gained in this way for his own personal benefit. He must
be convinced that he would never, under any circumstances, avail himself
in an evil sense of any power he may gain over his fellow-creatures. For
this reason, all who seek to discover through personal vision the secrets in
human nature must follow the golden rule of true spiritual science. This
golden rule is as follows: For every one step that you take in the pursuit of
higher knowledge, take three steps in the perfection of your own
character. If this rule is observed, such exercise as the following may be
attempted:
Recall to mind some person whom you may have observed when he was
filled with desire for some object. Direct your attention to this desire. It is
best to recall to memory that moment when the desire was at its height,
and it was still uncertain whether the object of the desire would be
35
attained. And now fill your mind with this recollection, and reflect on what
you can thus observe. Maintain the utmost inner tranquility. Make the
greatest possible effort to be blind and deaf to everything that may be
going on around you, and take special heed that through the conception
thus evoked a feeling should awaken in your soul. Allow this feeling to rise
in your soul like a cloud on the cloudless horizon. As a rule, of course,
your reflection will be interrupted, because the person whom it concerns
was not observed in this particular state of soul for a sufficient length of
time. The attempt will most likely fail hundreds and hundreds of times. It
is just a question of not losing patience. After many attempts you will
succeed in experiencing a feeling In your soul corresponding to the state
of soul of the person observed, and you will begin to notice that through
this feeling a power grows in your soul that leads to spiritual insight into
the state of soul of the other. A picture experienced as luminous appears in
your field of vision. This spiritually luminous picture is the so-called astral
embodiment of the desire observed in that soul. Again the impression of
this picture may be described as flame-like, yellowish-red in the center,
and reddish-blue or lilac at the edges. Much depends on treating such
spiritual experiences with great delicacy. The best thing is not to speak to
anyone about them except to your teacher, if you have one. Attempted
descriptions of such experiences in inappropriate words usually only lead
to gross self-deception. Ordinary terms are employed which are not
intended for such things, and are therefore too gross and clumsy. The
consequence is that in the attempt to clothe the experience in words we are
misled into blending the actual experience with all kinds of fantastic
delusions. Here again is another important rule for the student: know how
to observe silence concerning your spiritual experiences. Yes, observe
silence even toward yourself. Do not attempt to clothe in words what you
contemplate in the spirit, or to pore over it with clumsy intellect. Lend
yourself freely and without reservation to these spiritual impressions, and
do not disturb them by reflecting and pondering over them too much. For
you must remember that your reasoning faculties are, to begin with, by no
means equal to your new experience. You have acquired these reasoning
faculties in a life hitherto confined to the physical world of the senses; the
faculties you are not acquiring transcend this world. Do not try, therefore,
to apply to the new and higher perceptions the standard of the old. Only he
who has gained some certainty and steadiness in the observation of inner
experiences can speak about them, and thereby stimulate his fellow-men.
The exercise just described may be supplemented by the following: Direct
your attention in the same way upon a person to whom the fulfillment of
some wish, the gratification of some desire, has been granted. If the same
rules and precautions be adopted as in the previous instance, spiritual
insight will once more be attained. A spiritual insight will once more be
attained. A spiritual flame-form will be distinguished, creating an
impression of yellow in the center and green at the edges.
36
By such observation of his fellow-creatures, the student may easily lapse
into a moral fault. He may become cold-hearted. Every conceivable effort
must be made to prevent this. Such observation should only be practiced
by one who has already risen to the level on which complete certainty is
found that thoughts are real things. He will then no longer allow himself to
think of his fellow-men in a way that is incompatible with the highest
reverence for human dignity and human liberty. The thought that a human
being could be merely an object of observation must never for a moment
be entertained. Self-education must see to it that this insight into human
nature should go hand in hand with an unlimited respect for the personal
privilege of each individual, and with the recognition of the sacred and
inviolable nature of that which dwells in each human being. A feeling of
reverential awe must fill us, even in our recollections.
For the present, only these two examples can be given to show how
enlightened insight into human nature may be achieved; they will at least
serve to point out the way to be taken. By gaining the inner tranquility and
repose indispensable for such observation, the student will have undergone
a great inner transformation. He will then soon reach the point where this
enrichment of his inner self will lend confidence and composure to his
outward demeanor. And this transformation of his outward demeanor will
again react favorably on his soul. Thus he will be able to help himself
further along the road. He will find ways and means of penetrating more
and more into the secrets of human nature which are hidden from our
external senses, and he will then also become ripe for a deeper insight into
the mysterious connections between human nature and all else that exists
in the universe. By following this path the student approaches closer and
closer to the moment when he can effectively take the first steps of
initiation. But before these can be taken, one thing more is necessary,
though at first its need will be least of all apparent; later on, however, the
student will be convinced of it.
The would-be initiate must bring with him a certain measure of courage
and fearlessness. He must positively go out of his way to find
opportunities for developing these virtues. His training should provide for
their systematic cultivation. In this respect, life itself is a good school —
possibly the best school. The student must learn to look danger calmly in
the face and try to overcome difficulties unswervingly. For instance, when
in the presence of some peril, he must swiftly come to the conviction that
fear is of no possible use; I must not feel afraid; I must only think of what
is to be done. And he must improve to the extent of feeling, upon
occasions which formerly inspired him with fear, that to be frightened, to
be disheartened, are things that are out of the question as far as his own
inmost self is concerned. By self-discipline in this direction, quite definite
qualities are develop which are necessary for initiation into the higher
mysteries. J ust as man requires nervous force in his physical being in
37
order to use his physical sense, so also he requires in his soul nature the
force which is only developed in the courageous and the fearless. For in
penetrating to the higher mysteries he will see things which are concealed
from ordinary humanity by the illusion of the senses. If the physical senses
do not allow us to perceive the higher truth, they are for this very reason
our benefactors. Things are thereby hidden from us which, if realized
without due preparation, would throw us into unutterable consternation,
and the sight of which would be unendurable. The student must be fit to
endure this sight. He loses certain supports in the outer world which he
owes to the very illusion surrounding him. It is truly and literally as if the
attention of someone were called to a danger which had threatened him for
a long time, but of which he knew nothing. Hitherto he felt no fear, but
now that he knows, he is overcome by fear, though the danger has not
been rendered greater by his knowing it.
The forces at work in the world are both destructive and constructive; the
destiny of manifested beings is birth and death. The seer is to behold the
working of these forces and the march of destiny. The veil enshrouding
the spiritual eyes in ordinary life is to be removed. But man is interwoven
with these forces and with this destiny. His own nature harbors destructive
and constructive forces. His own soul reveals itself to the seer as
undisguised as the other objects. He must not lose strength in the face of
this self-knowledge; but strength will fail him unless he brings a surplus
on which to draw. For this purpose he must learn to maintain inner calm
and steadiness in the face of difficult circumstances; he must cultivate a
strong trust in the beneficent powers of existence. He must be prepared to
find that many motives which had actuated him hitherto will do so no
longer. He will have to recognize that previously he thought and acted in a
certain way only because he was still in the throes of ignorance. Reasons
that influenced him formerly will now disappear. He often acted out of
vanity; he will now see how utterly futile all vanity is for the seer. He
often acted out of greed; he will now become aware how destructive all
greed is. He will have to develop quite new motives for his thoughts and
actions, and it is just for this purpose that courage and fearlessness are
required.
It is pre-eminently a question of cultivating this courage and this
fearlessness in the inmost depths of thought-life. The student must learn
never to despair over failure. He must be equal to the thought: I shall
forget that I have failed in this matter, and I shall try once more as though
this had not happened. Thus he will struggle through to the firm
conviction that the fountain-head of strength from which he may draw is
inexhaustible. He struggles ever onward to the spirit which will uplift him
and support him, however weak and impotent his earthly self may have
proved. He must be capable of pressing on to the future undismayed by
any experiences of the past. If the student has acquired these faculties up
38
to a certain point, he is then ripe to hear the real names of things, which
are the key to higher knowledge. For initiation consists in this very act of
learning to call the things of the world by those names which they bear in
the spirit of their divine authors. In these, their names, lies the mystery of
things. It is for this reason that the initiates speak a different language
from the uninitiated, for the former know the names by which the beings
themselves are called into existence.
In as far as initiation itself can be discussed, this will be done in the
following chapter.
39
III
Initiation
Initiation is the highest stage in an esoteric training concerning which it is
possible to give some indications in a book intended for the genuine
public. Whatever lives beyond forms a subject difficult to understand, yet
the way to it can be found by all who have passed through preparation,
enlightenment, and initiation as far as the lesser mysteries.
The knowledge and proficiency conferred by initiation cannot be obtained
in any other manner, except in some far distant future, after many
incarnations, by quite different means and in quite a different form. The
initiate of today undergoes experiences which would otherwise come to
him much later, under quite different circumstances.
The secrets of existence are only accessible to an extent corresponding to
man's own degree of maturity. For this reason alone the path to the higher
stages of knowledge and power is beset with obstacles. A firearm should
not be used until sufficient experience has been gained to avoid disaster,
caused by its use. A person initiated today without further ado would lack
the experience which he will gain during his future incarnations before he
can attain to higher knowledge in the normal course of his development.
At the portal of initiation, therefore, this experience must be supplied in
some other way. Thus the first instructions given to the candidate for
initiation serve as a substitute for these future experiences. These are the
so-called trials, which he has to undergo, and which constitute a normal
course of inner development resulting from due application to such
exercises as are described in the preceding chapters.
These trials are often discussed in books, but it is only natural that such
discussions should as a rule give quite false impressions of their nature;
for without passing through preparation and enlightenment no one can
know anything of these tests and appropriately describe them.
The would-be initiate must come into contact with certain things and facts
belonging to the higher worlds, but he can only see and hear them if his
feeling is ripe for the perception of the spiritual forms, colors and tones
described in the chapters on Preparation and Enlightenment.
The first trial consists in obtaining a truer vision than the average man has
of the corporeal attributes of lifeless things, and later of plants, animals
and human beings. This does not mean what at present is called scientific
knowledge, for it is a question not of science but of vision. As a rule, the
would-be initiate proceeds to learn how the objects of nature and the
beings gifted with life manifest themselves to the spiritual ear and the
40
spiritual eye. In a certain way these things then lie stripped — naked —
before the beholder. The qualities which can then be seen and heard are
hidden from the physical eyes and ears. For physical perception they are
concealed as if by a veil, and the falling away of this veil for the would-be
initiate consists in a process designated as the process of Purification by
Fire. The first trial is therefore known as the Fire-Trial.
For many people, ordinary life is itself a more or less unconscious process
of initiation through the Fire-Trial. Such people have passed through a
wealth of experience, so that their self-confidence, courage and fortitude
have been greatly strengthened in a normal manner while learning to bear
sorrow, disappointment and failure in their undertakings with greatness of
soul, and especially with equanimity and unbroken strength. Thus they are
often initiates without knowing it, and it then needs but little to unseal
their spiritual hearing and sight so that they become clairvoyant. For it
must be noted that a genuine fire-trial is not intended to satisfy the
curiosity of the candidate. It is true that he learns many uncommon things
of which others can have no inkling, but this acquisition of knowledge is
not the end, but the means to the end; the end consists in the attainment,
thanks to this knowledge of the higher worlds, of greater and truer self-
confidence, a higher degree of courage, and a magnanimity and
perseverance such as cannot, as a rule, be acquired in the lower world.
The candidate may always turn back after the fire-trial. He will then
resume his life, strengthened in body and soul, and wait for a future
incarnation to continue his initiation. In his present incarnation he will
prove himself a more useful member of society and of humanity than he
was before. In whatever position he may find himself, his firmness,
prudence, resoluteness, and his beneficent influence over his fellows will
have greatly increased.
But if, after completing the fire-trial, he should wish to continue the path,
a certain writing-system generally adopted in esoteric training must now
be revealed to him. The actual teachings manifest themselves in this
writing, because the hidden (occult) qualities of things cannot be directly
expressed in the words of ordinary writing. The pupils of the initiates
translate the teachings into ordinary language as best they can. The occult
script reveals itself to the soul when the latter has attained spiritual
perception, for it is traced in the spiritual world and remains there for all
time. It cannot be learned as an artificial writing is learned and read. The
candidate grows into clairvoyant knowledge in an appropriate way, and
during this growth in a new strength is developed in his soul, as a new
faculty, through which he feels himself impelled to decipher the
occurrences and the beings of the spiritual world like the characters of a
writing. This strength, with the experience it brings of the corresponding
trial, might possibly awaken in the soul as though of its own accord, as the
41
soul continually develops, but it will be found safer to follow the
instructions of those who are spiritually experienced, and who have some
proficiency in deciphering the occult script.
The signs of the occult script are not arbitrarily invented; they correspond
to the forces actively engaged in the world. They teach us the language of
things. It becomes immediately apparent to the candidate that the signs he
is now learning correspond to the forms, colors, and tones which he
learned to perceive during his preparation and enlightenment. He realizes
that all he learned previously was only like learning to spell, and that he is
only now beginning to read in the higher worlds. All the isolated figures,
tones, and colors reveal themselves to him now in one great connected
whole. Now for the first time he attains complete certainty in observing
the higher worlds. Hitherto he could never know positively whether the
things he saw were rightly seen. A regular understanding, too, is now at
last possible between the candidate and the initiate in the spheres of higher
knowledge. For whatever form the intercourse between an initiate and
another person may take in ordinary life, the higher knowledge in its
immediate form can only be imparted by the initiate in the above-
mentioned sign-language.
Thanks to this language the student also learns certain rules of conduct and
certain duties of which he formerly knew nothing. Having learned these he
is able to perform actions endowed with a significance and a meaning such
as the actions of one not initiated can never possess. He acts out of the
higher worlds. Instructions concerning such action can only be read and
understood in the writing in question.
Yet it must be emphasized that there are people unconsciously gifted with
the ability and faculty of performing such actions, though they have never
undergone an esoteric training. Such helpers of the world and of humanity
pass through life bestowing blessings and performing good deeds. For
reasons here not to be discussed, gifts have been bestowed on them which
appear supernatural. What distinguishes them from the candidate for
initiation is only that the latter acts consciously and with full insight into
the entire situation. He acquires by training the gifts bestowed on others
by higher powers for the good of humanity. We can sincerely revere these
favored of God; but we should not for this reason regard the work of
esoteric training as superfluous.
Once the student has learned the sign-language there awaits him yet
another trial, to prove whether he can move with freedom and assurance in
the higher worlds. In ordinary life he is impelled to action by exterior
motives. He works at one occupation or another because one duty he is
impelled to action by exterior motives. He works at one occupation or
another because one duty or another is imposed on him by outward
42
circumstances. It need hardly be mentioned that the student must in no
way neglect any of his duties in ordinary life because he is living and
working in higher worlds. There is no duty in a higher world that can force
a person to neglect any single one of his duties in the ordinary world. The
father will remain just as good a father to his family, the mother just as
good a mother, and neither the official nor the soldier, nor anyone else will
be diverted from his work by becoming an esoteric student. On the
contrary, all the qualities which make a human being capable and efficient
are enhanced in the student to a degree incomprehensible to the
uninitiated. If, in the eyes of the uninitiated, this does not always appear to
be the case, it is simply because he often lacks the ability to judge the
initiate correctly. The deeds of the latter are not always intelligible to the
former. But this only happens in special cases.
At this stage of initiation there are duties to be performed for which no
outward stimulus is given. The candidate will not be moved to action by
external pressure, but only through adherence to the rules of conduct
revealed to him in the occult script. He must now show in this second trial
that, led by such rules, he can act with the same firmness and precision
with which, for instance, an official performs the duties that belong to
him. For this purpose, and in the course of his further training, he will find
himself faced by a certain definite task. He must perform some action in
consequence of observations made on the basis of what he has learned
during preparation and enlightenment. The nature of this action can be
understood by means of the occult script with which he is now familiar. If
he recognizes his duty and acts rightly, his trial has been successful. The
success can be recognized in the alteration produced by his action in the
figures, colors, and tones apprehended by his spiritual eyes and ears. Exact
indications are given, as the training progresses, showing how these
figures appear and are experienced after the action has been performed,
and the candidate must know how to produce this change. This trial is
known as the Water-Trial, because in his activity in these higher worlds
the candidate is deprived of the support derived from outward
circumstances, as a swimmer is without support when swimming in water
that is beyond his depth. This activity must be repeated until the candidate
attains absolute poise and assurance.
The importance of this trial lies again in the acquisition of a quality.
Through his experiences in the higher worlds, the candidate develops this
quality in a short time to such a high degree that he would otherwise have
to go through many incarnations, in the ordinary course of his
development, before he could acquire it to the same extent. It all centers
around the fact that he must be guided only by the results of his higher
perception and reading of the occult script, in order to produce the changes
in question in these higher regions of existence. Should he, in the course
of his activity, introduce any of his own opinions and desires, or should he
43
diverge for one moment from the laws which he has recognized to be
right, in order to follow his own willful inclination, then the result
produced would differ entirely from what was intended. He would lose
sight of the goal to which his action tended, and confusion would result.
Hence ample opportunity is given him in the course of this trial to develop
self-control. This is the object in view. Here again, this trial can be more
easily passed by those whose life, before initiation, has led them to acquire
self-control. Anyone having acquired the faculty of following high
principles and ideals, while putting into the background all personal
predilection; anyone capable of always performing his duty, even though
inclinations and sympathies would like to seduce him from this duty —
such a person is unconsciously an initiate in the midst of ordinary life. He
will need but little to succeed in this particular trial. Indeed, a certain
measure of initiation thus unconsciously acquired in life will, as a rule, be
indispensable for success in this second trial. For even as it is difficult for
those who have not learned to spell correctly in their childhood to make
good this deficiency when fully grown up, so too it is difficult to develop
the necessary degree of self-control at the moment of looking into the
higher worlds, if this ability has not been acquired to a certain degree in
ordinary life. The objects of the physical world do not alter, whatever the
nature of our wishes, desires, and inclinations. In the higher worlds,
however, our wishes, desires, and inclinations are causes that produce
effects. If we wish to produce a particular effect in these worlds, we must
strictly follow the right rules and subdue every arbitrary impulse.
One human quality is of very special importance at this stage of initiation,
namely, an unquestionably sound judgment. Attention should be paid to
the training of this faculty during all the previous stages; for it now
remains to be proved whether the candidate is shaping in a way that shows
him to be fit for the truth path of knowledge. Further progress is now only
possible if he is able to distinguish illusion, superstition, and everything
fantastic, from true reality. This is, at first, more difficult to accomplish in
the higher stages of existence than in the lower. Every prejudice, every
cherished opinion with regard to the things in question, must vanish; truth
alone must guide. There must be perfect readiness to abandon at once any
idea, opinion, or inclination when logical thought demands it. Certainty in
higher worlds is only likely to be attained when personal opinion is never
considered.
People whose mode of thought tends to fancifulness and superstition can
never make progress on the path to higher knowledge. It is indeed a
precious treasure that the student is to acquire. All doubt regarding the
higher worlds is removed from him. With all their laws they reveal
themselves to his gaze. But he cannot acquire this treasure so long as he is
the prey of fancies and illusions. It would indeed be fatal if his
imagination and his prejudices ran away with his intellect. Dreamers and
44
fantastical people are as unfit for the path to higher knowledge as
superstitious people. This cannot be over-emphasized. For the most
dangerous enemies on the way to knowledge of the higher worlds lurk in
such fantastical reveries and superstitions. Yet no one need to believe that
the student loses all sense of poetry in life, all power of enthusiasm
because the words: You must be rid of all prejudice, are written over the
portal leading to the second trial of initiation, and because over the portal
at the entrance to the first trial he read: Without normal common sense all
thine efforts are in vain.
If the candidate is in this way sufficiently advanced, a third trial awaits
him. He finds here no definite goal to be reached. All is left in his own
hands. He finds himself in a situation where nothing impels him to act. He
must find his way all alone and out of himself. Things or people to
stimulate him to action are non-existent. Nothing and nobody can give him
the strength he needs but he himself alone. Failure to find this inner
strength will leave him standing where he was. Few of those, however,
who have successfully passed the previous trials will fail to find the
necessary strength at this point. Either they will have turned back already
or they succeed at this point also. All that the candidate requires is the
ability to come quickly to terms with himself, for he must here find his
higher self in the truest sense of the word. He must rapidly decide in all
things to listen to the inspiration of the spirit. There is no time for doubt or
hesitation. Every moment of hesitation would prove that he was still unfit.
Whatever prevents him from listening to the voice of the spirit must be
courageously overcome. It is a question of showing presence of mind in
this situation, and the training at this stage is concerned with the perfect
development of this quality. All the accustomed inducements to act or
even to think now cease. In order not to remain inactive he must not lose
himself, for only within himself can he find the one central point of
vantage where he can gain a firm hold. No one on reading this, without
further acquaintance with these mattes, should feel an antipathy for this
principle of being thrown back on oneself, for success in this trial brings
with it a moment of supreme happiness.
At this stage, no less than at the others, ordinary life is itself an esoteric
training for many. For anyone having reached the point of being able,
when suddenly confronted with some task or problem in life, to come to a
swift decision without hesitation or delay, for him life itself has been a
training in this sense. Such situations are here meant in which success is
instantly lost if action is not rapid. A person who is quick to act when a
misfortune is imminent, whereas a few moments of hesitation would have
seen the misfortune an accomplished fact, and who has turned this ability
into a permanent personal quality, has unconsciously acquired the degree
of maturity necessary for the third trial. For at this stage everything centers
round the development of absolute presence of mind. This trial is known
45
as the Air-Trial, because while undergoing it the candidate can support
himself neither upon the firm basis of external incentive nor upon the
figures, tones, and colors which he has learned at the stages of preparation
and enlightenment, but exclusively upon himself.
Upon successfully passing this trial the student is permitted to enter the
temple of higher wisdom. All that is here said on this subject can only be
the slenderest allusion. The task now to be performed is often expressed in
the statement that the student must take an oath never to betray anything
he has learned. These expressions, however, “oath” and “betray”, are
inappropriate and actually misleading. There is no question of an oath in
the ordinary sense of the word, but rather of an experience that comes at
this stage of development. The candidate learns how to apply the higher
knowledge, how to place it at the service of humanity. He then begins
really and truly to understand the world. It is not so much a question of
withholding the higher truths, but far more of serving them in the right
way and with the necessary tact. The silence he is to keep refers to
something quite different. He acquires this fine quality with regard to
things he had previously spoken, and especially with regard to the manner
in which they were spoken. He would be a poor initiate who did not place
all the higher knowledge he had acquired at the service of humanity, as
well and as far as this is possible. The only obstacle to giving information
in these matters is the lack of understanding on the part of the recipients. It
is true, of course, that the higher knowledge does not lend itself to
promiscuous talk; but no one having reached the stage of development
described above is actually forbidden to say anything. No other person, no
being exacts an oath from him with this intent. Everything is left to his
own responsibility, and he learns in every situation to discover within
himself what he has to do, and an oath means nothing more than that he
has been found qualified to be entrusted with such a responsibility.
If the candidate is found fit for the foregoing experiences, he is then given
what is called symbolically the draught of forgetfulness. This means that
he is initiated into the secret knowledge that enables him to act without
being continually disturbed by the lower memory. This is necessary for the
initiate, for he must have full faith in the immediate present. He must be
able to destroy the veil of memory which envelops man every moment of
his life. If we judge something that happens to us today according to the
experience of yesterday, we are exposed to a multitude of errors. Of
course this does not mean that experience gained in life should be
renounced. It should always be kept in mind as clearly as possible. But the
initiate must have the ability to judge every new experience wholly
according to what is inherent in it, and let it react upon him, unobscurred
by the past. We must be prepared at every moment that every object and
every being can bring to us some new revelation. If we judge the new by
the standard of the old we are liable to error. The memory of past
46
experiences will be of greatest use for the very reason that it enables us to
perceive the new. Had we not gone through a definite experience we
should perhaps be blind to the qualities of the object or being that comes
before us. Thus experience should serve the purpose of perceiving the new
and not of judging it by the standard of the old. In this respect the initiate
acquires certain definite qualities, and thereby many things are revealed to
him which remain concealed from the uninitiated.
The second draught presented to the initiate is the draught of
remembrance. Through its agency he acquires the faculty of retaining the
knowledge of the higher truths ever present in his soul. Ordinary memory
would be unequal to this task. We must unite ourselves and become as one
with the higher truths.
We must not only know them, but be able, quite as a matter of course, to
manifest and administer them in living actions, even as we ordinarily eat
and drink. They must become our practice, our habit, our inclination.
There must be no need to keep thinking about them in the ordinary sense;
they must come to living expression through man himself; they must flow
through him as the functions of life through his organism. Thus doth man
ever raise himself, in a spiritual sense, to that same stature to which
nature raised him in a physical sense.
47
IV
Some Practical Aspects
The training of thoughts and feelings, pursued in the way described in the
chapters on Preparation, Enlightenment, and Initiation, introduces into the
soul and spirit the same organic symmetry with which nature has
constructed the physical body. Before this development, soul and spirit are
undifferentiated masses. The clairvoyant perceives them as interlacing,
rotating, cloud-like spirals, dully glimmering in reddish, reddish-brown, or
reddish-yellow tones. After this training they begin to assume a brilliant
yellowish-green, or greenish-blue color, and show a regular structure. This
inner regularity leading to higher knowledge, is attained when the student
introduces into his thoughts and feelings the same orderly system with
which nature has endowed his bodily organs that enable him to see, hear,
digest, breath, speak. Gradually he learns to breath and see with this soul,
to speak and hear with the spirit.
In the following pages some practical aspects of the higher education of
soul and spirit will be treated in greater detail. They are such that anyone
can put them into practice regardless of other rules, and thereby be led
some distance further into spiritual science.
A particular effort must be made to cultivate the quality of patience. Every
symptom of impatience produces a paralyzing, even a destructive effect on
the higher faculties that slumber in us. We must not expect an
immeasurable view into the higher worlds from one day to the next, for we
should assuredly be disappointed. Contentment with the smallest fragment
attained, repose and tranquility, must more and more take possession of
the soul. It is quite understandable that the student should await results
with impatience; but he will achieve nothing so long as he fails to master
this impatience. Nor is it of any use to combat this impatience merely in
the ordinary sense, for it will become only that much stronger. We over-
look it in self-deception while it plants itself all the more firmly in the
depths of the soul. It is only when we ever and again surrender ourselves
to a certain definite thought, making it absolutely our own, that any results
can be attained. This thought is as follows: I must certainly do everything I
can for the training and development of my soul and spirit; but I shall wait
patiently until higher powers shall have found me worthy of definite
enlightenment. If this thought becomes so powerful in the student that it
grows into an actual feature of his character, he is treading the right path.
This feature soon sets its mark on his exterior. The gaze of his eye
becomes steady, the movement of his body becomes sure, his decisions
definite, and all that goes under the name of nervousness gradually
disappears. Rules that appear trifling and insignificant must be taken into
account. For example, supposing someone affronts us. Before our training
48
we should have directed our resentment against the offender; a wave of
anger would have surged up within us. In a similar case, however, the
thought is immediately present in the mind of the student that such an
affront makes no difference to his intrinsic worth. And he does whatever
must be done to meet the affront with calm and composure, and not in a
spirit of anger. Of course it is not a case of simply accepting every affront,
but of acting with the same calm composure when dealing with an affront
against our own person as we would if the affront were directed against
another person, in whose favor we had the right to intervene. It must
always be remembered that this training is not carried out in crude
outward processes, but in subtle, silent alterations in the life of thought
and feeling.
Patience has the effect of attraction, impatience the effect of repulsion on
the treasures of higher knowledge. In the higher regions of existence
nothing can be attained by haste and unrest. Above all things, desire and
craving must be silenced, for these are qualities of the soul before which
all higher knowledge shyly withdraws. However precious this knowledge
is accounted, the student must not crave it if he wishes to attain it. If he
wishes to have it for his own sake, he will never attain it. This requires
him to be honest with himself in his innermost soul. He must in no case be
under any illusion concerning his own self. With a feeling of inner truth he
must look his own faults, weaknesses, and unfitness full in the face. The
moment he tries to excuse to himself any of his weaknesses, he has placed
a stone in his way on the path which is to lead him upward. Such obstacles
can only be removed by self-enlightenment. There is only one way to get
rid of faults and failings, and that is by a clear recognition of them.
Everything slumbers in the human soul and can be awakened. A person
can even improve his intellect and reason, if he quietly and calmly makes
it clear to himself why he is weak in this respect. Such self- knowledge is,
of course, difficult, for the temptation to self-deception is immeasurably
great. Anyone making a habit of being truthful with himself opens the
portal leading to a deeper insight.
All curiosity must fall away from the student. He must rid himself as much
as possible of the habit of asking questions merely for the sake of
gratifying a selfish thirst for knowledge. He must only ask when
knowledge can serve to perfect his own being in the service of evolution.
Nevertheless, his delight in knowledge and his devotion to it should in no
way be hampered. He should listen devoutly to all that contributes to such
an end, and should seek every opportunity for such devotional attention.
Special attention must be paid in esoteric training to the education of the
life of desires. This does not mean that we are to become free of desire, for
if we are to attain something we must also desire it, and desire will always
tend to fulfillment if backed by a particular force. This force is derived
49
from a right knowledge. Do not desire at all until you know what is right
in any one sphere. That is one of the golden rules for the student. The wise
man first ascertains the laws of the world, and then his desires become
powers which realize themselves. The following example brings this out
clearly. There are certainly many people who would like to learn from
their own observation something about their life before birth. Such a
desire is altogether useless and leads to no result so long as the person in
question has not acquired a knowledge of the laws that govern the nature
of the eternal, a knowledge of these laws in their subtlest and most
intimate character, through the study of spiritual science. But if, having
really acquired this knowledge, he wishes to proceed further, his desire,
now ennobled and purified, will enable him to do so.
It is also no use saying: I particularly wish to examine my previous life,
and shall study only for this purpose. We must rather be capable of
abandoning this desire, of eliminating it altogether, and of studying, at
first, with no such intention. We should cultivate a feeling of joy and
devotion for what we learn, with no thought of the above end in view. We
should learn to cherish and foster a particular desire in such a way that it
brings with it its own fulfillment.
If we become angered, vexed or annoyed, we erect a wall around
ourselves in the soul-world, and the forces which are to develop the eyes
of the soul cannot approach. For instance, if a person angers me he sends
forth a psychic current into the soul-world. I cannot see this current as
long as I am myself capable of anger. My own anger conceals it from me.
We must not, however, suppose that when we are free from anger we shall
immediately have a psychic (astral) vision. For this purpose an organ of
vision must have been developed in the soul. The beginnings of such an
organ are latent in every human being, but remain ineffective as long as he
is capable of anger. Yet this organ is not immediately present the moment
anger has been combated to a small extent. We must rather persevere in
this combating of anger and proceed patiently on our way; then some day
we shall find that this eye of the soul has become developed. Of course,
anger is not the only failing to be combated for the attainment of this end.
Many grow impatient or skeptical, because they have for years combated
certain qualities, and yet clairvoyance has not ensued. In that case they
have just trained some qualities and allowed others to run riot. The gift of
clairvoyance only manifests itself when all those qualities which stunt the
growth of the latent faculties are suppressed. Undoubtedly, the beginnings
of such seeing and hearing may appear at an earlier period, but these are
only young and tender shoots which are subjected to all possible error, and
which, if not carefully tended and guarded, may quickly die.
Other qualities which, like anger and vexation, have to be combated, are
timidity, superstition, prejudice, vanity and ambition, curiosity, the mania
50
for imparting information, and the making of distinctions in human beings
according to the outward characteristics of rank, sex, race, and so forth. In
our time it is difficult for people to understand how the combating of such
qualities can have anything to do with the heightening of the faculty of
cognition. But every spiritual scientist knows that much more depends
upon such matters than upon the increase of intelligence and employment
of artificial exercises. Especially can misunderstanding arise if we believe
that we must become foolhardy in order to be fearless; that we must close
our eyes to the differences between people, because we must combat the
prejudices of rank, race, and so forth. Rather is it true that a correct
estimate of all things is to be attained only when we are no longer
entangled in prejudice. Even in the ordinary sense it is true that the fear of
some phenomenon prevents us from estimating it rightly; that a racial
prejudice prevents us from seeing into a man's soul. It is this ordinary
sense that the student must develop in all its delicacy and subtlety.
Every word spoken without having been thoroughly purged in thought is a
stone thrown in the way of esoteric training. And here something must be
considered which can only be explained by giving an example. If anything
be said to which we must reply, we must be careful to consider the
speaker's opinion, feeling, and even his prejudice, rather than what we
ourselves have to say at the moment on the subject under discussion. In
this example a refined quality of tact is indicated, to the cultivation of
which the student must devote his care. He must learn to judge what
importance it may have for the other person if he opposes the latter's
opinion with his own. This does not mean that he must withhold his
opinion. There can be no question of that. But he must listen to the speaker
as carefully and as attentively as he possibly can and let his reply derive its
form from what he has just heard. In such cases one particular thought
recurs ever and again to the student, and he is treading the right path if this
thought lives with him to the extent of becoming a trait of his character.
This thought is as follows: The importance lies not in the difference of our
opinions but in his discovering through his own effort what is right if I
contribute something toward it. Thoughts of this and of a similar nature
cause the character and the behavior of the student to be permeated with a
quality of gentleness, which is one of the chief means used in all esoteric
training. Harshness scares away the soul-pictures that should open the eye
of the soul; gentleness clears the obstacles away and unseals the inner
organs.
Along with gentleness, another quality will presently be developed in the
soul of the student: that of quietly paying attention to all the subtleties in
the soul-life of his environment, while reducing to absolute silence any
activity within his own soul. The soul-life of his environment will impress
itself on him in such a way that his own soul will grow, and as it grows,
become regular in its structure, as a plant expanding in the sunlight.
51
Gentleness and patient reserve open the soul to the soul-world and the
spirit to the spirit-world. Persevere in silent inner seclusion; close the
senses to all that they brought you before your training; reduce to absolute
immobility all the thoughts which, according to your previous habits,
surged within you; become quite still and silent within, wait in patience,
and then the higher worlds will begin to fashion and perfect the organs of
sights and hearing in your soul and spirit. Do not expect immediately to
see and hear in the world of soul and spirit, for all that you are doing does
but contribute to the development of your higher senses, and you will only
be able to hear with soul and spirit when you possess these higher senses.
Having persevered for a time in silent inner seclusion, go about your
customary daily affairs, imprinting deeply upon your mind this thought:
“Some day, when I have grown sufficiently, I shall attain that which I am
destined to attain,” and make no attempt to attract forcefully any of these
higher powers to yourself. Every student receives these instructions at the
outset. By observing them he perfects himself. If he neglects them, all his
labor is in vain. But they are only difficult of achievement for the
impatient and the unpersevering. No other obstacles exist save those
which we ourselves place in our own path, and which can be avoided by
all who really will. This point must be continually emphasized, because
many people form an altogether wrong conception of the difficulties that
beset the path to higher knowledge. It is easier, in a certain sense, to
accomplish the first steps along this path than to get the better of the
commonest every-day difficulties without this training. Apart from this,
only such things are here imparted as are attended by no danger
whatsoever to the health of soul and body. There are other ways which
lead more quickly to the goal, but what is here explained has nothing to do
with them, because they have certain effects which no experienced
spiritual scientist considers desirable. Since fragmentary information
concerning these ways is continually finding its way into publicity,
express warning must be given against entering upon them. For reasons
which only the initiated can understand, these ways can never be made
public in their true form. The fragments appearing here and there can
never lead to profitable results, but may easily undermine health,
happiness, and peace of mind. It would be far better for people to avoid
having anything to do with such things than to risk entrusting themselves
to wholly dark forces, of whose nature and origin they can know nothing.
Something may here be said concerning the environment in which this
training should be undertaken, for this is not without some importance.
And yet the case differs for almost every person. Anyone practicing in an
environment filled only with self-seeking interests, as for example, the
modern struggle for existence, must be conscious of the fact that these
interests are not without their effect on the development of his spiritual
organs. It is true that the inner laws of these organs are so powerful that
this influence cannot be fatally injurious. J ust as a lily can never grow into
52
a thistle, however inappropriate its environment, so, too, the eye of the
soul can never grow to anything but its destined shape even though it be
subjected to the self-seeking interests of modern cities. But under all
circumstances it is well if the student seeks, now and again, his
environment in the restful peace, the inner dignity and sweetness of
nature. Especially fortunate is the student who can carry out his esoteric
training surrounded by the green world of plants, or among the sunny hills,
where nature weaves her web of sweet simplicity. This environment
develops the inner organs in a harmony which can never ensue in a
modern city. More favorably situated than the townsman is the person
who, during his childhood at least, had been able to breathe the fragrance
of pines, to gaze on snowy peaks, and observe the silent activity of
woodland creatures and insects. Yet no city-dweller should fail to give to
the organs of his soul and spirit, as they develop, the nurture that comes
from the inspired teachings of spiritual research. If our eyes cannot follow
the woods in their mantel of green every spring, day by day, we should
instead open our soul to the glorious teachings of the Bhagavad Gita, or of
St. J ohn's Gospel, or of St. Thomas à Kempis, and to the descriptions
resulting from spiritual science. There are many ways to the summit of
insight, but much depends on the right choice. The spiritually experienced
could say much concerning these paths, much that might seem strange to
the uninitiated. Someone, for instance, might be very far advanced on the
path; he might be standing, so to speak, at the very entrance of sight and
hearing with soul and spirit; he is then fortunate enough to make a journey
over the calm or maybe tempestuous ocean, and a veil falls away from the
eyes of his soul; suddenly he becomes a seer. Another is also so far
advanced that this veil only needs to be loosened; this occurs through
some stroke of destiny. On another this stroke might well have had the
effect of paralyzing his powers and undermining his energy; for the
esoteric student it becomes the occasion of his enlightenment. A third
perseveres patiently for years without any marked result. Suddenly, while
silently seated in his quiet chamber, spiritual light envelops him; the walls
disappear, become transparent for his soul, and a new world expands
before his eyes that have become seeing, or resounds in his ears that have
become spiritually hearing.
53
V
The Conditions of Esoteric Training
The conditions attached to esoteric training are not arbitrary. They are the
natural outcome of esoteric knowledge. J ust as no one can become a
painter who refuses to handle a paint-brush, so, too, no one can receive
esoteric training who is unwilling to meet the demands considered
necessary by the teacher. In the main, the latter can give nothing but
advice, and everything he says should be accepted in this sense. He has
already passed through the preparatory stages leading to a knowledge of
the higher worlds, and knows from experience what is necessary. It
depends entirely upon the free-will of each individual human being
whether or not he choose to tread the same path. To insist on being
admitted to esoteric training without fulfilling the conditions would be
equivalent to saying: “Teach me how to paint, but do not ask me to handle
a paint-brush.” The teacher can never offer anything unless the recipient
comes forward to meet him of his own free-will. But it must be
emphasized that a general desire for higher knowledge is not sufficient.
This desire will, of course, be felt by many, but nothing can be achieved
by it alone so long as the special conditions attached to esoteric training
are not accepted. This point should be considered by those who complain
that the training is difficult. Failure or unwillingness to fulfill these strict
conditions must entail the abandonment of esoteric training, for the time
being. It is true, the conditions are strict, yet they are not harsh, since their
fulfillment not only should be, but indeed must be a voluntary action.
If this fact be overlooked, esoteric training can easily appear in the light of
a coercion of the soul or the conscience; for the training is based on the
development of the inner life, and the teacher must necessarily give advice
concerning this inner life. But there is no question of compulsion when a
demand is met out of free choice. To ask of the teacher: “Give me your
higher knowledge, but leave me my customary emotions, feelings, and
thoughts,” would be an impossible demand. In this case the gratification of
curiosity and desire for knowledge would be the only motive. When
pursued in such a spirit, however, higher knowledge can never be attained.
Let us now consider in turn the conditions imposed on the student. It
should be emphasized that the complete fulfillment of any one of these
conditions is not insisted upon, but only the corresponding effort. No one
can wholly fulfill them, but everyone can start on the path toward them. It
is the effort of will that matters, and the ready disposition to enter upon
this path.
1. The first condition is that the student should pay heed to
the advancement of bodily and spiritual health. Of course,
54
health does not depend, in the first instance, upon the
individual; but the effort to improve in this respect lies
within the scope of all. Sound knowledge can alone
proceed from sound human beings. The unhealthy are not
rejected, but it is demanded of the student that he should
have the will to lead a healthy life. In this respect he must
attain the greatest possible independence. The good
counsels of others, freely bestowed though generally
unsought, are as a rule superfluous. Each must endeavor to
take care of himself. From the physical aspect it will be
more a question of warding off harmful influences than of
anything else. In fulfilling our duties we must often do
things that are detrimental to our health. We must decide at
the right moment to place duty higher than the care of our
health. But just think how much can be avoided with a little
good will. Duty must in many cases stand higher than
health, often, even, than life itself; but pleasure must never
stand higher, as far as the student is concerned. For him
pleasure can only be a means to health and to life, and in
this connection we must, above all, be honest and truthful
with ourselves. There is no use in leading an ascetic life
when the underlying motive is the same in this case as in
other enjoyments. Some may derive satisfaction from
asceticism just as others can from wine-bibbing, but they
must not imagine that this sort of asceticism will assist
them in attaining higher knowledge. Many ascribe to their
circumstances everything which apparently prevents them
from making progress. They say they cannot develop
themselves under their conditions of life. Now, many may
find it desirable for other reasons to change their conditions
of life, but no one need do so for the purpose of esoteric
training. For the latter, a person need only do as much as
possible, whatever his position, to further the health of
body and soul. Every kind of work can serve the whole of
humanity; and it is a surer sign of greatness of soul to
perceive clearly how necessary for this whole is a petty,
perhaps even an offensive employment than to think: “This
work is not good enough for me; I am destined for
something better.” Of special importance for the student is
the striving for complete health of mind. An unhealthy life
of thought and feeling will not fail to obstruct the path to
higher knowledge. Clear, calm thinking, with stability of
feeling and emotion, form here the basis of all work.
Nothing should be further removed from the student than
an inclination toward a fantastical, excitable life, toward
nervousness, exaggeration, and fanaticism. He should
55
acquire a healthy outlook on all circumstances of life; he
should meet the demands of lie with steady assurance,
quietly letting all things make their impression on him and
reveal their message. He should be at pains to do justice to
life on every occasion. All one-sided and extravagant
tendencies in his sentiments and criticisms should be
avoided. Failing this, he would find his way merely into
worlds of his own imagination, instead of higher worlds; in
place of truth, his own pet opinions would assert
themselves. It is better for the student to be matter-of-fact,
than excitable and fantastic.
2. The second condition is that the student should feel
himself co-ordinated as a link in the whole of life. Much is
included in the fulfillment of this condition, but each can
only fulfill it in his own manner. If I am a teacher, and my
pupil does not fulfill my expectations, I must not divert my
resentment against him but against myself. I must feel
myself as one with my pupil, to the extent of asking myself:
“Is my pupil's deficiency not the result of my own action?”
Instead of directing my feelings against him I shall rather
reflect on my own attitude, so that the pupil may in the
future be better able to satisfy my demands. Proceeding
from such an attitude, a change will come over the student's
whole way of thinking. This holds good in all things, great
or small. Such an attitude of mind, for instance, alters the
way I regard a criminal. I suspend my judgment and say to
myself: “I am, like him, only a human being. Through
favorable circumstances I received an education which
perhaps alone saved me from a similar fate.” I may then
also come to the conclusion that this human brother of mine
would have become a different man had my teachers taken
the same pains with him they took with me. I shall reflect
on the fact that something was given to me which was
withheld from him, that I enjoy my fortune precisely
because it was denied him. And then I shall naturally come
to think of myself as a link in the whole of humanity and a
sharer in the responsibility for everything that occurs. This
does not imply that such a thought should be immediately
translated into external acts of agitation. It should be
cherished in stillness within the soul. Then quite gradually
it will set its mark on the outward demeanor of the student.
In such matters each can only begin by reforming himself.
It is of no avail, in the sense of the foregoing thoughts, to
make general demands on the whole of humanity. It is easy
to decide what men ought to be; but the student works in
56
the depths, not on the surface. If would therefore be quite
wrong to relate the demand here indicated with an external,
least of all political, demands; with such matters this
training can have nothing to do. Political agitators know, as
a rule, what to demand of other people; but they say little of
demands on themselves.
3. This brings us to the third condition. The student must
work his way upward to the realization that his thoughts
and feelings are as important for the world as his actions.
It must be realized that it is equally injurious to hate a
fellow-being as to strike him. The realization will then
follow that by perfecting ourselves we accomplish
something not only for ourselves, but for the whole world.
The world derives equal benefit from our untainted feelings
and thoughts as from our good demeanor, and as long as we
cannot believe in this cosmic importance of our inner life,
we are unfit for the path that is here described. We are only
filled with the right faith in the significance of our inner
self, of our soul, when we work at it s though it were at
least as real as all external things. We must admit that our
every feeling produces an effect, just as does every action
of our hand.
4. These words already express the fourth condition: to
acquire the conviction that the real being of man does not
lie in his exterior but in his interior. Anyone regarding
himself as a product of the outer world, as a result of the
physical world, cannot succeed in this esoteric training, for
the feeling that we are beings of soul and spirit forms its
very basis. The acquisition of this feeling renders the
student fit to distinguish between inner duty and outward
success. He learns that the one cannot be directly measured
by the other. He must find the proper mean between what is
indicated by external conditions and what he recognizes as
the right conduct for himself. He should not force upon his
environment anything for which it can have no
understanding, but also he must be quite free from the
desire to do only what can be appreciated by those around
him. The voice of his own soul struggling honestly toward
knowledge must bring him the one and only recognition of
the truths for which he stands. But he must learn as much
as he possibly can from his environment so as to discover
what those around him need, and what is good for them. In
this way he will develop within himself what is known in
spiritual science as the “spiritual balance.” An open heart
57
for the needs of the outer world lies on one of the scales,
and inner fortitude and unfaltering endurance on the other.
5. This brings us to the fifth condition: steadfastness in
carrying out a resolution. Nothing should induce the
student to deviate from a resolution he may have taken,
save only the perception that he was in error. Every
resolution is a force, and if this force does not produce an
immediate effect at the point to which it was applied, it
works nevertheless on in its own way. Success is only
decisive when an action arises from desire. But all actions
arising from desire are worthless in relation to the higher
worlds. There, love for an action is alone the decisive
factor. In this love, every impulse that impels the student to
action should fulfill itself. Undismayed by failure, he will
never grow weary of endeavoring repeatedly to translate
some resolution into action. And in this way he reaches the
stage of not waiting to see the outward effect of his actions,
but of contenting himself with performing them. He will
learn to sacrifice his actions, even his whole being, to the
world, however the world may receive his sacrifice.
Readiness for a sacrifice, for an offering such as this, must
be shown by all who would pursue the path of esoteric
training.
6. A sixth condition is the development of a feeling of
thankfulness for everything with which man is favored. We
must realize that our existence is a gift from the entire
universe. How much is needed to enable each one of us to
receive and maintain his existence! How much to we not
owe to nature and to our fellow human beings! Thoughts
such as these must come naturally to all who seek esoteric
training, for if the latter do not feel inclined to entertain
them, they will be incapable of developing within
themselves that all-embracing love which is necessary for
the attainment of higher knowledge. Nothing can reveal
itself to us which we do not love. And every revelation
must fill us with thankfulness, for we ourselves are the
richer for it.
7. All these conditions must be united in a seventh: to
regard life unceasingly in the manner demanded by these
conditions. The student thus makes it possible to give his
life the stamp of uniformity. All his modes of expression
will, in this way, be brought into harmony, and no longer
contradict each other. And thus he will prepare himself for
58
the inner tranquillity he must attain during the preliminary
steps of his training.
Anyone sincerely showing the good will to fulfill these conditions may
decide to seek esoteric training. He will then be ready to follow the advice
given above. Much of his advice may appear to be merely on the surface,
and many will perhaps say that they did not expect the training to proceed
in such strict forms. But everything interior must manifest itself in an
exterior way, and just as a picture is not evident when it exists only in the
mind of the painter, so, too, there can be no esoteric training without
outward expression. Disregard for strict forms is only shown by those who
do not know that the exterior is the avenue of expression for the interior.
No doubt it is the spirit that really matters, and not the form; but just as
form without spirit is null and void, so also would spirit remain inactive if
it did not create for itself a form.
The above conditions are calculated to render the student strong enough to
fulfill the further demands made on him during this training. If he fail in
these conditions he will hesitate before each new demand, and without
them he will lack that faith in man which he must possess. For all striving
for truth must be founded on faith in and true love for man. But though
this is the foundation it is not the source of all striving for truth, for such
striving can only flow from the soul's own fountain-head of strength. And
the love of man must gradually widen to a love for all living creatures,
yes, for all existence. Through failure to fulfill the condition here given,
the student will lack the perfect love for everything that fashions and
creates, and the inclination to refrain from all destruction as such. He must
so train himself that not only in his actions but also in his words, feelings,
and thoughts he will never destroy anything for the sake of destruction.
His joy must be in growth and life, and he must only lend his hand to
destruction, when he is also able, through and by means of destruction, to
promote new life. This does not mean that the student must simply look on
while evil runs riot, but rather that he must seek even in evil that side
through which he may transform it into good. He will then see more and
more clearly that evil and imperfection may best be combated by the
creation of the good and the perfect. The student knows that out of
nothing, nothing can be created, but also that the imperfect can be
transformed into the perfect. Anyone developing within himself the
disposition to create, will soon find himself capable of facing evil in the
right way.
It must be clearly realized that the purpose of this training is to build and
not to destroy. The student should therefore bring with him the good will
for sincere and devoted work, and not the intention to criticize and
destroy. He should be capable of devotion, for he must learn what he does
not yet know; he should look reverently on that which discloses itself.
59
Work and devotion, these are the fundamental qualities which must be
demanded of the student. Some come to realize that they are making no
progress, though in their own opinion they are untiringly active. The
reason is that they have not grasped the meaning of work and devotion in
the right way. Work done for the sake of success will be the least
successful, and learning pursued without devotion will be the least
conducive to progress. Only the love of work, and not of success, leads to
progress. And if in learning the student seeks straight thinking and sound
judgment, he need not stunt his devotion by doubts and suspicions.
We are not reduced to service subjection in listening to some information
with quiet devotion and because we do not at once oppose it with our own
opinion. Anyone having advanced some way in the attainment of higher
knowledge knows that he owes everything to quiet attention and active
reflection, and not to willful personal judgment. We should always bear in
mind that we do not need to learn what we are already able to judge.
Therefore if our sole intention is to judge, we can learn nothing more.
Esoteric training, however, center in learning; we must have absolutely the
good will to be learners. If we cannot understand something, it is far better
not to judge than to judge adversely. We can wait until later for a true
understanding. The higher we climb the ladder of knowledge, the more do
we require the faculty of listening with quiet devotion. All perception of
truth, all life and activity in the world of the spirit, become subtle and
delicate in comparison with the processes of the ordinary intellect and of
life in the physical world. The more the sphere of our activity widens out
before us, the more delicate are the processes in which we are engaged. It
is for this reason that men arrive at such different opinions and points of
view regarding the higher regions. But there is one and only one opinion
regarding higher truths and this one opinion is within reach of all who,
through work and devotion, have so risen that they can really behold truth
and contemplate it. Opinions differing from the one true opinion can only
be arrived at when people, insufficiently prepared, judge in accordance
with their pet theories, their habitual ways of thought, and so forth. J ust as
there is only one correct opinion concerning a mathematical problem, so
also is this true with regard to the higher worlds. But before such an
opinion can be reached, due preparation must first be undergone. If this
were only considered, the conditions attached to esoteric training would be
surprising to none. It is indeed true that truth and the higher life abide in
every soul, and that each can and must find them for himself But they lie
deeply buried, and can only be brought up from their deep shafts after all
obstacles have been cleared away. Only the experienced can advise how
this may be done. Such advice is found in spiritual science. No truth is
forced on anyone; no dogma is proclaimed; a way only is pointed out. It is
true that everyone could find this way unaided, but only perhaps after
many incarnations. By esoteric training this way is shortened. We thus
60
reach more quickly a point from which we can cooperate in those worlds
where the salvation and evolution of man are furthered by spiritual work.
This brings to an end the indications to be given in connection with the
attainment of knowledge of higher worlds. In the following chapter, and in
further connection with the above, it will be shown how this development
affects the higher elements of the human organism (the soul-organism or
astral body, and the spirit or thought-body.) In this way the indications
here given will be placed in a new light, and it will be possible to penetrate
them in a deeper sense.
61
VI
Some Results of Initiation
One of the fundamental principles of true spiritual science is that the one
who devotes himself to its study should do so with full consciousness; he
should attempt nothing and practice nothing without knowledge of the
effect produced. A teacher of spiritual science who gives advice or
instruction will, at the same time, always explain to those striving for
higher knowledge the effects produced on body, soul and spirit, if his
advice and instructions be followed.
Some effects produced upon the soul of the student will here be indicated.
For only those who know such things as they are here communicated can
undertake in full consciousness the exercises that lead to knowledge of the
higher worlds. Without the latter no genuine esoteric training is possible,
for it must be understood that all groping in the dark is discouraged, and
that failure to pursue this training with open eyes may lead to mediumship,
but not to exact clairvoyance in the sense of spiritual science.
The exercises described in the preceding chapters, if practiced in the right
way, involve certain changes in the organism of the soul (astral body). The
latter is only perceptible to the clairvoyant, and may be compared to a
cloud, psycho-spiritually luminous to a certain degree, in the center of
which the physical body is discernible. (A description will be found in the
author's book, Theosophy.) In this astral body desires, lusts, passions, and
ideas become visible in a spiritual way. Sensual appetites, for instance,
create the impression of a dark red radiance with a definite shape; a pure
and noble thought finds its expression in a reddish-violet radiance; the
clear-cut concept of the logical thinker is experienced as a yellowish
figure with sharply defined outline; the confused thought of the muddled
head appears as a figure with vague outline. The thoughts of a person with
one-sided, queer views appear sharply outlined but immobile, while the
thoughts of people accessible to the points of view of others are seen to
have mobile, changeable outlines. (In all these and the following
descriptions it must be noted that by seeing a color, spiritual seeing is
meant. When the clairvoyant speaks of “seeing red,” he means: “I have an
experience, in a psycho-spiritual way, which is equivalent to the physical
experience when an impression of red is received.” This mode of
expression is here used because it is perfectly natural to the clairvoyant. If
this point is over-looked, a mere color-vision may easily be mistaken for a
genuine clairvoyant experience.)
The further the student advances in his inner development, the more
regular will be the differentiation within his astral body. The latter is
confused and undifferentiated in the case of a person of undeveloped inner
62
life; yet the clairvoyant can perceive even the unorganized astral body as a
figure standing out distinctly from its environment. It extends from the
center of the head to the middle of the physical body, and appears like an
independent body possessing certain organs. The organs now to be
considered are perceptible to the clairvoyant near the following part of the
physical body: the first between the eyes; the second near the larynx; the
third in the region of the heart; the fourth in the so-called pit of the
stomach; the fifth and sixth are situated in the abdomen. These organs are
technically known as wheels, chakrams, or lotus flowers. They are so
called on account of their likeness to wheels or flowers, but of course it
should be clearly understood that such an expression is not to be applied
more literally than is the term “wings” when referring to the two halves of
the lungs. J ust as there is no question of wings in the case of the lungs, so,
too, in the case of the lotus flowers the expression must be taken
figuratively. In undeveloped persons these lotus flowers are dark in color,
motionless and inert. In the clairvoyant, however, they are luminous,
mobile, and of variegated color. Something of this kind applies to the
medium, though in a different way; this question, however, need not be
pursued here any further.
Now, when the student begins his exercises, the lotus flowers become
more luminous; later on they begin to revolve. When this occurs,
clairvoyance begins. For these flowers are the sense-organs of the soul,
and their revolutions express the fact that the clairvoyant perceives
supersensibly. What was said previously concerning spiritual seeing
applies equally to these revolutions and even to the lotus flowers
themselves. No one can perceive the supersensible until he has developed
his astral senses in this way. Thanks to the spiritual organ situated in the
vicinity of the larynx, it becomes possible to survey clairvoyantly the
thoughts and mentality of other beings, and to obtain a deeper insight into
the true laws of natural phenomena. The organ situated near the heart
permits of clairvoyant knowledge of the sentiments and disposition of
other souls. When developed, this organ also makes it possible to observe
certain deeper forces in animals and plants. By means of the organ in the
so-called pit of the stomach, knowledge is acquired of the talents and
capacities of souls; by its means, too, the part played by animals, plants,
stones, metals, atmospheric phenomena and so on in the household of
nature becomes apparent.
The organ in the vicinity of the larynx has sixteen petals or spokes; the one
in the region of the heart twelve, and the one in the pit of the stomach ten.
Now certain activities of the soul are connected with the development of
these organs, and anyone devoting himself to them in a certain definite
way contributes something to the development of the corresponding
organs. In the sixteen-petalled lotus, eight of its sixteen petals were
63
developed in the remote past during an earlier stage of human evolution.
Man himself contributed nothing to this development; he received them as
a gift from nature, at a time when his consciousness was in a dull, dreamy
condition. At that stage of human evolution they were in active use, but
the manner of their activity was only compatible with that dull state of
consciousness. As consciousness became clearer and brighter, the petals
became obscured and ceased their activity. Man himself can now develop
the remaining eight petals by means of conscious exercises, and thereby
the whole lotus flower becomes luminous and mobile. The acquisition of
certain faculties depends on the development of each one of the sixteen
petals. Yet, as already shown, only eight can be consciously developed;
the remainder then appear of their own accord.
The development proceeds in the following manner. The student must first
apply himself with care and attention to certain functions of the soul
hitherto exercised by him in a careless and inattentive manner. There are
eight such functions. The first is the way in which ideas and conceptions
are acquired. In this respect people usually allow themselves to be led by
chance alone. They see or hear one thing or another and form their ideas
accordingly. As long as this is the case the sixteen petals of the lotus
flower remain ineffective. It is only when the student begins to take his
self-education in hand, in this respect, that the petals become effective. His
ideas and conceptions must be guarded; each single idea should acquire
significance fore him; he should see it in a definite message instructing
him concerning the things of the outer world, and he should derive no
satisfaction from ideas devoid of such significance. He must govern his
mental life so that it becomes a true mirror of the outer world, and direct
his effort to the exclusion of incorrect ideas from his soul.
The second of these functions is concerned with the control of resolutions.
The student must not resolve upon even the most trifling act without well-
founded and thorough consideration. Thoughtless and meaningless actions
should be foreign to his nature. He should have well-considered grounds
for everything he does, and abstain from everything to which no
significant motive urges him.
The third function concerns speech. The student should utter no word that
is devoid of sense and meaning; all talking for the sake of talking draws
him away from his path. He must avoid the usual kind of conversation,
with its promiscuous discussion of indiscriminately varied topics. This
does not imply his preclusion from intercourse with his fellows. It is
precisely in such intercourse that his conversation should develop to
significance. He is ready to converse with everyone, but he does so
thoughtfully and with thorough deliberation. He never speaks without
grounds for what he says. He seeks to use neither too many nor too few
words.
64
The fourth is the regulation of outward action. The student tries to adjust
his actions in such a way that they harmonize with the actions of his
fellow-men and with the events in his environment. He refrains from
actions which are disturbing to others and in conflict with his
surroundings. He seeks to adjust his actions so that they combine
harmoniously with his surroundings and with his position in life. When an
external motive causes him to act he considers how he can best respond.
When the impulse proceeds from himself he weighs with minute care the
effects of his activity.
The fifth function includes the management of the whole of life. The
student endeavors to live in conformity with both nature and spirit. Never
overhasty, he is also never indolent. Excessive activity and laziness are
equally alien to him. He looks upon life as a means for work and disposes
it accordingly. He regulates his habits and the care of his health in such a
way that a harmonious whole is the outcome.
The sixth is concerned with human endeavor. The student tests his
capacities and proficiency, and conducts himself in the light of such self-
knowledge. He attempts nothing beyond his powers, yet seems to omit
nothing within their scope. On the other hand, he sets himself aims that
have to do with the ideals and the great duties of a human being. He does
not mechanically regard himself as a wheel in the vast machinery of
mankind but seeks to comprehend the tasks of his life, and to look out
beyond the limit of the daily and trivial. He endeavors to fulfill his
obligations ever better and more perfectly.
The seventh deals with the effort to learn as much from life as possible.
Nothing passes before the student without giving him occasion to
accumulate experience which is of value to him for life. If he has
performed anything wrongly or imperfectly, he lets this be an incentive for
meeting the same contingency later on rightly and perfectly. When others
act he observes them with the same end in view. He tries to gather a rich
store of experience, ever returning to it for counsel; nor indeed will he
ever do anything without looking back on experiences from which he can
derive help in his decisions and affairs.
Finally, the eighth is as follows: The student must, from time to time,
glance introspectively into himself, sink back into himself, take counsel
with himself, form and test the fundamental principles of his life, run over
in his thoughts the sum total of his knowledge, weigh his duties, and
reflect upon the content and aim of life. All these things have been
mentioned in the preceding chapters; here they are merely recapitulated in
connection with the development of the sixteen-petalled lotus. By means
of these exercises the latter will become ever more and more perfect, for it
is upon such exercises that the development of clairvoyance depends. The
65
better the student's thoughts and speech harmonize with the processes in
the outer world, the more quickly will he develop this faculty. Whoever
thinks and speaks what is contrary to truth destroys something in the germ
of his sixteen-petalled lotus. Truthfulness, uprightness, and honesty are in
this connection creative forces, while mendacity, deceitfulness, and
dishonesty are destructive forces. The student must realize, however, that
actual deeds are needed, and not merely good intentions. If I think or say
anything that does not conform with reality, I kill something in my
spiritual organs, even though I believe my intentions to be ever so good. It
is here as with the child which needs must burn itself when it touches fire,
even though it did so out of ignorance. The regulation of the above
activities of the soul in the manner described causes the sixteen-petalled
lotus to shine in glorious hues, and imparts to it a definite movement. Yet
it must be noted that the faculty of clairvoyance cannot make its
appearance before a definite degree of development of the soul has been
reached. It cannot appear as long as it is irksome for the student to regulate
his life in this manner. He is still unfit as long as the activities described
above are a matter of special pre-occupation for him The first traces of
clairvoyance only appear when he has reached the point of being able to
live in the specified way, as a person habitually lives. These things must
then no longer be laborious, but must have become a matter of course.
There must be no need for him to be continually watching himself and
urging himself on to live in this way. It must all have become a matter of
habit.
Now this lotus flower may be made to develop in another way by
following certain other instructions. But all such methods are rejected by
true spiritual science, for they lead to the destruction of physical health
and to moral ruin. They are easier to follow than those here described. The
latter, though protracted and difficult, lead to the true goal and cannot but
strengthen morally.
The distorted development of a lotus flower results not only in illusions
and fantastic conceptions, should a certain degree of clairvoyance be
acquired, but also in errors and instability in ordinary life. Such a
development may be the cause of timidity, envy, vanity, haughtiness,
willfulness and so on in a person who hitherto was free from these defects.
It has already been explained that eight of the sixteen petals of this lotus
flower were developed in a remote past, and that these will re-appear of
themselves in the course of esoteric development. All the effort and
attention of the student must be devoted to the remaining eight. Faulty
training may easily result in the re-appearance of the earlier petals alone,
while the new petals remain stunted. This will ensue especially if too little
logical, rational thinking is employed in the training. It is of supreme
importance that the student should be a rational and clear-thinking person,
and of further importance that he should practice the greatest clarity of
66
speech. People who begin to have some presentiment of supersensible
things are apt to wax talkative on this subject, thereby retarding their
normal development. The less one talks about these matters the better.
Only someone who has achieved a certain degree of clarity should speak
about them. At the beginning of their instruction, students are as a rule
astonishes at the teacher's lack of curiosity concerning their own
experiences. It would be much better for them to remain entirely silent on
this subject, and to content themselves with mentioning only whether they
have been successful or unsuccessful in performing the exercises and
observing the instructions given them. For the teacher has quite other
means of estimating their progress than the students' own statements. The
eight petals now under consideration always become a little hardened
through such statements, whereas they should be kept soft and supple. The
following example taken, for the sake of clarity, not from the
supersensible world but from ordinary life, will illustrate this point.
Suppose I hear a piece of news and thereupon immediately form an
opinion. Shortly afterwards I receive some further news which does not
tally with the previous information. I am thereby obliged to reverse my
previous judgment. The result is an unfavorable influence upon my
sixteen-petalled lotus. Quite the contrary would have been the case had I,
in the first place, suspended judgment, and remained silent both inwardly
in thought and outwardly in word concerning the whole affair, until I had
acquired reliable grounds for forming my judgment. Caution in the
formation and pronouncement of judgments becomes, by degrees, the
special characteristic of the student. On the other hand his receptivity for
impressions and experiences increases; he lets them pass over him silently,
so as to collect and have the largest possible number of facts at his
disposal when the time comes to form his opinions. Bluish-red and
reddish-pink shades color the lotus flower as the result of such
circumspection, whereas in the opposite case dark red and orange shades
appear. (Students will recognize in the conditions attached to the
development of the sixteen-petalled lotus the instructions given by the
Buddha to his disciples for the Path. Yet there is no question here of
teaching Buddhism, but of describing conditions governing development
which are the natural outcome of spiritual science. The fact that these
conditions correspond with certain teachings of the Buddha is no reason
for not finding them true in themselves.)
The twelve-petalled lotus situated in the region of the heart is developed in
a similar way. Half its petals, too, were already existent and in active use
in a remote stage of human evolution. Hence these six petals need not now
be especially developed in esoteric training; they appear of themselves and
begin to revolve when the student sets to work on the other six. Here again
he learns to promote this development by consciously controlling and
directing certain inner activities in a special way.
67
It must be clearly understood that the perceptions of each single organ of
soul or sprit bear a different character. The twelve and sixteen-petalled
lotus flowers transmit quite different perceptions. The latter perceives
forms. The thoughts and mentality of other beings and the laws governing
natural phenomena become manifest, through the sixteen-petalled lotus, as
figures, not rigid motionless figures but mobile forms filled with life. The
clairvoyant in whom this sense is developed can describe, for every mode
of thought and for every law of nature, a form which expresses them. A
revengeful thought, for example, assumes an arrow-like, pronged form,
while a kindly thought is often formed like an opening flower, and so on.
Clear-cut, significant thoughts are regular and symmetrical in form, while
confused thoughts have wavy outlines. Quite different perceptions are
received through the twelve-petalled lotus. These perceptions may, in a
sense, be likened to warmth and cold, as applied to the soul. A clairvoyant
equipped with this faculty feels this warmth and cold streaming out from
the forms discerned by the sixteen-petalled lotus. Had he developed the
sixteen and not the twelve-petalled lotus he would only perceive, in the
kindly thought, for instance, the figure described above, while a
clairvoyant in whom both senses were developed would also notice what
can only be described as soul-warmth, flowing from the thought. It would
be noted in passing that esoteric training never develops one organ without
the other, so that the above-mentioned example may be regarded as a
hypothetical case in behalf of clarity. The twelve-petalled lotus, when
developed, reveals to the clairvoyant a deep understanding of the
processes of nature. Rays of soul-warmth issue from every manifestation
of growth and development, while everything in the process of decay,
destruction, ruin, gives an impression of cold.
The development of this sense may be furthered in the following manner.
To begin with, the student endeavors to regulate his sequence of thought
(control of thought). J ust as the sixteen-petalled lotus is developed by
cultivating thoughts that conform with truth and are significant, so, too,
the twelve-petalled lotus is developed by inwardly controlling the trains of
thought. Thoughts that dart to and fro like will-o'-the-wisps and follow
each other in no logical or rational sequence, but merely by pure chance,
destroy its form. The closer thought is made to follow upon thought, and
the more strictly everything of illogical nature is avoided, the more
suitable will be the form this sense organ develops. If the student hears
illogical thoughts he immediately lets the right thoughts pass through his
mind. He should not, however, withdraw in a loveless way from what is
perhaps an illogical environment in order to further his own development.
Neither should he feel himself impelled to correct all the illogical thoughts
expressed around him. He should rather silently co-ordinate the thoughts
as they pour in upon him, and make them conform to logic and sense, and
at the same time endeavor in every case to retain this same method in his
own thinking.
68
An equal consistency in his actions forms the second requirement (control
of actions). All inconstancy, all disharmony of action, is baneful for the
lotus here in question. When the student performs some action he must see
to it that his succeeding action follows in logical sequence, for if he acts
from day to day with variable intent he will never develop the faculty here
considered.
The third requirement is the cultivation of endurance (perseverance). The
student is impervious to all influences which would divert him from the
goal he has set himself, as long as he can regard it as the right goal. For
him, obstacles contain a challenge that impels him to surmount them, but
never a reason for giving up.
The fourth requirement is forbearance (tolerance) toward persons,
creatures, and also circumstances. The student suppresses all superfluous
criticism of everything that is imperfect, evil and bad, and seeks rather to
understand everything that comes under his notice. Even as the sun does
not withdraw its light from the bad and the evil, so he, too, does not refuse
them an intelligent sympathy. Should some trouble befall him he does not
proceed to condemn and criticize, but accepts the inevitable, and
endeavors to the best of his ability to give the matter a turn for the best. He
does not consider the opinions of others merely from his own standpoint,
but seeks to put himself into the other's position.
The fifth requirement is impartiality toward everything that life brings. In
this connection we speak of faith and trust. The student meets every
human being and every creature with this trust, and lets it inspire his every
action. Upon hearing some information, he never says to himself: “I don't
believe it; it contradicts my present opinions.” He is far rather ready to test
and rectify his views and opinions. He ever remains receptive for
everything that confronts him, and he trusts in the efficacy of his
undertakings. Timidity and skepticism are banished from his being. He
harbors a faith in the power of his intentions. A hundred failures cannot
rob him of this faith. This is the “faith which can move mountains.”
The sixth requirement is the cultivation of a certain inner balance
(equanimity). The student endeavors to retain his composure in the face of
joy and sorrow, and eradicates the tendency to fluctuate between the
seventh heaven of joy and the depths of despair. Misfortune and danger,
fortune and advancement alike find him ready armed.
The reader will recognize in the qualities here described the six attributes
which the candidate for initiation strives to acquire. The intention has been
to show their connection with the spiritual organ known as the twelve-
petalled lotus flower. As before, special instructions can be given to bring
this lotus flower to fruition, but here again the perfect symmetry of its
69
form depends on the development of the qualities mentioned, the neglect
of which results in this organ being formed into a caricature of its proper
shape. In this case, should a certain clairvoyance be attained, the qualities
in question may take an evil instead of a good direction. A person may
become intolerant, timid, or contentious toward his environment; may, for
instance, acquire some feeling for the sentiments of others, and for this
reason shun them or hate them. This may even reach the point where, by
reason of the inner coldness that overwhelms him when he hears
repugnant opinions, he is unable to listen, or he may behave in an
objectionable manner.
The development of this organ may be accelerated if, in addition to all that
has been stated, certain other injunctions are observed which can only be
imparted to the student by word of mouth. Yet the instructions given
above do actually lead to genuine esoteric training, and more-over, the
regulation of life in the way described can be advantageous to all who
cannot or will not undergo esoteric training. For it does not fail to produce
an effect upon the organism of the soul, even though slowly. As regards
the esoteric student, the observance of these principles is indispensable.
Should he attempt esoteric training without conforming to them, this could
only result in his entering the higher worlds with inadequate organs, and
instead of perceiving the truth he would be subject to deceptions and
illusions. He would attain a certain clairvoyance, but for the most part, be
the victim of greater blindness than before. Formerly he at least stood
firmly within the physical world; now he looks beyond this physical world
and grows confused about it before acquiring a firm footing in a higher
world. All power of distinguishing truth from error would then perhaps
fail him, and he would entirely lose his way in life. It is just for this reason
that patience is so necessary in these matters. It must ever be borne in
mind that the instructions given in esoteric training may go no further than
is compatible with the willing readiness shown to develop the lotus
flowers to their regular shape. Should these flowers be brought to fruition
before they have quietly attained their correct form, mere caricatures
would be the result. Their maturity can be brought about by the special
instructions given in esoteric training, but their form is dependent on the
method of life described above.
An inner training of a particularly intimate character is necessary for the
development of the ten-petalled lotus flower, for it is now a question of
learning consciously to control and dominate the sense-impressions
themselves. This is of particular importance in the initial stages of
clairvoyance, for it is only by this means that a source of countless
illusions and fancies is avoided. People as a rule do not realize by what
factors their sudden ideas and memories are dominated, and how they are
produced. Consider the following case. Someone is traveling by railway;
his mind is busy with one thought; suddenly is thought diverges; he
70
recollects an experience that befell him years ago and interweaves it with
his present thought. He did not notice that in looking through the window
he had caught sight of a person who resembled another intimately
connected with the recollected experience. He remains conscious, not of
what he saw, but of the effect it produced, and thus believes that it all
came to him of its own accords. How much in life occurs in such a way!
How great is the part played in our life by things we hear and learn,
without our consciously realizing the connection! Someone, for instance,
cannot bear a certain color, but does not realize that this is due to the fact
that the schoolmaster who used to worry him many years ago wore a coat
of that color. Innumerable illusions are based upon such associations.
Many things leave their mark upon the soul while remaining outside the
pale of consciousness. The following may occur. Someone reads in the
paper about the death of a well-known person, and forthwith claims to
have had a presentiment of it yesterday, although he had neither heard nor
seen anything that might have given rise to such a thought. And indeed it
is quite true that the thought occurred to him yesterday, as though of its
own accord, that this particular person would die; only one thing escaped
his attention: two or three hours before this thought occurred to him
yesterday, he went to visit an acquaintance; a newspaper lay on the table;
he did not actually read it, but his eyes unconsciously fell on the
announcement of the dangerous illness of the person in question. He
remained unconscious of the impression he had received, and yet this
impression resulted in his presentiment.
Reflection upon these matters will show how great is the source of illusion
and fantasy contained in such associations. It is just this source which
must be dammed up by all who seek to develop their ten-petalled lotus
flower. Deeply hidden characteristics in other souls can be perceived by
this organ, but their truth depends on the attainment of immunity from the
above-mentioned illusions. For this purpose it is necessary that the student
should control and dominate everything that seeks to influence him from
outside. He should reach the point of really receiving no impressions
beyond those he wishes to receive. This can only be achieved by the
development of a powerful inner life; by an effort of the will he only
allows such things to impress him to which his attention is directed, and he
actually evades all impressions to which he does not voluntarily respond.
If he sees something it is because he wills to see it, and if he does not
voluntarily take notice of something it is actually non-existent for him.
The greater the energy and inner activity devoted to this work, the more
extensively will this faculty be attained. The student must avoid all
vacuous gazing and mechanical listening. For him only those things exist
to which he turns his eye or his ear. He must practice the power of hearing
nothing, even in the greatest disturbance, if he does not will to hear; and
he must make his eyes unimpressionable to things of which he does not
particularly take notice. He must be shielded as by an inner armor against
71
all unconscious impressions. In this connection the student must devote
special care to his thought-life. He singles out a particular thought and
endeavors to link with it only such other thoughts as he can himself
consciously and voluntarily produce. He rejects all casual ideas and does
not connect this thought with another until he has investigated the origin
of the latter. He goes still further. If, for instance, he feels a particular
antipathy for something, he will combat it and endeavor to establish a
conscious relation between himself and the thing in question. In this way
the unconscious elements that intrude into his soul will become fewer and
fewer. Only by such severe self-discipline can the ten-petalled lotus flower
attain its proper form. The student's inner life must become a life of
attention, and he must learn really to hold at a distance everything to
which he should not or does not wish to direct his attention.
If this strict self-discipline be accompanied by meditation as prescribed in
esoteric training, the lotus flower in the region of the pit of the stomach
comes to maturity in the right way, and light and color of a spiritual kind
are now added to the form and warmth perceptible to the organs described
above. The talents and faculties of other beings are thereby revealed, also
the forces and the hidden attributes of nature. The colored aura of living
creatures then becomes visible; all that is around us manifests its spiritual
attributes. It must be understood that the very greatest care is necessary at
this stage of development, for the play of unconscious memories is here
exceedingly active. If this were not the case, many people would possess
this inner sense, for it comes almost immediately into evidence when the
impressions delivered by the outer senses are held so completely under
control that they become dependent on nothing save attention or
inattention. This inner sense remains ineffective as long as the powerful
outer sense smother and benumb it.
Still greater difficulty attends the development of the six-petalled lotus
flower situated in the center of the body, for it can only be achieved as the
result of complete mastery and control of the whole personality through
consciousness of self, so that body, soul and spirit form one harmonious
whole. The functions of the body, the inclinations and passions of the soul,
the thoughts and ideas of the spirit must be tuned to perfect unison. The
body must be so ennobled and purified that its organs incite to nothing that
is not in the service of soul and spirit. The soul must not be impelled
through the body to lusts and passions which are antagonistic to pure and
noble thought. Yet the spirit must not stand like a slave-driver over the
soul, dominating it with laws and commandments; the soul must rather
learn to obey these laws and duties out of its own free inclination. The
student must not feel duty to be an oppressive power to which he
unwillingly submits, but rather something which he performs out of love.
His task is to develop a free soul that maintains equilibrium between body
and spirit, and he must perfect himself in this way to the extent of being
72
free to abandon himself to the functions of the senses, for these should be
so purified that they lose the power to drag him down to their level. He
must no longer require to curb his passions, in as much as they of their
own accord follow the good. So long as self-chastisement is necessary, no
one can pass a certain stage of esoteric development; for a virtue practiced
under constraint if futile. If there is any lust remaining, it interferes with
esoteric development, however great the effort made not to humor it. Nor
does it matter whether this desire proceeds from the soul or the body. For
example, if a certain stimulant be avoided for the purpose of self-
purification, this deprivation will only prove helpful if the body suffers no
harm from it. Should the contrary to be the case, this proves that the body
craves the stimulant, and that abstinence from it is of no value. In this case
it may actually be a question of renouncing the ideal to be attained, until
more favorable physical conditions, perhaps in another life, shall be
forthcoming. A wise renunciation may be a far greater achievement than
the struggle for something which, under given conditions, remains
unattainable. Indeed, a renunciation of this kind contributes more toward
development than the opposite course.
The six-petalled lotus flower, when developed, permits intercourse with
beings of higher worlds, though only when their existence is manifested in
the astral or soul-world. The development of this lotus flower, however, is
not advisable unless the student has made great progress on that path of
esoteric development which enables him to raise his spirit into a still
higher world. This entry into the spiritual world proper must always run
parallel with the development of the lotus flowers, otherwise the student
will fall into error and confusion. He would undoubtedly be able to see,
but he would remain incapable of forming a correct estimate of what he
saw. Now, the development of the six-petalled lotus flower itself provides
a certain security against confusion and instability, for no one can be
easily confused who has attained perfect equilibrium between sense (or
body), passion (or soul), and idea (or spirit). And yet, something more
than this security is required when, through the development of the six-
petalled lotus flower, living beings of independent existence are revealed
to his spirit, beings belonging to a world so completely different from the
world known to his physical senses. The development of the lotus flowers
alone does not assure sufficient security in these higher worlds; still higher
organs are necessary. The latter will now be described before the
remaining lotus flowers and the further organization of the soul-body are
discussed. (This expression — soul-body — although obviously
contradictory when taken literally, is used because to clairvoyant
perception the impression received spiritually corresponds to the
impression received physically when the physical body is perceived.)
The development of the soul-body in the manner described above permits
perception in a supersensible world, but anyone wishing to find his way in
73
this world must not remain stationary at this stage of development. The
mere mobility of the lotus flowers is not sufficient. The student must
acquire the power of regulating and controlling the movement of his
spiritual organs independently and with complete consciousness;
otherwise he would become a plaything for external forces and powers. To
avoid this he must acquire the faculty of hearing what is called the inner
world, and this involves the development not only of the soul-body but
also of the etheric body. The latter is that tenuous body revealed to the
clairvoyant as a kind of double of the physical body, and forms to a certain
extent an intermediate step between the soul nature and the physical body.
(See the description on the author's book Theosophy.) It is possible for one
equipped with clairvoyant powers consciously to suggest away the
physical body of a person. This corresponds on a higher plane to an
exercise in attentiveness on a lower plane. J ust as a person can divert his
attention from something in front of him so that it becomes non-existent
for him, the clairvoyant can extinguish a physical body from his field of
observation so that it becomes physically transparent to him. If he exerts
this faculty in the case of some person standing before him, there remains
visible to his clairvoyant sight only the etheric body, besides the soul-body
which is larger than the other two — etheric and physical bodies — and
interpenetrates them both. The etheric body has approximately the size
and form of the physical body, so that it practically fills the same space. It
is an extremely delicate and finely organized structure. (I beg the physicist
not to be disturbed at the expression “etheric body”. The word ether here
is merely used to suggest the fineness of the body in question, and need
not in any way be connected with the hypothetical ether of physics.)
Its ground-color is different from any of the seven colors contained in the
rainbow. Anyone capable of observing it will find a color which is
actually non-existent for sense perception but to which the color of the
young peach-blossom may be comparable. If desired, the etheric body can
be examined alone; for this purpose the soul-body must be extinguished
by an effort of attentiveness in the manner described above. Otherwise the
etheric body will present an ever changing picture owing to its
interpenetration by the soul-body.
Now, the particles of the etheric body are in continual motion. Countless
currents stream through it in every direction. By these currents, life itself
is maintained and regulated. Every body that has life, including animals
and plants, possesses an etheric body. Even in minerals traces of it can be
observed. These currents and movements are, to begin with, independent
of human will and consciousness, just as the action of the heart or stomach
is beyond our jurisdiction, and this independence remains unaltered so
long as we do not take our development in hand in the sense of acquiring
supersensible faculties. For, at a certain stage, development consists
74
precisely in adding to the unconscious currents and movements of the
etheric body others that are consciously produced and controlled.
When esoteric development has progressed so far that the lotus flowers
begin to stir, much has already been achieved by the student which can
result in the formation of certain quite definite currents and movements in
his etheric body. The object of this development is the formation of a kind
of center in the region of the physical heart, from which radiate currents
and movements in the greatest possible variety of colors and forms. The
center is in reality not a mere point, but a most complicated structure, a
most wonderful organ. It glows and shimmers with every shade of color
and displays forms of great symmetry, capable of rapid transformation.
Other forms and streams of color radiate from this organ to the other parts
of the body, and beyond it to the astral body, completely penetrating and
illuminating it. The most important of these currents flow to the lotus
flowers. They permeate each petal and regulate its revolutions; then
streaming out at the points of the petals, they lose themselves in outer
space. The higher the development of a person, the greater the
circumference to which these rays extend.
The twelve-petalled lotus flower has a particularly close connection with
this central organ. The currents flow directly into it and through it,
proceeding on the one side to the sixteen and the two-petalled lotus
flowers, and on the other, the lower side, to the flowers of eight, six and
four petals. It is for this reason that the very greatest care must be devoted
to the development of the twelve-petalled lotus, for an imperfection in the
latter would result in irregular formation of the whole structure. The above
will give an idea of the delicate and intimate nature of esoteric training,
and of the accuracy needed if the development is to be regular and correct.
It will also be evident beyond doubt that directions for the development of
supersensible faculties can only be the concern of those who have
themselves experienced everything which they propose to awaken in
others, and who are unquestionably in a position to know whether the
directions they give lead to the exact results desired. If the student follows
the directions that have been given him, he introduces into his etheric
body currents and movements which are in harmony with the laws and the
evolution of the world to which he belongs. Consequently these
instructions are reflections of the great laws of cosmic evolution. They
consist of the above-mentioned and similar exercises in meditation and
concentration which, if correctly practiced, produce the results described.
The student must at certain times let these instructions permeate his soul
with their content, so that he is inwardly entirely filled with it. A simple
start is made with a view to the deepening of the logical activity of the
mind and the producing of an inward intensification of thought. Thought it
thereby made free and independent of all sense impressions and
experiences; it is concentrated in one point which is held entirely under
75
control. Thus a preliminary center is formed for the currents of the etheric
body. This center is not yet in the region of the heart but in the head, and it
appears to the clairvoyant as the point of departure for movements and
currents. No esoteric training can be successful which does not first create
this center. If the latter were first formed in the region of the heart the
aspiring clairvoyant would doubtless obtain glimpses of the higher worlds,
but would lack all true insight into the connection between these higher
worlds and the world of our senses. This, however, is an unconditional
necessity for man at the present stage of evolution. The clairvoyant must
not become a visionary; he must retain a firm footing upon the earth.
The center in the head, once duly fixed, is then moved lower down, to the
region of the larynx. This is effected by further exercises in concentration.
Then the currents of the etheric body radiate from this point and illumine
the astral space surrounding the individual.
Continued practice enables the student to determine for himself the
position of this etheric body. Hitherto this position depended upon
external forces proceeding from the physical body. Through further
development the student is able to turn his etheric body to all sides. This
faculty is effected by currents moving approximately along both hands and
centered in the two-petalled lotus in the region of the eyes. All this is
made possible through the radiations from the larynx assuming round
forms, of which a number flow to the two-petalled lotus and thence form
undulating currents along the hands. As a further development, these
currents branch out and ramify in the most delicate manner and become,
as it were, a kind of web which then encompasses the entire etheric body
as though with a network. Whereas hitherto the etheric body was not
closed to the outer world, so that the life currents from the universal ocean
of life flowed freely in and out, these currents now have to pass through
this membrane. Thus the individual becomes sensitive to these external
streams; they become perceptible to him.
And now the time has come to give the complete system of currents and
movements its center situated in the region of the heart. This again is
effected by persevering with the exercises in concentration and
meditation; and at this point also the stage is reached when the student
becomes gifted with the inner word. All things now acquire a new
significance for him. They become as it were spiritually audible in their
innermost self, and speak to him of their essential being. The currents
described above place him in touch with the inner being of the world to
which he belongs. He begins to mingle his life with the life of his
environment and can let it reverberate in the movements of his lotus
flowers.
76
At this point the spiritual world is entered. If the student has advanced so
far, he acquires a new understanding for all that the great teachers of
humanity have uttered. The sayings of the Buddha and the Gospels, for
instance, produce a new effect on him. They pervade him with a rapture of
which he had not dreamed before. For the tone of their words follows the
movements and rhythms which he has himself formed within himself. He
can now have positive knowledge that a Buddha or the Evangelists did not
utter their own revelations but those which flowed into them from the
inmost being of all things. A fact must here be pointed out which can only
be understood in the light of what has been said above. The many
repetitions in the sayings of the Buddha are not comprehensible to people
of our present evolutionary stage. For the esoteric student, however, they
become a force on which he gladly lets his inner senses rest, for they
correspond with certain movements in the etheric body. Devotional
surrender to them, with perfect inner peace, creates an inner harmony with
these movements; and because the latter are an image of certain cosmic
rhythms which also at certain points repeat themselves and revert to
former modes, the student listening to the wisdom of the Buddha unites
his life with that of the cosmic mysteries.
In esoteric training there is question of four attributes which must be
acquired on the so-called preparatory path for the attainment of higher
knowledge. The first is the faculty of discriminating in thoughts between
truth and appearance or mere opinion. The second attribute is the correct
estimation of what is inwardly true and real, as against what is merely
apparent. The third rests in the practice of the six qualities already
mentioned in the preceding pages: thought-control, control of actions,
perseverance, tolerance, faith and equanimity. The fourth attribute is the
love of inner freedom.
A mere intellectual understanding of what is included in these attributes is
of no value. They must be so incorporated into the soul that they form the
basis of inner habits. Consider, for instance, the first of these attributes:
The discrimination between truth and appearance. The student must so
train himself that, as a matter of course, he distinguishes in everything that
confronts him between the non-essential elements and those that are
significant and essential. He will only succeed in this if, in his observation
of the outer world, he quietly and patiently ever and again repeats the
attempt. And at the end he will naturally single out the essential and the
true at a glance, whereas formerly the non-essential, the transient, too,
could content him. “All that is transient is but a seeming” (“Alles
Vergänglich ist nur ein Gleichnis,” Goethe, Faust II. ) is a truth which
becomes an unquestionable conviction of the soul. The same applies to the
remaining three of the four attributes mentioned.
77
Now these four inner habits do actually produce a transformation of the
delicate human etheric body. By the first, discrimination between truth and
appearance, the center in the head already described is formed and the
center in the region of the larynx prepared. The actual development of
these centers is of course dependent on the exercises in concentration
described above; the latter make for development and the four attributes
bring to fruition. Once the center in the larynx has been prepared, the free
control of the etheric body and its enclosure within a network covering, as
explained above, results from the correct estimation of what is true as
against what is apparent and non-essential. If the student acquires this
faculty of estimation, the facts of the higher worlds will gradually become
perceptible to him. But he must not think that he has to perform only such
actions which appear significant when judged by the standard of a mere
intellectual estimate. The most trifling action, every little thing
accomplished, has something of importance in the great cosmic
household, and it is merely a question of being aware of this importance.
A correct estimation of the affairs of daily life is required, not an
underestimation of them. The six virtues of which the third attribute
consists have already been dealt with; they are connected with the
development of the twelve-petalled lotus in the region of the heart, and, as
already indicated, it is to this center that the life-currents of the etheric
body must be directed. The fourth attribute, the longing for liberation,
serves to bring to fruition the etheric organ in the heart region. Once this
attribute becomes an inner habit, the individual frees himself from
everything which depends only upon the faculties of his own personal
nature. He ceases to view things from his own separate standpoint, and the
boundaries of his own narrow self fettering him to this point of view
disappear. The secrets of the spiritual world gain access to his inner self.
This is liberation. For those fetters constrain the individual to regard tings
and beings in a manner corresponding to his own personal traits. It is from
this personal manner of regarding things that the student must become
liberated and free.
It will be clear from the above that the instructions given in esoteric
training exert a determining influence reaching the innermost depths of
human nature. Such are the instructions regarding the four qualities
mentioned above. They can be found in one form or another in all the
great cosmogonies that take account of the spiritual world. The founders
of the great cosmogonies did not give mankind these teachings from some
vague feeling. They gave them for the good reason that they were great
initiates. Out of their knowledge did they shape their moral teachings.
They knew how these would act upon the finer nature of man, and desired
that their followers should gradually achieve the development of this finer
nature. To live in the sense of these great cosmogonies means to work for
the attainment of personal spiritual perfection. Only by so doing can man
become a servant of the world and of humanity. Self-perfection is by no
78
means self-seeking, for the imperfect man is an imperfect servant of the
world and of humanity. The more perfect a man is, the better does he serve
the world. “If the rose adorns itself, it adorns the garden.”
The founders of the great cosmogonies are therefore the great initiates.
Their teaching flows into the soul of men, and thus, with humanity, the
whole world moves forward. Quite consciously did they work to further
this evolutionary process of humanity. Their teachings can only be
understood if it be remembered that they are the product of knowledge of
the innermost depths of human nature. The great initiates knew, and it is
out of their knowledge that they shaped the ideals of humanity. And man
approaches these great leaders when he uplifts himself, in his own
development, to their heights.
A completely new life opens out before the student when the development
of his etheric body begins in the way described above, and at the proper
time, in the course of his training, he must receive that enlightenment
which enables him to adapt himself to this new existence. The sixteen-
petalled lotus, for instance, enables him to perceive spiritual figures of a
higher world. He must learn now how different these figures can be when
caused by different objects or beings. In the first place, he must notice that
his own thoughts and feelings exert a powerful influence on certain of
these figures, on others little or no influence. One kind of figure alters
immediately if the observer, upon seeing it, says to himself: “that is
beautiful,” and then in the course of his observation changes this thought
to: “that is useful.” It is characteristic of the forms proceeding from
minerals or from artificial objects that they change under the influence of
every thought and every feeling directed upon them by the observer. This
applies in a lesser degree to the forms belonging to plants, and still less to
those corresponding to animals. These figures, too, are full of life and
motion, but this motion is only partially due to the influence of human
thoughts and feelings; in other respects it is produced by causes which are
beyond human influence. Now, there appears within this whole world a
species of form which remains almost entirely unaffected by human
influence. The student can convince himself that these forms proceed
neither from minerals nor from artificial objects, nor, again, from plants or
animals. To gain complete understanding, he must study those forms
which he can realize to have proceeded from the feelings, instincts, and
passions of human beings. Yet he can find that these forms too are
influenced by his own thoughts and feelings, if only to a relatively small
extent. But there always remains a residuum of forms in this world upon
which such influences are negligible. Indeed, at the outset of this career
the student can perceive little beyond this residuum. He can only discover
its nature by observing himself. He then learns what forms he himself
produces, for his will, his wishes, and so on, are expressed in these forms.
An instinct that dwells in him, a desire that fills him, an intention that he
79
harbors, and so forth, are all manifested in these forms: his whole
character displays itself in this world of forms. Thus by his conscious
thoughts and feelings a person can exercise an influence on all forms
which do not proceed from himself; but over those which he brings about
in the higher world, once he has created them. Now, it follows from what
has been said that on this higher plan man's inner life of instincts, desires,
ideas displays itself outwardly in definite forms, just like all the other
beings and objects. To higher knowledge, the inner world appears as part
of the outer world. In a higher world man's inner being confronts him as a
reflected image, just as though in the physical world he were surrounded
by mirrors and could observe his physical body in that way.
At this stage of development the student has reached the point where he
can free himself from the illusion resulting from the initiation of his
personal self. He can now observe that inner self as outer world, just as he
hitherto regarded as outer world everything that affected his senses. Thus
he learns by gradual experience to deal with himself as hitherto he dealt
with the beings around him.
Were the student to obtain an insight into these spiritual worlds without
sufficient preparation regarding their nature, he would find himself
confronted by the picture of his own soul as though by an enigma. There
his own desires and passions confront him in animal or, more rarely, in
human forms. It is true that animal forms of this world are never quite
similar to those of the physical world, yet they possess a remote
resemblance: inexpert observers often take them to be identical. Now,
upon entering this world, an entirely new method of judgment must be
acquired; for apart from the fact that things actually pertaining to inner
nature appear as outer world, they also bear the character of mirrored
reflections of what they really are. When, for instance, a number is
perceived, it must be read in reverse, as a picture in a mirror: 265 would
mean here in reality, 562. A sphere is perceived as thought from its center.
This inner perception must then be translated in the right way. The
qualities of the soul appear likewise as in a mirror. A wish directed toward
an outer object appears as a form moving toward the person wishing.
Passions residing in the lower part of human nature can assume animal
forms or similar shapes that hurl themselves against the individual. In
reality, these passions are headed outward; they seek satisfaction in the
outer world, but this striving outward appears in the mirrored reflection as
an attack on the individual from whom they proceed.
If the student, before attaining insight into higher worlds, has learned by
quiet and sincere self-observation to realized the qualities and the defects
of his own character, he will then, at the moment when his own inner self
confronts him as a mirrored image, find strength and courage to conduct
himself in the right way. People who have failed to test themselves in this
80
way, and are insufficiently acquainted with their own inner self, will not
recognize themselves in their own mirrored image and will mistake it for
an alien reality. Or they may become alarmed at the vision and, because
they cannot endure the sight, deceive themselves into believing the whole
thing is nothing but an illusion which cannot lead them anywhere. In
either case the person in question, through prematurely attaining a certain
stage of inner development, would fatally obstruct his own progress.
It is absolutely necessary that the student should experience this spiritual
aspect of his own inner self before progressing to higher spheres; for his
own self constitutes that psycho-spiritual element of which he is the best
judge. If he has thoroughly realized the nature of his own personality in
the physical world, and if the image of his personality first appears to him
in a higher world, he is then able to compare the one with the other. He
can refer the higher to something already known to him, so that his point
of departure is on firm ground. Whereas, no matter how many other
spiritual beings appeared to him, he would find himself unable to discover
their nature and qualities, and would soon feel the ground giving way
beneath him. Thus is cannot be too often repeated that the only safe
entrance into the higher worlds is at the end of a path leading through a
genuine knowledge and estimate of one's own nature.
Pictures, then, of a spiritual kind are first encountered by the student on
his progress into higher worlds; and the reality to which these pictures
correspond is actually within himself. He should be far enough advanced
to refrain from desiring reality of a more robust kind at this initial stage,
and to regard these pictures as timely. He will soon meet something quite
new within this world of pictures. His lower self is before him as a
mirrored image; but from within this image there appears the true reality
of his higher self. Out of the picture of his lower personality the form of
the spiritual ego becomes visible. Then threads are spun from the latter to
other and higher spiritual realities.
This is the moment when the two-petalled lotus in the region of the eyes is
required. If it now begins to stir, the student finds it possible to bring his
higher ego in contact with higher spiritual beings. The currents form this
lotus flower flow toward the higher realities in such a way that the
movements in question are fully apparent to the individual. J ust as the
light renders the physical objects visible, so, too, these currents disclose
spiritual beings of higher worlds.
Through inward application to the fundamental truths derived from
spiritual science the student learns to set in motion and then to direct the
currents proceeding form the lotus flower between the eyes.
81
It is at this stage of development especially that the value of sound
judgment and a training in clear and logical thought come to the fore. The
higher self, which hitherto slumbered unconsciously in an embryonic
state, is now born into conscious existence. This is not a figurative but a
positive birth in the spiritual world, and the being now born, the higher
self, must enter that world with all the necessary organs and aptitudes if it
is to be capable of life. J ust as nature must provide for a child being born
into the world with suitable eyes and ears, to too, the laws of self-
development must provide for the necessary capacities with which the
higher self can enter existence. These laws governing the development of
the higher spiritual organs are none other than the laws of sound reason
and morality of the physical world. The spiritual self matures in the
physical self as a child in the mother's womb. The child's health depends
upon the normal functioning of natural laws in the maternal womb. The
constitution of the spiritual self is similarly conditioned by the laws of
common intelligence and reason that govern physical life. No one can give
birth to a soundly constituted higher self whose life in thought and feeling,
in the physical world, is not sound and healthy. Natural, rational life is the
basis of all genuine spiritual development. J ust as the child when still in
the maternal womb lives in accordance with the natural forces to which it
has access, after its birth, through its organs of sense, so, too, the human
higher self lives in accordance with the laws of the spiritual world, even
during physical existence. And even as the child, out of a dim life instinct,
acquired the requisite forces, so, too, can man acquire the powers of the
spiritual world before his higher self is born. Indeed, he must do this if the
latter is to enter the world as a fully developed being. It would be quite
wrong for anyone to say: “I cannot accept the teachings of spiritual
science until I myself become a seer,” for without inward application to
the results of spiritual research there is no chance whatever of attaining
genuine higher knowledge. It would be as though a child, during gestation,
were to refuse the forces coming to it through its mother, and proposed to
wait until it could procure them for itself. J ust as the embryonic child in its
incipient feeling for life learns to appreciate what is offered to it, so can
the non-seer appreciate the truth of the teachings of spiritual science. An
insight into these teachings based on a deeply rooted feeling for truth, and
a clear, sound, all-around critical and reasoning faculty are possible even
before spiritual things are actually perceived. The esoteric knowledge
must first be studied, so that this study becomes a preparation for
clairvoyance. A person attaining clairvoyance without such preparation
would resemble a child born with eyes and ears but without a brain. The
entire world of sound and color would display itself before him, but he
would be helpless in it.
At this stage of his esoteric development the student realizes, through
personal inward experience, all that had previously appealed to his sense
of truth, to his intellect and reason. He has now direct knowledge of his
82
higher self. He learns how his higher self is connected with exalted
spiritual beings and forms with them a united whole. He sees how the
lower self originates in a higher world, and it is revealed to him how his
higher nature outlasts his lower. He can now distinguish the imperishable
in himself from the perishable; that is, he learns through personal insight
to understand the doctrine of the incarnation of the higher self in the
lower. It will become plain to him that he is part of a great spiritual
complex and that his qualities and destiny are due to this connection. He
learns to recognize the law of his life, his karma. He realizes that his lower
self, constituting his present existence, is only one of the forms which his
higher being can adopt. He discerns the possibility of working down from
his higher self in his lower self, so that he may perfect himself ever more
and more. Now, too, he can comprehend the great differences between
human beings in regard to their level of perfection. He becomes aware that
there are others above him who have already traversed the stages which
still lie before him, and he realizes that the teachings and deeds of such
men proceed from the inspiration of a higher world. He owes this
knowledge to his first personal glimpse into this higher world. The so-
called initiates of humanity now become vested with reality for him.
These, then, are the gifts which the student owes to his development at this
stage: insight into his higher self; insight into the doctrine of the
incarnation of this higher being in a lower; insight into the laws by which
life in the physical world is regulated according to its spiritual
connections, that is, the law of karma; and finally, insight into the
existence of the great initiates.
Thus it is said of a student who has reached this stage, that all doubt has
vanished from him. His former faith, based on reason and sound thoughts,
is now replaced by knowledge and insight which nothing can undermine.
The various religions have presented, in their ceremonies, sacraments, and
rites, externally visible patterns of the higher spiritual beings and events.
None but those who have not penetrated to the depths of the great
religions can fail to recognize this fact. Personal insight into spiritual
reality explains the great significance of these externally visible cults.
Religious service, then, becomes for the seer an image of his own
communion with the higher, spiritual world.
It has been shown how the student, by attaining this stage, becomes in
truth a new being. He can now mature to still higher faculties and, by
means of the life-currents of his etheric body, control the higher and actual
life-element, thus attaining a high degree of independence from the
restrictions of the physical body.
83
VII
The Transformation of Dream Life
An intimation that the student has reached or will soon reach the stage of
development described in the preceding chapter will be found in the
change which comes over his dream life. His dreams, hitherto confused
and haphazard, now begin to assume a more regular character. Their
pictures begin to succeed each other in sensible connection, like the
thoughts and ideas of daily life. He can discern in them law, cause, and
effect. The content, too, of his dreams is changed. While hitherto he
discerned only reminiscences of daily life and transformed impressions of
his surroundings or of his physical condition, there now appear before him
pictures of a world he has hitherto not known. At first the general
character of his dream life remains unchanged, in as far as dreams are
distinguished from waking mental activity by the symbolical presentation
of what they wish to express. No attentive observer of dream life can fail
to detect this characteristic. For instance, a person may dream that he has
caught some horrible creature, and he feels an unpleasant sensation in his
hand. He wakes to discover that he is tightly grasping a corner of the
blanket. The truth is not presented to the mind, except through the medium
of a symbolical image. A man may dream that he is flying from some
pursuer and is stricken with fear. On waking, he finds that he has been
suffering, during sleep, from palpitations of the heart. Disquieting dreams
can also be traced to indigestible food. Occurrences in the immediate
vicinity may also reflect themselves symbolically in dreams. The striking
of a clock may evoke the picture of a troop of soldiers marching by to the
beat of drums. A falling chair may be the occasion of a whole dream
drama in which the sound of the fall is reproduced as the report of a gun,
and so forth. The more regulated dreams of esoteric students whose etheric
body has begun its development retain this symbolical method of
expression, but they will cease merely to reflect reality connected with the
physical body and physical environment. As the dreams due to the latter
causes become more connected, they are mingled with similar pictures
expressing things and events of another world. These are the first
experiences lying beyond the range of waking consciousness.
Yet no true mystic will ever make his experiences in dreams the basis of
any authoritative account of the higher world. Such dreams must be
merely considered as providing the first hint of a higher development.
Very soon and as a further result, the student's dreams will no longer
remain beyond the reach of intellectual guidance as heretofore, but on the
contrary, will be mentally controlled and supervised like the impressions
and conceptions of waking consciousness. The difference between dream
and waking consciousness grows ever smaller. The dreamer remains
84
awake in the fullest sense of the word during his dream life; that is, he is
aware of his mastery and control over his own vivid mental activity.
During our dreams we are actually in a world other than that of our senses;
but with undeveloped spiritual organs we can form none other than the
confused conceptions of it described above. It is only in so far present for
us as, for instance, the world of sense could be for a being equipped with
no more than rudimentary eyes. That is why we can see nothing in this
world but counterfeits and reflections of daily life. The latter are
perceptible to us because our own soul paints its daily experiences in
pictorial form into the substance of which that other world consists. It
must be clearly understood that in addition to our ordinary conscious
work-a-day life we lead a second, unconscious life in that other world. We
engrave in it all our thoughts and perceptions. These tracings only become
visible when the lotus flowers are developed. Now, in every human being
there are slender rudiments of these lotus flowers. We cannot perceive by
means of them during waking consciousness because the impressions
made on them are very faint. We cannot see the stars during the daytime
for a similar reason: their visibility is extinguished by the mighty glare of
the sun. Thus, too, the faint spiritual impressions cannot make themselves
felt in the face of the powerful impressions received through the senses.
Now, when the gate of the senses is closed during sleep, these other
impressions begin to emerge confusedly, and the dreamer becomes aware
of experiences in another world. But as already explained, these
experiences consist at first merely of pictures engraved in the spiritual
world by our mental activity attached to the physical senses. Only
developed lotus flowers make it possible for manifestations not derived
from the physical world to be imprinted in the same way. And then the
etheric body, when developed, brings full knowledge concerning these
engraved impressions derived from other worlds.
This is the beginning of life and activity in a new world, and at this point
esoteric training must set the student a twofold task. To begin with, he
must learn to take stock of everything he observes in his dreams, exactly
as though he were awake. Then, if successful in this, he is led to make the
same observations during ordinary waking consciousness. He will so train
his attention and receptivity for these spiritual impressions that they need
no longer vanish in the face of the physical impressions, but will always
be at hand for him and reach him in addition to the others.
When the student has acquired this faculty there arises before his spiritual
eyes something of the picture described in the preceding chapter, and he
can henceforth discern all that the spiritual world contains as the cause of
the physical world. Above all things he can perceive and gain knowledge
of his own higher self in this world. The next task now confronting him is
85
to grow, as it were, into this higher self, that is, really to regard it as his
own true self and to act accordingly. He realizes ever more clearly and
intensely that his physical body and what he hitherto called his “I” are
merely the instruments of his higher self. He adopts an attitude toward his
lower self such as a person limited to the world of the senses adopts
toward some instrument or vehicle that serves him. No one includes as
part of himself the vehicle in which he is traveling, even though he says:
“I travel”; so, too, when an inwardly developed person says: “I go through
the door,” his actual conception is: “I carry my body through the door.”
Only this must become a natural concept for him, so that he never for a
moment loses his firm footing in the physical world, or feels estranged
from it. If the student is to avoid becoming a fantastic visionary he must
not impoverish his life through his higher consciousness, but on the
contrary, enrich it, as a person enriches his life by using the railway and
not merely his legs to cover a certain distance.
When the student has thus raised himself to a life in the higher ego, or
rather during his acquisition of the higher consciousness, he will learn how
to stir to life the spiritual perceptive force in the organ of the heart and
control it through the currents described in the foregoing chapter. This
perceptive force is an element of higher sustainability, which proceeds
from the organ in question and flows with beautiful radiance through the
moving lotus flowers and the other channels of the developed etheric
body. Thence it radiates outward into the surrounding spiritual world
rendering it spiritually visible, just as the sunlight falling on the objects of
the physical world renders them visible.
How this perceptive force in the heart organ is created can only be
gradually understood in the course of actual development.
It is only when this organ of perception can be sent through the etheric
body and into the outer world, to illumine the objects there, that the actual
spiritual world, as composed of objects and beings, can be clearly
perceived. Thus it will be seen that complete consciousness of an object in
the spiritual world is only possible when man himself casts upon it the
spiritual light. Now, the ego which creates this organ of perception does
not dwell within, but outside the physical body, as already shown. The
heart organ is only the spot where the individual man kindles, from
without, this spiritual light organ. Were the latter kindled elsewhere, the
spiritual perceptions produced by it would have no connection with the
physical world. But all higher spiritual realities must be related to the
physical world, and man himself must act as a channel through which they
flow into it. It is precisely through the heart organ that the higher ego
governs the physical self, making it into its instrument.
86
Now, the feelings of an esoterically developed person toward the things of
the spiritual world are very different from the feelings of the undeveloped
person toward the things of the physical world. The latter feels himself to
be at a particular place in the world of sense, and the surrounding objects
to be external to him. The spiritually developed person feels himself to be
united with, and as though in the interior of, the spiritual objects he
perceives. He wanders, in fact, from place to place in spiritual space, and
is therefore called the wanderer in the language of occult science. He has
no home at first. Should he, however, remain a mere wanderer he would
be unable to define any object in spiritual space. J ust as objects and places
in physical space are defined from a fixed point of departure, this, too,
must be the case in the other world. He must seek out some place,
thoroughly investigate it, and take spiritual possession of it. In this place
he must establish his spiritual home and relate everything else to it. In
physical life, too, a person sees everything in terms of his physical home.
Natives of Berlin and Paris will involuntarily describe London in a
different way. And yet there is a difference between the spiritual and the
physical home. We are born into the latter without our co-operation and
instinctively absorb, during our childhood, a number of ideas by which
everything is henceforth involuntarily colored. The student, however,
himself founds his own spiritual home in full consciousness. His
judgment, therefore, based on this spiritual home, is formed in the light of
freedom. This founding of a spiritual home is called in the language of
occult science the building of the hut.
Spiritual vision at this stage extends to the spiritual counterparts of the
physical world, so far as these exist in the so-called astral world. There
everything is found which in its nature is similar to human instincts,
feelings, desires, and passions. For powers related to all these human
characteristics are associated with all physical objects. A crystal, for
instance, is cast in its form by powers which, seen from a higher
standpoint, appear as an active human impulse. Similar forces drive the
sap through the capillaries of the plant, cause the blossoms to unfold and
the seed vessels to burst. To developed spiritual organs of perception all
these forces appear gifted with form and color, just as the objects of the
physical world have form and color for physical eyes. At this stage in his
development the student sees not only the crystal and the plant, but also
the spiritual forces mentioned above. Animal and human impulses are
perceptible to him not only through their physical manifestation in the
individual, but directly as objects; he perceives them just as he perceives
tables and chairs in the physical world. The whole range of instincts,
impulses, desires and passions, both of an animal and of a human being,
constitute the astral cloud or aura in which the being is enveloped.
Furthermore, the clairvoyant can at this stage perceive things which are
almost or entirely withheld from the senses. He can, for instance, tell the
87
astral difference between a room full of low or of high-minded people.
Not only the physical but also the spiritual atmosphere of a hospital differs
from that of a ballroom. A commercial town has a different astral air from
that of a university town. In the initial stages of clairvoyance this
perceptive faculty is but slightly developed; its relation to the objects in
question is similar to the relation of dream consciousness to waking
consciousness in ordinary life; it will, however, become fully awakened at
this stage as well.
The highest achievement of a clairvoyant who has attained the degree of
vision described above is that in which the astral counter-effects of animal
and human impulses and passions are revealed to him. A loving action is
accompanied by quite a different astral concomitant from one inspired by
hate. Senseless desire gives rise to an ugly astral counterpart, while a
feeling evoked by a high ideal creates one that is beautiful. These astral
images are but faintly perceptible during physical life, for their strength is
diminished by life in the physical world. The desire for an object, for
example, produces a counterpart of this sort in addition to the semblance
of the desire itself in the astral world. If, however, the object be attained
and the desire satisfied, or if, at any rate, the possibility of satisfaction is
forthcoming, the corresponding image will show but faintly. It only attains
its full force after the death of the individual human being, when the soul
in accordance with her nature still harbors such desires, but can no longer
satisfy them, because the object and the physical organ are both lacking.
The gourmand, for instance, will still retain, after death, the desire to
please his palate; but there is no possibility of satisfying this desire
because he no longer has a palate. As a result, the desire produces an
especially powerful counterpart, by which the soul is tormented. These
experiences evoked by the counterparts of the lower soul-nature after
death are called the experiences in the soul-world, especially in the region
of desires. They only vanish when the soul has purified herself from all
desires inclining toward the physical world. Then only does the soul
mount to the higher regions, to the world of spirit. Even though these
images are faint during life in the physical world, they are none the less
present, following man as his world of desire, in the way a comet is
followed by its tail. They can be seen by a clairvoyant at the requisite
stage of development.
Such and similar experiences fill the life of the student during the period
described above. He cannot attain higher spiritual experience at this stage
of development, but must climb still higher from this point.
88
VIII
The Continuity of Consciousness
Human life runs its course in three alternating states or conditions,
namely, waking, dreaming sleep, and dreamless sleep. The attainment of
the higher knowledge of spiritual worlds can be readily understood if a
conception be formed of the changes occurring in these three conditions,
as experienced by one seeking such higher knowledge. When no training
has been undertaken to attain this knowledge, human consciousness is
continually interrupted by the restful interval of sleep. During these
intervals the soul knows nothing of the outer world, and equally little of
itself. Only at certain periods dreams emerge from the deep ocean of
insensibility, dreams linked to the occurrences of the outer world or the
conditions of the physical body. At first, dreams are only regarded as a
particular manifestation of sleep-life, and thus only two states are
generally spoken of, namely, sleeping and waking. For spiritual science,
however, dreams have an independent significance apart from the other
two conditions. In the foregoing chapter a description was given of the
alteration ensuing in the dream-life of the person undertaking the ascent to
higher knowledge. His dreams lose their meaningless, irregular and
disconnected character and form themselves more and more into a world
of law and order. With continued development, not only does this new
world born out of the dream world come to be in no way inferior to outer
physical reality as regards its inner truth, but facts reveal themselves in it
representing a higher reality in the fullest sense of the word. Secrets and
riddles lie concealed everywhere in the physical world. In the latter, the
effects are seen of certain higher facts, but no one can penetrate to the
causes whose perception is confined merely to his senses. These causes
are partly revealed to the student in the condition described above and
developed out of dream life, a condition, however, in which he by no
means remains stationary. True, he must not regard these revelations as
actual knowledge so long as the same things do not also reveal themselves
during ordinary waking life. But in time he achieves this as well: he
develops this faculty of carrying over into waking consciousness the
condition he created for himself out of dream life. Thus something new is
introduced into the world of his senses that enriches it. J ust as a person
born blind and successfully operated upon will recognize the surrounding
objects as enriched by all that the eye perceives, to, too, will anyone
having become clairvoyant in the above manner perceive the whole world
surrounding him peopled with new qualities, things, beings, and so forth.
He now need no longer wait for his dreams to live in another world, but he
can at any suitable moment put himself into the above condition for the
purpose of higher perception. This condition then acquires a significance
for him similar to the perception, in ordinary life, of things with active
senses as opposed to inactive senses. It can truly be said that the student
89
opens the eyes of his soul and beholds things which necessarily remain
concealed form the bodily senses.
Now this condition is only transitional to still higher stages of knowledge.
If the student continues his esoteric exercises he will find, in due time, that
the radical change, as described above, does not confine itself to his dream
life, but that this transformation also extends to what was previously a
condition of deep dreamless sleep. Isolated conscious experiences begin to
interrupt the complete insensibility of this deep sleep. Perceptions
previously unknown to him emerge from the pervading unknown to him
emerge from the pervading darkness of sleep. It is, of course, not easy to
describe these perceptions, for our language is only adapted to the physical
world, and therefore only approximate terms can be found to express what
does not at all belong to that world. Still, such terms must be used to
describe the higher worlds, and this is only possible by the free use of
simile; yet seeing that everything in the world is interrelated, the attempt
may be made. The things and beings of the higher worlds are closely
enough related to those of the physical world to enable, with a little good
will, some sort of conception of these higher worlds to be formed, even
though words suitable for the physical world are used. Only the reader
must always bear in mind that such descriptions of supersensible worlds
must, to a large extent, be in the nature of simile and symbol. The words
of ordinary language are only partially adopted in the course of esoteric
training; for the rest, the student learns another symbolical language, as a
natural outcome of his ascent to higher worlds. The knowledge of this
language is acquired during esoteric training itself, but that does not
preclude the possibility of learning something concerning the higher
worlds even fro such ordinary descriptions as those here given.
Some idea can be given of those experiences which emerge from the
insensibility of deep sleep if they be compared to a kind of hearing. We
may speak of perceptible tones and words. While the experiences during
dreaming sleep may fitly be designated as a kind of vision, the facts
observed during deep sleep may be compared to auricular impressions. (It
should be remarked in passing that for the spiritual world, too, the faculty
of sight remains the higher. There, too, colors are higher than sounds and
words. The student's first perceptions in this world do not yet extend to the
higher colors, but only to the lower tones. Only because man, according to
his general development, is already more qualified for the world revealing
itself in dreaming sleep does he at once perceive colors there. He is less
qualified for the higher world unveiling itself in deep sleep; therefore the
first revelations of it he receives are in tones and words; later on, he can
here, too, ascend to colors and forms.)
Now, when these experiences during deep sleep first come to the notice of
the student, his next task must be to sense them as clearly and vividly as
90
possible. At first this presents great difficulty, the perception of these
experiences being exceedingly slight. The student knows very well, on
waking, that he has had an experience, but is completely in the dark as
regards its nature. The most important thing during this initial stage is to
remain quiet and composed, and not for a moment lapse into any unrest or
impatience. The latter is under all circumstances detrimental; it can never
accelerate development, but only delays it. The student must cultivate a
quiet and yielding receptivity for the gift that is presented to him; all
violence must be repressed. Should he at any period not become aware of
experiences during sleep he must wait patiently until this is possible. Some
day this moment will assuredly arrive. And this perceptive faculty, if
awaited with patience and composure, remains a secure possession; while
should it appear momentarily in answer to forcible methods, it may be
completely lost for a long time.
Once this perceptive faculty is acquired and the experiences during sleep
are present to the student's consciousness in complete lucidity and clarity,
his attention should be directed to the following point. All these
experiences are seen to consist of two kinds, which can be clearly
distinguished. The first kind will be totally different from anything that he
has ever experienced. These experiences may be a source of joy and
edification, but otherwise they should be left to themselves for the time
being. They are the first harbinger of higher spiritual worlds in which the
student will find his way later on. In the other kind of experiences the
attentive observer will discover a certain relationship with the ordinary
world in which he lives. The subjects of his reflections during life, what he
would like to understand in these things around him but cannot understand
with the ordinary intellect, these are the things concerning which the
experiences during sleep give him information. During every-day life man
reflects on his environment; his mind tries to conceive and understand the
connection existing between things; he seeks to grasp in thought and idea
what his senses perceive. It is to these ideas and concepts that the
experiences during sleep refer. Obscure, shadowy concepts become
sonorous and living in a way comparable only to the tones and the words
of the physical world. It seems to the student ever more and more as
though the solution of the riddles over which he ponders is whispered to
him in tones and words out of a higher world. And he is able to connect
with ordinary life whatever comes to him from a higher world. What was
formerly only accessible to his thought now becomes actual experience,
just as living and substantial as an experience in this physical world can
be. The things and beings of this physical world are by no means only
what they appear to be for physical perception. They are the expression
and effluence of a spiritual world. This spiritual world, hitherto concealed
from the student, now resounds for him out of his whole environment.
91
It is easy to see that this higher perceptive faculty can prove a blessing
only if the opened soul-senses are in perfect order, just as the ordinary
senses can only be used for a true observation of the world if their
equipment is regular and normal. Now man himself forms these higher
senses through the exercises indicated by spiritual science. The latter
include concentration, in which the attention is directed to certain definite
ideas and concepts connected with the secrets of the universe; and
meditation, which is a life in such ideas, a complete submersion in them,
in the right way. By concentration and meditation the student works upon
his soul and develops within it the soul-organs of perception. While thus
applying himself to the task of concentration and meditation his soul
grows within his body, just as the embryo child grows in the body of the
mother. When the isolated experiences during sleep begin, as described,
the moment of birth is approaching for the liberated soul; for she has
literally become a new being, developed by the individual within himself,
from seed to fruit. The effort required for concentration and meditation
must therefore be carefully and accurately maintained, for it contains the
laws governing the germination and fruition of the higher human soul-
being. The latter must appear at its birth as a harmonious, well-
proportioned organism. Through an error in following the instructions, no
such normal being will come to existence in the spiritual spheres, but a
miscarriage incapable of life.
That this higher soul-being should be born during deep sleep will be easily
grasped, for if that delicate organism lacking all power of resistance
chanced to appear during physical every-day life it could not prevail
against the harsh and powerful processes of this life. Its activity would be
of no account against that of the body. During sleep, however, when the
body rests in as far as its activity is dependent on sense perception, the
activity of the higher soul, at first so delicate and inconspicuous, can come
into evidence. Here again the student must bear in mind that these
experiences during sleep may not be regarded as fully valid knowledge, so
long as he is not in a position to carry over his awakened higher soul into
waking consciousness as well. The acquisition of this faculty will enable
him to perceive the spiritual world in its own character, among and within
the experiences of the day; that is, the hidden secrets of his environment
will be conveyed to his soul as tones and words.
Now, the student must realize at this stage of development that he is
dealing with separate and more or less isolated spiritual experiences. He
should therefore beware of constructing out of them a complete whole or
even a connected system of knowledge. In this case, all manner of
fantastic ideas and conceptions would be mixed into the soul-world, and a
world might thus easily be constructed which had nothing to do with the
real spiritual world. The student must continually practice self-control.
The right thing to do is to strive for an ever clearer conception of the
92
isolated real experiences, and to await the spontaneous arrival of new
experiences which will connect themselves, as though of their own accord,
with those already recorded. By virtue of the power of the spiritual world
into which he has now found his way, and through continued application
to his prescribed exercises, the student experiences an ever increasing
extension and expansion of consciousness during sleep. The unconscious
intervals during sleep-life grow ever smaller, while more and more
experiences emerge from erstwhile unconsciousness. These experiences
thus link themselves together increasingly of their own accord, without
this true unity being disturbed by all manner of combinations and
inferences, which in any case would only originate in an intellect
accustomed to the physical world. Yet the less the habits of thought
acquired in the physical world are allowed to play into these higher
experiences, the better it is.
By thus conducting himself the student approaches ever nearer to the
attainment of that condition, on his path to higher knowledge, in which the
unconsciousness of sleep-life is transformed into complete consciousness.
When his body rests, man lives in surroundings which are just as real as
those of his waking daily life. It is needless to say that the reality during
sleep is different from physical reality surrounding the physical body. The
student learns — indeed he must learn if he is to retain a firm footing in
the physical world and not become a visionary — to connect the higher
experiences of sleep with his physical environment. At first, however, the
world entered during sleep is a completely new revelation. This important
stage of development, at which consciousness is retained in the life during
sleep, is known in spiritual science as the continuity of consciousness. The
condition here indicated is regarded, at a certain stage of development, as
a kind of ideal, attainable at the end of a long path. What the student first
learns is the extension of consciousness into two soul-states, in the first of
which only disordered dreams were previously possible, and in the second
only unconscious dreamless sleep. Anyone having reached this stage of
development does not cease experiencing and learning during those
intervals when the physical body rests, and when the soul receives no
impressions through the instrumentality of senses.
93
IX
The Splitting of the Human Personality During Spiritual
Training
During sleep no impressions are conveyed to the human soul through the
instrumentality of the physical sense-organs. The impressions from the
ordinary outer world do not find their way to the soul when in that
condition. In certain respects the soul is actually outside the part of the
human being — the so-called physical body — which in waking life is the
medium for sense perceptions and thought. The soul is then only
connected with the finer bodies (the etheric body and the astral body),
which are beyond the scope of physical sense observation. But the activity
of these finer bodies does not cease during sleep. J ust as the physical body
is connected and lives with the things and beings of the physical world,
affecting them and being affected by them, so, too, does the soul live in a
higher world; only, this life of the soul continues also during sleep. The
soul is in full activity during sleep, but we can know nothing of this
activity so long as we have no spiritual organs of perception through
which to observe what is going on around us and see what we ourselves
are doing during sleep, as we observe our daily physical environment with
our ordinary senses. The preceding chapters have shown that esoteric
training consists in the development of such spiritual sense organs. Now
if, as a result of esoteric training, the student's life during sleep is
transformed in the manner described in the foregoing chapter, he will,
when in that condition, be able to follow consciously everything going on
around him. He can at will find his way in his environment as he could,
when awake, with his ordinary senses. It should here be noted that a
higher degree of clairvoyance is required for the higher perception of
ordinary physical environment. This was indicated in the last chapter. In
the initial stages of his development the student perceives things
pertaining to another world without being able to discern their connection
with the objects of his daily physical environment.
These characteristics of life during sleep or in dreams illustrate what is
continually taking place in the human being. The soul lives in
uninterrupted activity in the higher worlds, even gathering from them the
impulse to act upon the physical body. Ordinarily unconscious of his
higher life, the esoteric student renders himself conscious of it, and
thereby his whole life becomes transformed. As long as the soul remains
unseeing in the higher sense it is guided by superior cosmic beings. And
just as the life of a person born blind is changed, through a successful
operation, from its previous dependence on a guide, so too is the life of a
person changed through esoteric training. He outgrows the principle of
being guided by a master and must henceforward undertake to be his own
guide. The moment this occurs he is, of course, liable to commit errors
94
totally unknown to ordinary consciousness. He acts now from a world
from which, formerly, higher powers unknown to him influenced him.
These higher powers are directed by the universal cosmic harmony. The
student withdraws from this cosmic harmony, and must now himself
accomplish things which were hitherto done for him without his co-
operation.
It is for this reason that so much is found in books dealing with these
matters concerning the dangers connected with the ascent into higher
worlds. The descriptions sometimes given of these dangers may well make
timid souls shudder at the prospect of this higher life. Yet the fact is that
dangers only arise when the necessary precautions are neglected. If all the
measures counseled by true esoteric science are adopted, the ascent will
indeed ensue through experiences surpassing in power and magnitude
everything the boldest flights of sense-bound fantasy can picture; and yet
there can be no question of injury to health or life. The student meets with
horrible powers threatening life at every turn and from every side. It will
even be possible for him to make use of certain forces and beings existing
beyond physical perception, and the temptation is great to control these
forces for the furtherance of personal and forbidden interests, or to employ
them wrongly out of a deficient knowledge of the higher worlds. Some of
these especially important experiences, for instance, the meeting with
Guardian of the Threshold, will be described in the following chapters.
Yet we must realize that the hostile powers are none the less present, even
though we know nothing of them. It is true that in this case their relation to
man is ordained by higher power, and that this relation alters when the
human being consciously enters this world hitherto concealed from him.
But at the same time his own existence is enhanced and the circle of his
life enriched by a great and new field of experience. A real danger can
only arise if the student, through impatience or arrogance, assumes too
early a certain independence with regard to the experiences of the higher
worlds; if he cannot wait to gain really sufficient insight into the
supersensible laws. In these spheres, modesty and humility are far less
empty words than in ordinary life. If the student possesses these qualities
in the very best sense he may be certain that his ascent into the higher life
will be achieved without danger to all that is commonly called health and
life. Above all things, no disharmony must ensue between the higher
experiences and the events and demands of every-day life. Man's task
must be entirely sought for on this earth, and anyone desiring to shirk his
earthly task and to escape into another world may be certain he will never
reach his goal. Yet what the senses perceive is only part of the world, and
it is in the spirit world that the beings dwell who express themselves in the
facts of the physical world. Man must become a partaker of the spirit in
order to carry its revelations into the physical world. He transforms the
earth by implanting in it what he has ascertained in the spiritual world.
That is his task. It is only because the physical world is dependent upon
95
the spiritual, and because man can work upon earth, in a true sense, only if
he is a participator in those worlds in which the creative forces lie
concealed — only for these reasons should he have the desire to ascend to
the higher worlds. No one approaching esoteric training with these
sentiments, and resolved not to deviate for a moment from these
prescribed directions, need fear the slightest danger. No one should allow
the prospect of these dangers to deter him from esoteric training; it should
rather act as a strong challenge to one and all to acquire those faculties
which every true esoteric student must possess.
After these preliminary observations that should dispel any element of
terror, a description of some of the so-called dangers will be given. It is
true that great changes take place in the student's finer bodies, as described
above. These changes are connected with certain processes in the
development of the three fundamental forces of the soul, with willing,
feeling, and thinking. Before esoteric training, these forces are subject to a
connection ordained by higher cosmic laws. Man's willing, feeling and
thinking are not arbitrary. A particular idea arising in the mind is attended
by a particular feeling, according to natural laws; or it is followed by a
resolution of the will in equally natural sequence. We enter a room, find it
stuffy, and open the window. We hear our name called and follow the call.
We are questioned and we answer. We perceive an ill-smelling object and
experience a feeling of disgust. These are simple connections between
thinking, feeling, and willing. When we survey human life we find that
everything is built up on such connections. Indeed, life is not termed
normal unless such a connection, founded on the laws of human nature, is
observed between thinking, feeling and willing. It would be found
contrary to these laws if the sight of an ill-smelling object gave anyone
pleasure, or if anyone, on being questioned, did not answer. The success
anticipated from a right education or fitting instruction is based upon the
presumption that a connection between thinking, feeling, and willing,
corresponding to human nature, can be established in the pupil. Certain
ideas are conveyed to him on the assumption that they will be associated,
in regular fashion, with his feelings and volitions.
All this arises from the fact that in the finer soul-vehicles of man the
central points of the three forces — thinking, feeling and willing — are
connected with each other according to laws. This connection in the finer
soul organism has its counterpart in the coarser physical body. In the
latter, too, the organs of will are connected according to laws with those of
thinking and feeling. A particular thought, therefore, inevitably evokes a
feeling or an activity of will. In the course of higher development, the
threads interconnecting the three fundamental forces are severed. At first
this severance occurs only within the finer soul organism, but at a still
higher stage the separation extends also to the physical body. It is a fact
that in higher spiritual development the brain divides into three separate
96
parts. This separation is not physically perceptible in the ordinary way, nor
can it be demonstrated by the keenest instruments. Yet it occurs, and the
clairvoyant has means of observing it. The brain of the higher clairvoyant
divides into three independently active entities: The thought-brain, the
feeling-brain, and the will-brain.
Thus the organs of thinking, feeling, and willing become individualized;
their connection henceforth is not maintained by laws inherent in
themselves, but must be managed by the awakened higher consciousness
of the individual. This, then, is the change which the student observes
coming over him: that no connection arises of itself between an idea and a
feeling or a will-impulse, unless he himself provides one. No impulse
urges him from thought to action unless he himself in freedom give rise to
this impulse. He can henceforth confront, devoid of feeling, a fact which
before his training would have filled him with glowing love or bitter
hatred; and he can remain impassive at the thought which formerly would
have spurred him on to action, as though of its own accord. He can
perform actions through resolutions of the will for which there is not the
slightest reason for anyone not having undergone esoteric training. The
student's great achievement is the attainment of complete mastery over the
combined activity of the three soul forces; but at the same time the
responsibility for this activity is placed entirely in his own hands.
It is only through this transformation of his being that the student can enter
consciously into relation with certain supersensible forces and beings, for
his own soul forces are related to certain fundamental forces of the world.
The force, for instance, inherent in the will can affect definite things and
the beings of the higher worlds, and also perceive them; but it can only do
so when liberated from its connection with thinking and feeling within the
soul. The moment this connection is severed, the activity of the will can be
exteriorized. The same applies to the forces of thinking and feeling. A
feeling of hatred sent out by a person is visible to the clairvoyant as a fine
luminous cloud of special coloring; and the clairvoyant can ward off this
feeling of hatred, just as an ordinary person wards off a physical blow that
is aimed at him. In the supersensible world, hatred becomes a visible
phenomenon, but the clairvoyant can only perceive it in so far as he is able
to project outwards the force lying in his feeling, just as the ordinary
person directs outwards the receptive faculty of his eye. And what is said
of hatred applies also to far more important phenomena of the physical
world. The student can enter into conscious intercourse with them, thanks
to the liberation of the fundamental forces of his soul.
Through the separation of the forces of thinking, feeling, and willing, the
possibility of a three-fold aberration arises for anyone neglecting the
injunctions given by esoteric science. Such an aberration can occur if the
connecting threads are severed before the higher consciousness is
97
sufficiently advanced to hold the reins and guide properly the separated
forces into free and harmoniously combined activity. For as a rule, the
three human soul-forces are not equally advanced in their development at
any given period of life. In one person, thinking is ahead of feeling and
willing; in a second, another soul-force has the upper hand over its
companions. As long as the connection between the soul-forces is
maintained as established by higher cosmic laws, no injurious irregularity,
in a higher sense, can occur through the predominance of one force or
another. Predominating will, for instance, is prevented by the leveling
influence of thinking and feeling from lapsing into any particular excesses.
When, however, a person of such predominating will undertakes esoteric
training, feeling and thinking cease to exert their regular influence on the
will when the latter constantly presses on to great exertions of power If,
then, such a person is not sufficiently advanced to control completely the
higher consciousness and himself restore harmony, the will pursues its
own unbridled way, continually overpowering its possessor. Feeling and
thought lapse into complete impotence; the individual is scourged by his
over-mastering will. A violent nature is the result, rushing from one
unbridled action to another.
A second deviation occurs when feeling unduly shakes off its proper
control. A person inclined to the revering of others may then diverge into
unlimited dependence, to the extent of losing all personal will and
thoughts. Instead of higher knowledge, the most pitiful vacuity and
feebleness would become such a person's lot. Or, in the case of such
inordinate predominance of the feeling life, a person with an inclination
toward religious devotion can sink into the most degenerate welter.
The third evil is found when thought predominates, resulting in a
contemplative nature, hostile to life and locked up within itself. The world,
for such people, has no further importance save that it provides them with
objects for satisfying their boundless thirst for wisdom. No thought ever
moves them to an action or a feeling. They appear everywhere as cold and
unfeeling creatures. They flee from every contact with the things of
ordinary life as though from something exciting their aversion, or which,
at any rate, had lost all meaning for them.
These are the three ways of error into which the student can stray: (1)
exuberant violence of will, (2) sentimental emotionalism, and (3) cold,
loveless striving for wisdom. For outward observation, and also from the
ordinary (materialistic) medical standpoint, anyone thus gone astray is
hardly distinguishable (especially in degree) from an insane or, at least, a
highly neurasthenic person. Of course, the student must not resemble
these. It is essential for him that the three fundamental soul-forces,
thinking, feeling, and willing, should have undergone harmonious
development before being released from their inherent connection and
98
subordinated to the awakened higher consciousness. For once a mistake is
made and one of the soul-forces falls a prey to unbridled excess, the higher
soul comes into existence as a miscarriage. The unrestrained force
pervades the individual's entire personality, and for a long time there can
be no question of the balance being restored. What appears to be a
harmless characteristic as long as its possessor is without esoteric training,
namely, a predominance of thinking or feeling or willing, is so intensified
in an esoteric student that the universally human element, indispensable
for life, becomes obscured.
Yet a really serious danger cannot threaten the student until he has
acquired the ability to include in his waking consciousness the experiences
forthcoming during sleep. As long as there is only the question of
illumination of the intervals of sleep, the life of the senses, regulated by
universal cosmic laws, reacts during the waking hours on the disturbed
equilibrium of the soul, tending to restore the balance. That is why it is so
essential that the waking life of the student should be in every respect
regular and healthy. The more capable he is of meeting the demands made
by the outer world upon a healthy, sound constitution of body, soul, and
spirit, the better it is for him. On the other hand, it may be very bad for
him if his ordinary waking life affects him in an exciting or irritating way,
that is, if destructive or hampering influences of outer life affect him in
addition to the great changes taking place in his inner self. He must seek to
find everything corresponding to his powers and faculties which can lead
him into undisturbed, harmonious communion with his surroundings,
while avoiding everything detrimental to this harmony — everything that
brings unrest and feverish haste into his life. And here it is not so much a
question of casting off this unrest and haste in an external sense, but much
more of taking care that thoughts, feelings, intentions, and bodily health
are not thereby exposed to continual fluctuation. All this is not so easy for
the student to accomplish as it was before esoteric training, for the higher
experiences now playing into his life act upon his entire existence. Should
anything within these higher experiences not be as it should, the
irregularity continues lying in wait for him and may at every turn throw
him off the right path. For this reason the student should omit nothing
which can secure for him unfailing mastery over his whole being. He
should never be found wanting in presence of mind or in calm penetration
of all situations of life. In the main, a genuine esoteric training gives rise
of itself to all these qualities, and as it progresses the student only becomes
acquainted with the dangers while simultaneously and at the right moment
acquiring the full power to rout them from the field.
99
X
The Guardian of the Threshold
The important experiences marking the student's ascent into the higher
worlds include his meeting with the Guardian of the Threshold. Strictly
speaking, there are two Guardians: a lesser and a greater. The student
meets the lesser Guardian when the threads connecting willing, feeling,
and thinking within the finer astral and etheric bodies begin to loosen, in
the way described in the foregoing chapter. The greater Guardian is
encountered when this sundering of the connections extends to the
physical parts of the body, that is, at first to the brain. The lesser Guardian
is a sovereign being. He does not come into existence, as far as the student
is concerned, until the latter has reached the requisite stage of
development. Only some of his most important characteristics can here be
indicated.
The attempt will now be made to describe in narrative form this meeting
with the lesser Guardian of the Threshold, as a result of which the student
learns that his thinking, feeling, and willing have become released within
him from their inherent connection.
A truly terrible spectral being confronts him, and he will need all the
presence of mind and faith in the security of his path which he has had
ample opportunity to acquire in the course of his previous training.
The Guardian proclaims his signification somewhat in the following
words: “Hitherto, powers invisible to thyself watched over thee. They saw
to it that in the course of thy lives each of thy good deeds brought its
reward, and each of thine evil deeds was attended by its evil results.
Thanks to their influence thy character formed itself out of thy life-
experiences and thy thoughts. They were the instruments of thy destiny.
They ordained that measure of joy and pain allotted to thee in thine
incarnations, according to thy conduct in lives gone by. They ruled over
thee as the all-embracing law of karma. These powers will now partly
release thee from their constraining influence; and henceforth must thou
accomplish for thyself a part of the work which hitherto they performed
for thee. Destiny struck thee many a hard blow in the past. Thou knewest
not why. Each blow was the consequence of a harmful deed in a bygone
lie. Thou foundest joy and gladness, and thou didst take them as they
came. They, too, were the fruits of former deeds. Thy character shows
many a beautiful side, and many an ugly flaw. Thou hast thyself to thank
for both, for they are the result of thy previous experiences and thoughts.
These were till now unknown to thee; their effects alone were made
manifest. The karmic powers, however, beheld all thy deeds in former
lives, and all thy most secret thoughts and feelings, and determined
100
accordingly thy present self and thy present mode of life. But now all the
good and evil sides of thy bygone lives shall be revealed to thee. Hitherto
they were interwoven with thine own being; they were in thee and thou
couldst not see them, even as thou canst not behold thine own brain with
physical eyes. But now they become released from thee; they detach
themselves from thy personality. They assume an independent form which
thou canst see even as thou beholdest the stones and plants of the outer
world. And . . . I am that very being who shaped my body out of thy good
and evil achievements. My spectral form is woven out of thine own life's
record. Till now thou hast borne me invisibly within thee, and it was well
that this was so; for the wisdom of thy destiny, though concealed from
thee, could thus work within thee, so that the hideous stains on my form
should be blotted out. Now that I have come forth from within thee, that
concealed wisdom, too, has departed from thee. It will pay no further heed
to thee; it will leave the work in thy hands alone. I must become a perfect
and glorious being, or fall a prey to corruption; and should this occur, I
would drag thee also down with me into a dark and corrupt world. If thou
wouldst avoid this, then thine own wisdom must become great enough to
undertake the task of that other, concealed wisdom, which has departed
from thee. As a form visible to thyself I will never for an instant leave thy
side, once thou hast crossed my Threshold. And in future, whenever thou
dost act or think wrongly thou wilt straightway perceive thy guilt as a
hideous, demoniacal distortion of my form. Only when thou hast made
good all thy bygone wrongs and hast so purified thyself that all further evil
is, for thee, a thing impossible, only then will my being have become
transformed into radiant beauty. Then, too, shall I again become united
with thee for the welfare of thy future activity.
“Yet my Threshold is fashioned out of all the timidity that remains in thee,
out of all the dread of the strength needed to take full responsibility for all
thy thoughts and actions. As long as there remains in thee a trace of fear of
becoming thyself the guide of thine own destiny, just so long will this
Threshold lack what still remains to be built into it. And as long as a single
stone is found missing, just so long must thou remain standing as though
transfixed; or else stumble. Seek not, then, to cross this Threshold until
thou dost feel thyself entirely free from fear and ready for the highest
responsibility. Hitherto I only emerged from thy personality when death
recalled thee from an earthly life; but even then my form was veiled from
thee. Only the powers of destiny who watched over thee beheld me and
could thus, in the intervals between death and a new birth, build in thee, in
accordance with my appearance, that power and capacity thanks to which
thou couldst labor in a new earth life at the beautifying of my form, for thy
welfare and progress. It was I, too, whose imperfection ever and again
constrained the powers of destiny to lead thee back to a new incarnation
upon earth. I was present at the hour of thy death, and it was on my
account that the Lords of Karma ordained thy reincarnation. And it is only
101
by thus unconsciously transforming me to complete perfection in ever
recurring earthly lives that thou couldst have escaped the powers of death
and passed over into immortality united with me.
“Visible do I thus stand before thee today, just as I shave ever stood
invisible beside thee in the hour of death. When thou shalt have crossed
my Threshold, thou wilt enter those realms to which thou hast hitherto
only had access after physical death. Thou dost now enter them with full
knowledge, and henceforth as thou wanderest outwardly visible upon the
earth thou wilt at the same time wander in the kingdom of death, that is, in
the kingdom of life eternal. I am indeed the Angel of Death; but I am at
the same time the bearer of a higher life without end. Through me thou
wilt die with thy body still living, to be reborn into an imperishable
existence.
“Into this kingdom thou art now entering; thou wilt meet beings that are
supersensible, and happiness will be thy lot. But I myself must provide thy
first acquaintance with that world, and I am thine own creation. Formerly I
drew my life from thine; but now thou hast awakened me to a separate
existence so that I stand before thee as the visible gauge of thy future
deeds — perhaps, too, as thy constant reproach. Thou hast formed me, but
by so doing thou hast undertaken, as thy duty, to transform me.”
(It will be gathered from the above that the Guardian of the Threshold is
an (astral) figure, revealing itself to the student's awakened higher sight;
and it is to this supersensible encounter that spiritual science conducts
him. It is a lower magical process to make the Guardian of the Threshold
physically visible also. That was attained by producing a cloud of fine
substance, a kind of frankincense resulting from a particular mixture of a
number of substances. The developed power of the magician is then able
to mould the frankincense into shape, animating it with the still
unredeemed karma of the individual. Such physical phenomena are no
longer necessary for those sufficiently prepared for the higher sight; and
besides this, anyone who sees, without adequate preparation, his
unredeemed karma appear before his eyes as a living creature would run
the risk of straying into evil byways. Bulwer Lytton's Zanoni contains in
novel form a description of the Guardian of the Threshold.)
What is here indicated in narrative form must not be understood in the
sense of an allegory, but as an experience of the highest possible reality
befalling the esoteric student.
The Guardian must warn him not to go a step further unless he feels in
himself the strength to fulfill the demands made in the above speech.
However horrible the form assumed by the Guardian, it is only the effect
of the student's own past life, his own character risen out of him into
102
independent existence. This awakening is brought about by the separation
of will, thought, and feeling. To feel for the first time that one has oneself
called a spiritual being into existence is in itself an experience of deepest
significance. The student's preparation must aim at enabling him to endure
the terrible sight without a trace of timidity and, at the moment of the
meeting, to feel his strength so increased that he can undertake fully
conscious the responsibility for transforming and beautifying the
Guardian.
If successful, this meeting with the Guardian results in the student's next
physical death being an entirely different event from the death as he knew
it formerly. He experiences death consciously by laying aside the physical
body as one discards a garment that is worn out or perhaps rendered
useless through a sudden rent. Thus his physical death is of special
importance only for those living with him, whose perception is still
restricted to the world of the senses. For them the student dies; but for
himself nothing of importance is changed in his whole environment. The
entire supersensible world stood open to him before his death, and it is this
same world that now confronts him after death.
The Guardian of the Threshold is also connected with other matters. The
person belongs to a family, a nation, a race; his activity in this world
depends upon his belonging to some such community. His individual
character is also connected with it. The conscious activity of individual
persons by no means exhausts everything to be reckoned with in a family,
a nation, or a race. Besides their character, families, nations, and races
have also their destiny. For persons restricted to their senses these things
remain mere general ideas; and the materialistic thinker, in his prejudice,
will look down with contempt on the spiritual scientist when he hears that
for him, family and national character, lineal or racial destiny, are vested
in beings just as real as the personality in which the character and destiny
of the individual man are vested. The spiritual scientist becomes
acquainted with higher worlds of which the separate personalities are
members, just as arms and legs are members of the human being. Besides
the separate individuals, a very real family and national group soul and
racial spirit is at work in the life of a family, a people, or a race. Indeed, in
a certain sense the separate individuals are merely the executive organs of
these family group souls, racial spirits, and so on. It is nothing but the
truth to say, for instance, that a national group soul makes use of each
individual man belonging to that nation for the execution of some work.
The group soul of a people does not descend into physical reality but
dwells in the higher worlds and, in order to work in the physical world,
makes use of the physical organs of each individual human being. In a
higher sense, it is like an architect making use of workmen for executing
the details of a building. In the truest sense, everyone receives his allotted
task from his family, national, or racial group soul. Now, the ordinary
103
person is by no means initiated into the higher design of his work. He
joins unconsciously in the tasks of his people and of his race. From the
moment the student meets the Guardian, he must not only know his own
tasks, but must knowingly collaborate in those of his folk, his race. Every
extension of his horizon necessarily enlarges the scope of his duties. What
actually happens is that the student adds a new body to his finer soul-body.
He puts on a second garment. Hitherto he found his way through the world
with the coverings enveloping his personality; and what he had to
accomplish for his community, his nation, his race, was directed by higher
spirits who made use of his personality.
And now, a further revelation made to him by the Guardian of the
Threshold is that henceforth these spirits will withdraw their guiding hand
from him. He must step out of the circle of his community. Yet as an
isolated personality he would become hardened in himself and decline into
ruin, did he not, himself, acquire those powers which are vested in the
national and racial spirits. Many, no doubt, will say: “Oh, I have entirely
freed myself from all lineal and racial connections; I only want to be a
human being and nothing but a human being.” To these one must reply:
“Who, then, brought you to this freedom? Was it not your family who
placed you in the world where you now stand? Have you not your lineage,
your nation, your race to thank for being what you are? They have brought
you up. And if now, exalted above all prejudices, you are one of the light-
bringers and benefactors of your stock and even of your race, it is to their
up-bringing that you owe it. Yes, even when you say you are `nothing but
a human being,' even the fact that you have become such a personality you
owe to the spirits of your communities.” Only the esoteric student learns
what it means to be entirely cut off from his family, national, or racial
spirit. He alone realizes, through personal experience, the insignificance of
all such education in respect of the life now confronting him. For
everything inculcated by education completely melts away when the
threads binding will, thought, and feeling are severed. He looks back on
the result of all his previous education as he might on a house crumbling
away brick by brick, which he must now rebuild in a new form. And
again, it is more than a mere symbolical expression to say that when the
Guardian has enunciated his first statement, there arises from the spot
where he stands a whirlwind which extinguishes all those spiritual lights
that have hitherto illumined the pathway of his life. Utter darkness,
relieved only by the rays issuing from the Guardian himself, unfolds
before the student. And out of this darkness resounds the Guardian's
further admonition: “Step not across my Threshold until thou dost clearly
realize that thou wilt thyself illumine the darkness ahead of thee; take not
a single step forward until thou art positive that thou hast sufficient oil in
thine own lamp. The lamps of the guides whom thou hast hitherto
followed will now no longer be available to thee.” At these words, the
student must turn and glance backward. The Guardian of the Threshold
104
now draws aside a veil which till now had concealed deep life-mysteries.
The family, national, and racial spirits are revealed to the student in their
full activity, so that he perceives clearly on the one hand, how he has
hitherto been led, and no less clearly on the other hand, that he will
henceforward no longer enjoy this guidance. That is the second warning
received at the Threshold from its Guardian.
Without preparation, no one could endure the sight of what has here been
indicated. But the higher training which makes it possible at all for the
student to advance up to the Threshold simultaneously puts him in a
position to find the necessary strength at the right moment. Indeed, the
training can be so harmonious in its nature that the entry into the higher
life is relieved of everything of an agitating or tumultuous character. His
experience at the Threshold will then be attended by a premonition of that
felicity which is to provide the keynote of his newly awakened life. The
feeling of a new freedom will outweigh all other feelings; and attended by
this feeling, his new duties and responsibilities will appear as something
which man, at a particular stage of life, must needs take upon himself.
105
XI
Life and Death: The Greater Guardian of the Threshold
It has been described in the foregoing chapter how significant for the
human being is his meeting with the so-called lesser Guardian of the
Threshold by virtue of the fact that he becomes aware of confronting a
supersensible being whom he has himself brought into existence, and
whose body consists of the hitherto invisible results of the student's own
actions, feelings, and thoughts. These unseen forces have become the
cause of his destiny and his character, and he realizes how he himself
founded the present in the past. He can understand why his inner self, now
standing to a certain extent revealed before him, includes particular
inclinations and habits, and he can also recognize the origin of certain
blows of fate that have befallen him. He perceives why he loves one thing
and hates another; why one thing makes him happy and another unhappy.
Visible life is explained by the invisible causes. The essential facts of life,
too — health and illness, birth and death — unveil themselves before his
gaze. He observes how before his birth he wove the causes which
necessarily led to his return into life. Henceforth he knows that being
within himself which is fashioned with all its imperfections in the visible
world, and which can only be brought to its final perfection in this same
visible world. For in no other world is an opportunity given to build up
and complete this being. Moreover, he recognizes that death cannot sever
him forever from this world; for he says to himself: “Once I came into this
world because, being what I was, I needed the life it provided to acquire
qualities unattainable in any other world. And I must remain bound to this
world until I have developed within myself everything that can here be
gained. I shall some day become a useful collaborator in another world
only by acquiring all the requisite faculties in this physical world.”
Thanks to his insight into the supersensible world, the initiate gains a
better knowledge and appreciation of the true value of visible nature than
was possible before his higher training; and this may be counted among
his most important experiences. Anyone not possessing this insight and
perhaps therefore imagining the supersensible regions to be infinitely
more valuable, is likely to underestimate the physical world. Yet the
possessor of this insight knows that without experience in visible reality
he would be totally powerless in that other invisible reality. Before he can
live in the latter he must have the requisite faculties and instruments which
can only be acquired in the visible world. Consciousness in the invisible
world is not possible without spiritual sight, but this power of vision in the
higher world is gradually developed through experience in the lower. No
one can be born in the spiritual world with spiritual eyes without having
first developed them in the physical world, any more than a child could be
106
born with physical eyes, had they not already been formed within the
mother's womb.
From this standpoint it will also be readily understood why the Threshold
to the supersensible world is watched over by a Guardian. In no case may
real insight into those regions be permitted to anyone lacking the requisite
faculties; therefore, when at the hour of death anyone enters the other
world while still incompetent to work in it, the higher experiences are
shrouded from him until he is fit to behold them.
When the student enters the supersensible world, life acquires quite a new
meaning for him; he discerns in the physical world the seed-ground of a
higher world, so that in a certain sense the higher will appear defective
without the lower. Two outlooks are opened before him; the first into the
past and the second into the future. His vision extends to a past in which
this physical world was not yet existent; for he has long since discarded
the prejudice that the supersensible world was developed out of the sense-
world. He knows that the former existed first, and that out of it everything
physical was evolved. He sees that he himself belonged to a supersensible
world before coming for the first time into this sense-world. But this
pristine supersensible world needed to pass through the sense-world, for
without this passage its further evolution would not have been possible. It
can only pursue its course when certain things will have developed
requisite faculties within the realm of the senses. These beings are none
other than human beings. They owe their present life to an imperfect stage
of spiritual existence and are being led, even within this stage, to that
perfection which will make them fit for further work in the higher world.
At this point the outlook is directed into the future. A higher stage of the
supersensible world is discerned which will contain the fruits matured in
the sense-world. The sense-world as such will be overcome, but its results
will be embodied in a higher world.
The existence of disease and death in the sense-world is thus explained.
Death merely expresses the fact that the original supersensible world
reached a point beyond which it could not progress by itself. Universal
death must needs have overtaken it, had it not received a fresh life-
impulse. Thus this new life has evolved into a battle with universal death.
From the remnants of a dying, rigid world there sprouted the seeds of a
new one. That is why we have death and life in the world. The decaying
portion of the old world adheres to the new life blossoming from it, and
the process of evolution moves slowly. This comes to expression most
clearly in man himself. The sheath he bears is gathered from the preserved
remnants of the old world, and within this sheath the germ of that being is
matured which will live in the future.
107
Thus man is twofold: mortal and immortal. The mortal is in its last, the
immortal in its first stage. But it is only within this twofold world, which
finds its expression in the sense-world, that he can acquire the requisite
faculties to lead the world to immortality. Indeed, this task is precisely to
gather the fruits of the mortal for the immortal. And as he glances at
himself as the result of his own work in the past he cannot but say: “I have
in me the elements of a decaying world. They are at work in me, and I can
only break their power little by little, thanks to the new immortal elements
coming to life within me.” This is the path leading man from death to life.
Could he but speak to himself with full consciousness at the hour of his
death, he would say: “The perishing world was my task-master. I am now
dying as the result of the entire past in which I am enmeshed. Yet the soil
of mortal life has matured the seeds of immortal life. I carry them with me
into another world. If it had merely depended on the past, I could never
have been born. The life of the past came to an end with birth. Life in the
sense-world is wrested from universal death by the newly formed life-
germ. The time between birth and death is merely an expression for the
sum of values wrested from the dying past by the new life; and illness is
nothing but the continued effect of the dying portions of the past.”
In the above the answer will be found to the question why man works his
way only gradually through error and imperfection to the good and true.
His actions, feelings, and thoughts are at first dominated by the perishing
and the mortal. The latter gave rise to his sense-organs. For this reason,
these organs and all things activating them are doomed to perish The
imperishable will not be found in the instincts, impulses, and passions, or
in the organs belonging to them, but only in the work produced by these
organs. Man must extract from the perishable everything that can be
extracted, and this work alone will enable him to discard the background
out of which he has grown, and which finds its expression in the physical
sense-world.
Thus the first Guardian confronts man as the counterpart of his two-fold
nature in which perishable and imperishable are blended; and it stands
clearly proved how far removed he still is from attaining that sublime
luminous figure which may again dwell in the pure, spiritual world. The
extent to which he is entangled in the physical sense-world is exposed to
the student's view. The presence of instincts, impulses, desires, egotistical
wishes and all forms of selfishness, and so forth, expresses itself in this
entanglement, as it does further in his membership in a race, a nation, and
so forth; for peoples and races are but steps leading to pure humanity. A
race or a nation stands so much the higher, the more perfectly its members
express the pure, ideal human type, the further they have worked their way
from the physical and perishable to the supersensible and imperishable.
The evolution of man through the incarnations in ever higher national and
racial forms is thus a process of liberation. Man must finally appear in
108
harmonious perfection. In a similar way, the pilgrimage through ever purer
forms of morality and religion is a perfecting process; for every moral
stage retains the passion for the perishable beside the seeds of an ideal
future.
Now in the Guardian of the Threshold as described above, the product of
the past is manifest, containing only so many seeds of the future as could
be planted in the course of time. Yet everything that can be extracted from
the sense-world must be carried into the supersensible world. Were man to
bring with him only what had been woven into his counterpart out of the
past, his earthly task would remain but partially accomplished. For this
reason the lesser Guardian of the Threshold is joined, after a time, by the
greater Guardian. The meeting with the second Guardian will again be
described in narrative form.
When the student has recognized all the elements from which he must
liberate himself, his way is barred by a sublime luminous being whose
beauty is difficult to describe in the words of human language. This
encounter takes place when the sundering of the organs of thinking,
feeling, and willing extends to the physical body, so that their reciprocal
connection is no longer regulated by themselves but by the higher
consciousness, which has now entirely liberated itself from physical
conditions. The organs of thinking, feeling and willing will then be
controlled from supersensible regions as instruments in the power of the
human soul. The latter, thus liberated from all physical bonds, is now
confronted by the second Guardian of the Threshold who speaks as
follows:
“Thou hast released thyself from the world of the senses. Thou hast won
the right to become a citizen of the supersensible world, whence thine
activity can now be directed. For thine own sake, thou dost no longer
require thy physical body in its present form. If thine intention were
merely to acquire the faculties necessary for life in the supersensible
world, thou needest no longer return to the sense-world. But now behold
me. See how sublimely I tower above all that thou hast made of thyself
thus far. Thou hast attained thy present degree of perfection thanks to the
faculties thou wert able to develop in the sense-world as long as thou wert
still confined to it. But now a new era is to begin, in which thy liberated
powers must be applied to further work in the world of the senses.
Hitherto thou hast sought only thine own release, but now, having thyself
become free, thou canst go forth as a liberator of thy fellows. Until today
thou hast striven as an individual, but now seek to coordinate thyself with
the whole, so that thou mayst bring into the supersensible world not
thyself alone, but all things else existing in the world of the senses. Thou
wilt some day be able to unite with me, but I cannot be blessed so long as
others remain unredeemed. As a separate freed being, thou wouldst fain
109
enter at once the kingdom of the supersensible; yet thou wouldst be forced
to look down on the still unredeemed beings in the physical world, having
sundered thy destiny from theirs, although thou and they are inseparably
united. Ye all did perforce descend into the sense-world to gather powers
needed for a higher world. To separate thyself from thy fellows would
mean to abuse those very powers which thou couldst not have developed
save in their company. Thou couldst not have descended had they not
done so; and without them the powers needed for supersensible existence
would fail thee. Thou must now share with thy fellows the powers which,
together with them, thou didst acquire. I shall therefore bar thine entry into
the higher regions of the supersensible world so long as thou hast not
applied all the powers thou hast acquired to the liberation of thy
companions. With the powers already at thy disposal thou mayst sojourn
in the lower regions of the supersensible world; but I stand before the
portal of the higher regions as the Cherub with the fiery sword before
Paradise, and I bar thine entrance as long as powers unused in the sense-
world still remain in thee. And if thou dost refuse to apply thy powers in
this world, others will come who will not refuse; and a higher
supersensible world will receive all the fruits of the sense-world, while
thou wilt lose from under thy feet the very ground in which thou wert
rooted. The purified world will develop above and beyond thee, and thou
shalt be excluded from it. Thus thou wouldst tread the black path, while
the others from whom thou didst sever thyself tread the white path.”
With these words the greater Guardian makes his presence known soon
after the meeting with the first Guardian has taken place. The initiate
knows full well what is in store for him if he yields to the temptation of a
premature abode in the supersensible world. An indescribable splendor
shines forth from the second Guardian of the Threshold; union with him
looms as a far distant ideal before the soul's vision. Yet there is also the
certitude that this union will not be possible until all the powers afforded
by this world are applied to the task of its liberation and redemption. By
fulfilling the demands of the higher light-being the initiate will contribute
to the liberation of the human race. He lays his gifts on the sacrificial altar
of humanity. Should he prefer his own premature elevation into the
supersensible world, the stream of human evolution will flow over and
past him. After his liberation he can gain no new powers from the world of
the senses; and if he places his work at the world's disposal it will entail
his renouncement of any further benefit for himself.
It does not follow that, when called upon to decide, anyone will naturally
follow the white path. That depends entirely upon whether he is so far
purified at the time of his decision that no trace of self-seeking makes this
prospect of felicity appear desirable. For the allurements here are the
strongest possible; whereas on the other side no special allurements are
evident. Here nothing appeals to his egotism. The gift he receives in the
110
higher regions of the supersensible world is nothing that comes to him, but
only something that flows from him, that is, love for the world and for his
fellows. Nothing that egotism desires is denied upon the black path, for the
latter provides, on the contrary, for the complete gratification of egotism,
and will not fail to attract those desiring merely their own felicity, for it is
indeed the appropriate path for them. No one therefore should expect the
occultists of the white path to give him instruction for the development of
his own egotistical self. They do not take the slightest interest in the
felicity of the individual man. Each can attain that for himself, and it is not
the task of the white occultists to shorten the way; for they are only
concerned with the development and liberation of all human beings and all
creatures. Their instructions therefore deal only with the development of
powers for collaboration in this work. Thus they place selfless devotion
and self-sacrifice before all other qualities. They never actually refuse
anyone, for even the greatest egotist can purify himself; but no one merely
seeking an advantage for himself will ever obtain assistance from the
white occultists. Even when they do not refuse their help, he, the seeker,
deprives himself on the advantage resulting from their assistance. Anyone,
therefore, really following the instructions of the good occultists will,
upon crossing the Threshold, understand the demands of the greater
Guardian; anyone, however, not following their instructions can never
hope to reach the Threshold. Their instructions, if followed, produce good
results or no results; for it is no part of their task to lead to egotistical
felicity and a mere existence in the supersensible worlds. In fact, it
becomes their duty to keep the student away from the supersensible world
until he can enter it with the will for selfless collaboration.
111
Appendix
The path to supersensible knowledge, as described in this book, leads the
soul through experiences concerning the nature of which it is especially
important to avoid all illusions and misconceptions. Yet it is but natural
that the latter should arise in such questions as are here considered. In this
connection one of the most serious mistakes occurs when the whole range
of inner experience dealt with in true spiritual science is distorted into
appearing in the same category as superstition, visionary dreaming,
mediumship (spiritism), and other degenerate practices. This distortion is
often due to the fact that persons desirous of following the path described
in this book are confused with others who in their search for supersensible
reality, and as a result of methods foreign to genuine striving for
knowledge, wander into undesirable paths. The experiences through which
the human soul lives on the path here described are wholly confined to the
realm of psycho-spiritual experience. They are only possible if equal
freedom and independence from the bodily life are attained for certain
other inner experiences, as is the case during ordinary consciousness,
when thoughts are made concerning things outwardly perceived or
inwardly felt and willed, thoughts which do not themselves originate in
what is perceived, felt, and willed. There are people who deny the
existence of such thoughts. They believe that no thought is possible that is
not extracted from perceptions or from the inner life dependent on the
body. For them, all thoughts are to a certain extent mere reflections of
perceptions and of inner experiences. This view, however, can be
expressed only by those who have never raised themselves to the faculty
of experiencing with their souls a self-sustaining life in pure thought. For
others, who have lived through this experience, it is a matter of knowledge
that wherever thought dominates the life of the soul to the degree that this
thought permeates other soul functions, the human being is involved in an
activity in whose origin his body has no share. In the ordinary life of the
soul, thought is almost always mixed with other functions: perception,
feeling, willing and so forth. These other functions are effectuated by the
body; yet thought plays into them, and to the degree that is does this a
process takes place, in and through the human being, in which his body
has no share. This can only be denied so long as the illusion is not
discarded which arises from observing thought only when the latter is
united with other functions. Yet an inner exertion is possible which will
enable the thinking part of inner life to be experienced as distinct from
everything else. Something consisting in pure thought alone can be
detached from the encompassing soul-life, that is, thoughts that are self-
sustaining and from which everything provided by perception or bodily
conditioned inner life is excluded. Such thoughts reveal themselves
through themselves, through what they are, as spiritual supersensible
substance. Anyone uniting himself with them, while excluding all
perception, all memory, and every other token of inner life, knows himself
112
to be in a supersensible region and experiences himself outside the
physical body. For anyone familiar with this whole process, the question
can no longer arise: Can the soul live through experiences outside the
body in a supersensible world? For it would mean denying what he knows
from experience. The only question for him is: What prevents such a
positive fact from being recognized? And the answer he finds to this
question is that the fact does not reveal itself unless the student first
cultivates a condition of soul which allows him to become the recipient of
this revelation.
Now, people become at once suspicious when an activity confined entirely
to the soul is expected of them, in order that something independent of
themselves should reveal itself. They believe that they themselves give the
revelation its content because they prepare themselves to receive it. They
expect experiences to which they contribute nothing and which allow them
to remain quite passive. Should such people, in addition, be ignorant of the
simplest scientific requirements for the comprehension of a given fact,
they will take for an objective revelation of non-sensible substances
contents and productions of the soul in which the soul's conscious
participation is reduced below the level maintained in sense-perception
and will-impelled action. Such are the soul-contents provided by the
experiences and revelations of the visionary and the medium. But what
comes to the fore through such revelations is not a supersensible but a
sub-sensible world. Human waking life does not run its course completely
within the body; the most conscious part of it runs its course on the
boundary between the body and the physical outer world; thus the process
of perception with the organs of sense is as much an extra-physical
process penetrating into the body as a permeation of this process from out
the body; so too, is the life of will, which rests upon the insertion of the
human being into the cosmic being, so that what occurs in the human
being through his will is simultaneously a link in the chain of cosmic
occurrence. In this life of the soul running on the boundary of the physical
body, the human being is to a high degree dependent on his physical
organization; but the function of thought plays into this activity, and in as
much as this is the case, the human being makes himself independent of
his bodily organization in the functions of sense perception and willing. In
the experiences of the visionary and in mediumistic phenomena the human
being becomes completely dependent on his body. He excludes from the
life of his soul that function which, in perception and willing, makes him
independent of his body. Thus the content and productions of his soul are
merely revelations of his bodily life. The experiences of the visionary and
the phenomena produced by the medium owe their existence to the fact
that a person while thus experiencing and producing is, with his soul, less
independent of his body than in ordinary perception and willing. In the
experience of the supersensible as indicated in this book, the development
of soul-life proceeds in just the opposite direction from that taken by the
113
visionary and the medium. The soul acquires a progressively greater
independence of the body than is the case in perceiving and willing. The
same independence realized in the experience of pure thought is attained
by the soul for a far wider range of activity.
For the supersensible activity of the soul here meant, it is especially
important to grasp and realize in the clearest possible way this experience
of life in pure thought. For in the main, this experience is already a
supersensible activity of the soul, but one in which nothing supersensible
is as yet perceived. With pure thought we live in the supersensible; but we
experience only this in supersensible fashion; we do not yet experience
anything else supersensibly. And supersensible experience must be a
continuation of that life already attained by the soul when united with pure
thought. For this reason it is so important to gain knowledge of this union
in the right way, for it is from its comprehension that light shines forth to
bring correct insight into the nature of supersensible knowledge. The
moment the life of the soul links below the level of clear consciousness
existing in thought, the soul is on the wrong path as far as true knowledge
of the supersensible world is concerned: for the soul is seized by the
bodily functions, and what is than experienced is not the revelation of a
supersensible world, but bodily revelations confined to the supersensible
world.
* * *
(2) Having penetrated to the sphere of the supersensible, the soul's
experiences are of such a nature that descriptive expressions cannot so
easily be found for them as for experiences confined to the world of the
senses. Care must often be taken not to overlook the fact that to a certain
extent, in descriptions of supersensible experience, the distance separating
the actual fact from the language used to describe it is greater than in
descriptions of physical experience. The reader must be at pains to realize
that many an expression is intended as an illustration, merely indicating in
a delicate way the reality to which it refers. Thus it is said on page 19 of
this book: “Originally all rules and teachings of spiritual science were
expressed in a symbolical sign-language.” And on page 82, a “certain
writing system” was mentioned. Now, anyone may easily be led to
suppose that such a writing system can be learned in the same way we
learn the letters of an ordinary physical language, and their combinations.
In this connection it must be pointed out that there have been and there
still are spiritual scientific signs by means of which supersensible facts are
expressed. And anyone initiated into the meaning of these symbols attains
thereby the means of directing his inner life toward the supersensible
realities in question. But what is of far greater importance for
supersensible experiences is that, in the course of that supersensible
experience to which the realization of the contents of this book leads, the
114
soul should, in the contemplation of the supersensible, gain the revelation
of such a writing through personal experience. The supersensible says
something to the soul which the soul must translate into these illustrative
signs, so that it can be surveyed with full consciousness. The statement
can be made that what is imparted in this book can be realized by every
soul. And in the course of this realization, which the soul can personally
determine according to the indications given, the resulting events occur as
described. Let the reader take this book as a conversation between the
author and himself. The statement that the student needs personal
instruction should be understood in the sense that this book itself is
personal instruction. In earlier times there were reasons for reserving such
personal instruction for oral teaching; today we have reached a stage in
the evolution of humanity in which spiritual scientific knowledge must
become far more widely disseminated than formerly. It must be placed
within the reach of everyone to a quite different extend from what was the
case in older times. Hence the book replaces the former oral instruction. It
is only to a limited extent correct to say that further personal instruction is
necessary beyond that contained in this book. No doubt someone may
need assistance, and it may be of importance for him or her; but it would
be false to believe that there are any cardinal points not mentioned in this
book. These can be found by anyone who reads correctly, and, above all,
completely.
* * *
(3) The descriptive instructions given in this book appear at first sight to
require the complete alteration of the whole human being. Yet when
correctly read it will be found that nothing more is intended than a
description of the inner soul state required of anyone in those moments of
life at which he confronts the supersensible world. He develops this state
of soul as a second being within himself; and the healthy other being
pursues its course in the old way. The unfolding trainee knows how to
hold the two beings apart in full consciousness and how to make them act
and react on each other in the right way. This does not make him useless
and incompetent for life, nor does he lose his interest and skill in it and
become a spiritual researcher the whole day long. It is of course true that
the student's manner of experience in the supersensible world will shed its
light over his whole being; but far from distracting him from life, it makes
him more capable and his life more productive. The necessity of adopting
the existing method of description is due to the fact that every cognitive
process directed toward the supersensible calls the whole human being
into action; so that in the moment of such cognition the whole human
being is engaged, while the supersensible cognitive process engages the
whole human being. The whole human being becomes an eye or an ear.
For this reason, when information is given concerning the construction of
supersensible cognitive processes, it appears as though a transformation of
115
the human being were meant, as if nothing were right in the ordinary
human being, and he should become quite different.
* * *
(4) I should like to add to what was said on pp. 131 et seq. concerning
“some results of initiation,” something which, with a slight alteration, can
apply to other parts of the book. It may occur to someone to ask whether
such figurative descriptions are necessary, and whether it would not be
possible to describe these supersensible experiences in ideas, without such
illustrations. In reply it must be pointed out that for the experience of
supersensible reality it is essential that the human being knew himself as a
supersensible being in a supersensible world. Without this vision of his
own supersensible nature, whose reality is fully manifest in the
descriptions here given of the lotus flowers and the etheric body, the
human being's experience of himself in the supersensible world would be
like placing him in the sensible world in such a way that the things and
processes around him manifested themselves, while he himself had no
knowledge of his own body. His perception of his own supersensible form
in soul-body and etheric body enables him to stand, conscious of himself,
in the supersensible world, just as he is conscious of himself in the
physical world through the perception of his physical body.
THE END
The Appeal ...
Won't you please consider how much you value the information provided here, and find it
within yourself to help preserve this initiative. You can help by clicking here.

116

RUDOLF STEINER, philosopher, scientist and educator, (1861–1925), has achieved world-wide fame as the originator of the Science of the Spirit known as Anthroposophy, and as a pioneer of genius in a variety of fields of learning. “Steiner's gift to the world was a moral and meditative way to objective vision, a way appropriate to the psychological and physiological constitution of Western man. If accepted in the spirit of humility, altruism and truthfulness in which it was given, it could bridge the existing cleft between a man's religious conviction and his intellect and will. It could add comprehension to our existing knowledge and thus revive the vision without which our generation will hardly find the solution to its problems.” Franz Winkler, M.D., Man the Bridge between Two Worlds. “That the academic world has managed to dismiss Steiner's works as inconsequential and irrelevant, is one of the intellectual wonders of the twentieth century. Anyone who is willing to study those vast works with an open mind (let us say, a hundred of his titles) will find himself faced with one of the greatest thinkers of all time, whose grasp of the modern sciences is equaled only by his profound learning in the ancient ones.” Russell W. Davenport, The Dignity of Man.

2

Contents
Preface to the Third Edition Preface to the Fifth Edition Preface to the Edition of May 1918 How Is Knowledge of the High Worlds Attained? The Stages of Initiation o Preparation o Enlightenment o The Control of Thoughts and Feelings III. Initiation IV. Some Practical Aspects V. The Conditions of Esoteric Training VI. Some Results of Initiation VII. The Transformation of Dream Life VIII. The Continuity of Consciousness IX. The Splitting of the Human Personality during Spiritual Training X. The Guardian of the Threshold XI. Life and Death. The Greater Guardian of the Threshold Appendix I. II.

3

First of all. something is to be offered those people who feel drawn to the results of spiritual research. And when this feeling does not permit itself to be warped by a liking or antipathy for some opinion or 4 . Whoever wishes to observe the facts leading to such claims must rise to supersensible cognition. that some statement or other contradicts certain facts established by modern science. but once they have been discovered and communicated. This work on a development of man that will enable him to grasp the supersensible worlds cannot be presented to the public in a new form without certain comments which I shall now make. it would be an error to imagine these disclosures of spiritual science to be valueless for one who lacks the inclination or the possibility to pursue this path himself. Another category of spiritual-scientific disclosures. there is no such thing as a scientific fact that contradicts spiritual science. The communications it contains concerning the development of the human soul are intended to fill various needs. Someone can easily believe. He must follow the path I have endeavored to describe in this book. The student will find that the more open-mindedly he compares spiritual science with positive scientific achievements. simply by applying ordinary common sense in a genuinely unprejudiced way. one must not let this open-mindedness become confused by any of the preconceived ideas so common in human life. In order to establish the facts through research. On the other hand. but the right relation to these also will be achieved without great difficulty by one who understands that not the mind alone but healthy feeling as well is qualified to determine what is true. will be found to elude purely mental judgment more or less. Only. the more clearly is complete accord to be seen. whence do these persons derive their knowledge who claim the ability to tell us something of the profound riddles of life?” — Spiritual science does this. the ability to enter the supersensible worlds is indispensable. For the present. but there can easily seem to be contradictions unless scientific conclusions are consulted abundantly and without prejudice. one that is to follow will constitute the continuation. it is true. for example.Preface to the Third Edition Herewith appear in book form my expositions originally published as single essays under the title Knowledge of the Higher Worlds and Its Attainment. A large proportion of them can be tested offhand. even one who does not perceive them himself can be adequately convinced of their truth. In reality. this volume offers the first part. and who must raise the question: “Well.

practical in the highest sense. This must be seriously considered by anyone intending to carry out the exercises. but by means of much else that is disclosed concerning totally different matters. An exercise can be rightly understood and even rightly executed. Realizing how the spiritual scientist works. but rather. The truth of what is here set forth will best be verified by those who achieve its reality within themselves. and say to himself: The impression made upon me by the description of this path to higher worlds makes clear why the facts reported seem reasonable. Whoever reads this book in an intimate way. 5 . One must postulate the following: no single matter is to be comprehended only by means of what is said about the matter itself. but is interested in the facts it reveals. even when it comes to them only through the communications of those engaged in spiritual research. and yet produce a wrong effect unless another be added to it — one that will resolve the one-sidedness of the first into a harmony of the soul. Anyone with this intention will do well to keep reminding himself that in an exposition on the development of the soul. One who does not himself intend to follow the path to higher knowledge. which is frequently the aim in other expositions. he can approve. prove to be — not unpractical. The results of supersensible knowledge. a corresponding sentient judgment results. more is called for than becoming acquainted with the substance. It is necessary to familiarize oneself intimately with the presentation. Not everyone can immediately achieve spiritual vision. and whoever does so will soon discover what life in every branch can be with their aid. can ask: How does the seer arrive at these facts? To such a one this book is intended to picture the path in such a way that even one not following it can nevertheless have confidence in the communications of the person who has done so . For everyone can apply them. but really allows higher knowledge to act without prejudice. when properly employed in life.other. This will develop the conception that what is vital is to be found not in any single truth but in the harmony of all truths. Such people can feel very clearly what value this knowledge has in life. And there are many more ways of confirming this knowledge for those who cannot or do not wish to tread the path into the supersensible world. but the discoveries of those who have it can be health-giving life-nourishment for all. and what it lacks without them. so that the reading resembles an inner experience. Thus this book is intended to help those who want their sense of truth and feeling for truth concerning the supersensible world strengthened and assured. No less. will not merely familiarize himself with its content: one passage will evoke a certain feeling. however. does it aim to offer aid to those who themselves seek the way to supersensible knowledge.

such as maxims. with descriptions of processes that are to be experienced. to some extent. as an initiation through life may derived a certain satisfaction from finding clarified through co-ordination what had haunted them as separate problems — things they already knew. it is necessary to refer again and again to the content.another passage another feeling. which in turn reveals certain finer points that at first are bound to be overlooked. what form best suits his particular individuality. but perhaps without having been able to consolidate them in adequate conceptions. and so on. And those who have had experiences in their lives that serve. Even those readers who do not intend to take the way prescribed will find much in the book that can be of service to the inner life. and in that way he will learn how much importance should be seen in the one or the other in the development of his soul. 6 . for it will become manifest that much can be satisfactorily assimilated only after trial. suggestions that throw light on various puzzling problems. as is the case here. He will also find out in what form he should try this or that exercise. When one has to do.

to be sure. because at that time I had to allude in a different manner to the substance of what had been published since then concerning facts of cognition of the spiritual worlds. and I have endeavored to forestall them. And it is inevitable that this work of the soul should be joined by an endeavor to enhance the clarity and lucidity of the presentation as given years before. was already inevitably indicated in this book ten years ago. Much of what this referred to has since been published. much had to be discussed in a different way from today. The urge to make such a review is natural in the case of disclosures concerning soul experiences and paths such as are indicated in this book. have remained as they were. In many passages I have been able to increase the accuracy of characterization in detail. I trust I have here succeeded. All the essential elements of the expositions. In connection with a great deal not described in this book I had to explain at that time that it could be learned by oral communication. spiritual processes are described whose existence. There can be no portion of what is imparted which does not remain intimately a part of the one who communicates it. by presenting details in a certain way. The mobility of the soul life. yet important changes have been made. In preparing this new edition I have directed my attention to finding passages in which misconceptions might arise. as well as in other writings. At the time I wrote the essays that constitute this book. all the principal points. or which does not contain something that perpetually works upon his soul. This engendered what I have endeavored to accomplish in this new edition. If anyone wishes to apply what is imparted in this book to his own spiritual life. in 7 . In my Occult Science. and this seemed to me important. in A Road to Self-Knowledge and the Threshold of the Spiritual World.Preface to the Fifth Edition In preparing this new edition of Knowledge of the Higher Worlds and Its Attainment I have gone over every detail of the subject as I had presented it over ten years ago. but in words differing from those that seem right today. to imagine that something much more vital in the personal relations between the seeker for spiritual schooling and this or that teacher than is intended. for instance. in The Spiritual Guidance of Mankind. It might be possible. Misconceptions can arise in far greater measure in connection with the description of inner spiritual processes than with that of facts in the physical world. it is important that he should be able to contemplate the paths in question by means of a characterization as exact as possible. the danger of losing sight of how different it is from all life in the physical world — this and much else renders such misunderstandings possible. But these allusions perhaps did not wholly exclude the possibility of erroneous ideas in the reader's mind.

The new edition of the book. 1914. to find what needs improving. I must write these prefatory remarks while my soul is deeply moved by the destiny-laden event.emphasizing more strongly that for one seeking spiritual schooling in accord with present spiritual conditions an absolutely direct relation to the objective spiritual world is of far greater importance than a relation to the personality of a teacher. Rudolph Steiner 8 . The latter will gradually become merely the helper. upon an increasingly true estimate of this relation between the one who carries on spiritual research and those who develop an interest in the results of his research. bringing further explanations of the frame of mind that can lead a man to the experience of the higher worlds. A second part is to be added to this first part. lay before me when the great war now being experienced by mankind broke out. he will assume the same position in spiritual schooling as a teacher occupies. Thus I believe I have improved the book wherever I was in a position. Berlin. the printing completed. in conformity with modern views. after ten years. A great deal depends. its seems to me. in any other field of knowledge. September 7. I believe I have sufficiently stressed the fact that the teacher's authority and the pupil's faith in him should play no greater part in spiritual schooling than in any other branch of knowledge or life.

but I have added an appendix in which I have endeavored to explain more clearly the psychological foundations to which the disclosures contained in the book must be traced if they are to be accepted without risk of misunderstanding.Preface to the Edition of May 1918 In working over this new edition I found only minor changes in its substance necessary. I believe that the contents of the appendix will also serve to show many an opponent of anthroposophical spiritual science that his judgment is based upon a misconception of the nature of this spiritual science. Rudolph Steiner 9 . that he does not see what it really is.

Such a training is called occult (esoteric) training. for the secret of initiation can only be understood by those who have to a certain degree experienced this initiation into the higher knowledge of existence. no difference between esoteric knowledge and all the rest of man's knowledge and proficiency. they only can give advice who already possess such powers. and the instruction received therefrom is called occult (esoteric) teaching. are the uninitiated to develop any human interest in this so-called esoteric knowledge? How and why are they to seek for something of whose nature they can form no idea? Such a question is based upon an entirely erroneous conception of the real nature of esoteric knowledge. The one who hears it may very easily be misled into the belief that this training is the concern of a special. As long as the human race has existed there has always been a method of training. This esoteric knowledge is no more of a secret for the average human being than writing is a secret for those who have never learned it. but for the 10 . under these circumstances. it might be publicly imparted and its advantages made accessible to all. I too can learn. The possibility of acquiring the art of writing may be withheld from someone through poverty. Those who have been initiated into the nature of this higher knowledge are not in the least surprised that the uninitiated should so think. in truth. In one respect only do the conditions here differ from those that apply to external knowledge and proficiency. This designation naturally awakens misunderstanding. withholding its knowledge arbitrarily from its fellowcreatures. There is. too. Mystics. for if it were a true knowledge — he is tempted to think — there would be no need of making a secret of it. Theosophists — all speak of a world of soul and spirit which for them is just as real as the world we see with our physical eyes and touch with our physical hands. can all who seek the right way become esoteric students and even teachers. For this purpose.I How Is Knowledge of the Higher Worlds Attained? Conditions There slumber in every human being faculties by means of which he can acquire for himself a knowledge of higher worlds. if I develop within myself certain powers which today still slumber within me. He may even think that nothing of real importance lies behind such knowledge. so. or through the conditions of civilization into which he is born. in the course of which individuals possessing these higher faculties gave instruction to others who were in search of them. of which they speak. privileged class. or spiritual science. There remains only one question — how to set to work to develop such faculties. Gnostics. then. The question may be raised: how. At every moment the listener may say to himself: that. And just as all can learn to write who choose the correct method.

The direction he is to take is traced with unfading. everyone may be certain that initiation will find him under all circumstances if he gives proof of an earnest and worthy endeavor to attain this knowledge. For such people they have a respect which forbids them. the love of an initiate. whoever strives earnestly after higher knowledge will shun no exertion and fear no obstacle in his search for an initiate who can lead him to the higher knowledge of the world. so long as you have not become an initiate yourself. are not competent to receive it into your soul in the right way. there is no obstacle for those who earnestly seek them. everlasting letters in the worlds of the spirit where the initiates guard the higher secrets. You may live in intimate friendship with an initiate. It is a natural law among all initiates to withhold from no man the knowledge that is due him but there is an equally natural law which lays down that no word of esoteric knowledge shall be imparted to anyone not qualified to receive it. In ancient times. He must develop within himself certain faculties to a definite degree. You may enjoy in the fullest sense the heart. Without this attitude no one can become a student. and yet a gap severs you from his essential self. In spiritual science this fundamental attitude is called the path of veneration. Only within his own soul can a man find the means to unseal the lips of an initiate. at the present stage of your evolution. as it were. of devotion to truth and knowledge.attainment of knowledge and proficiency in the higher worlds. because our life has become so unspiritual. You may flatter him. anterior to our history. today. yet he will only confide his knowledge to you when you are ripe for it. to harbor any thought of criticism or 11 . and then the highest treasures of the spirit can become his own. at one place or another. the temples of the spirit were also outwardly visible. and all who seek may find them. And the more strictly he observes these laws. even in the deepest recess of their heart. Now in the first place. The methods by which a student is prepared for the reception of higher knowledge are minutely prescribed. the more perfect is an initiate. strong clasps by which the component parts of this bond are held together. but the two laws here mentioned form. The disposition shown in their childhood by subsequent students of higher knowledge is well known to the experienced in these matters. you may torture him. On the other hand. the masters of higher knowledge in order to receive enlightenment. Many believe that they must seek. He must begin with a certain fundamental attitude of soul. The bond of union embracing all initiates is spiritual and not external. yet they are present spiritually everywhere. they are not to be found in the world visible to external sight. There are children who look up with religious awe to those whom they venerate. nothing can induce him to betray anything to you as long as you.

The student who is gifted with this feeling. Man has certainly the right to turn his eyes to the light. Experience teaches that they can best hold their heads erect who have learnt to venerate where veneration is due. that is. he seeks admittance to higher knowledge. or who is fortunate enough to have had it inculcated in a suitable education. Our civilization tends more toward critical judgment and condemnation than toward devotion and selfless veneration. If we do not develop within ourselves this deeply rooted feeling that there is something higher than ourselves. Similarly. In our time it is especially important that full attention be paid to this point. It is known to all who have learnt a little physics. Rub a glass rod with an appropriate material and it will become electric. it will receive the power of attracting small bodies. lead further on the path of knowledge. To this critical faculty. What was once a childlike veneration for persons becomes. Such children grow up into young men and women who feel happy when they are able to look up to anything that fills them with veneration. disperses the powers of the soul for the attainment of higher knowledge in the same measure that all veneration and reverence develops them. Our children already criticize far more than they worship. Only it must not be thought that this disposition leads to submissiveness and slavery. There is no question here of leveling criticism against it. There are laws in the spiritual life. every adverse judgment passed. a feeling has been manifested within you which may be the germ of your future adherence to the path of knowledge. The initiate has only acquired the strength to lift his head to the heights of knowledge by guiding his heart to the depths of veneration and devotion. felt a religious awe as you pressed on the handle to enter the room which for you is a holy place? If so. Failing such preparation. But every criticism. and veneration is always fitting when it flows from the depths of the heart. on this your first visit. brings a great deal along with him when. later. this self-conscious human 12 . as in the physical life. and have you.opposition. but he must first acquire this right. to create within himself this inner life of devotion. You can only acquire right knowledge when you have learnt to esteem it. sooner or later. by rigorous self-education. we shall never find the strength to evolve to something higher. later in life. From the ranks of such children are recruited many students of higher knowledge. he will encounter difficulties at the very first step. The heights of the spirit can only be climbed by passing through the portals of humility. acquaintance with the first principles of spiritual science shows that every feeling of true devotion harbored in the soul develops a power which may. unless he undertakes. This is in keeping with a law of nature. a veneration for truth and knowledge. It is a blessing for every human being in process of development to have such feelings upon which to build. In this we do not wish to say anything against our civilization. Have you ever paused outside the door of some venerated person.

Man has it in his power to perfect himself and. If I meet a man and blame him for his shortcomings. the one thing that everyone must acknowledge is the difficulty for those involved in the external civilization of our time to advance to the knowledge of the higher worlds. At a time when the conditions of material life were simpler. other feelings take the place of veneration. Whoever seeks higher knowledge must create it for himself. of adverse criticism. wishes to become a student of higher knowledge must assiduously cultivate this inner life of devotion. The spiritually experienced know how much they owe to the circumstance that in face of all things they ever again turn to the good. respect. therefore. it can only be done through life. in time. I must have this respect in my thoughts. He must instill it into his soul. He must be wary of thoughts of disrespect.judgment. and he must endeavor straightaway to cultivate thoughts of devotion. but if I try to enter lovingly into his merits. and wonder. disparaging and critical judgement of the world and of life. But this transformation must take place in his innermost self. had he not applied to all things the standard of his critical judgment. existing in his consciousness. so that they can only be conveyed to man through his every-day life in a very small degree. The student must begin by absorbing this devotion into this thought-life. But this must not remain an external rule of life. I rob myself of power to attain higher knowledge. completely to transform himself. I gather such power. every such moment brings us nearer to higher knowledge. But what we have thereby gained in external culture we have had to pay for with a corresponding loss of higher knowledge of spiritual life. It cannot be done by study. Objects of veneration and worship stood out in clearer relief from the ordinary things of the world. Our own age thrusts these feelings further and further into the background. It is not enough that I show respect only in my outward bearing. The student must continually be intent upon following this advice. Everywhere in his environment and his experiences he must seek motives of admiration and homage. It is well known to those experienced in these 13 . the industry. this “test all things and hold fast what is best. in his thought-life. Whoever. the attainment of spiritual knowledge was also easier. Man could never have attained to the science. respect and veneration for the world and for life. and withhold adverse judgement. Every moment that we set ourselves to discover in our consciousness whatever there remains in it of adverse. It must be emphasized that higher knowledge is not concerned with the veneration of persons but the veneration of truth and knowledge. adoration. rather it must take possession of our innermost soul. They can only do so if they work energetically at themselves. Now. the rights relationships of our time. In an epoch of criticism ideals are lowered. And we rise rapidly when we fill our consciousness in such moments with thoughts evoking in us admiration. the commerce.” we owe the greatness of our civilization.

Just as the sun's rays vivify everything living. all exert a paralyzing and withering effect on this faculty of cognition. here it is intended to give some practical details. as they may be called. In so thinking we do not bear in mind that it is the soul which exercises the faculty of cognition. No change need be noticed in the student. A human being standing before him now presents a new and different aspect. (In the last chapter of his book Theosophy. who constantly seeks distraction. and to develop instead a vivid inner life. Certain spiritual colorings. If we give the body stones in place of bread. antipathy. he attends to his business as before. because for this still higher training is necessary. Of course. Disrespect. Veneration. this rule of life alone will not yet enable him to see. its activity will cease. for instance. homage. especially strong for the activity of cognition. to believe that feelings like reverence and respect have anything to do with cognition. A soul which harbors feelings of reverence and devotion produces a change in its aura. underestimation of what deserves recognition. it receives intelligence of facts in its environment of which it had hitherto no idea. At first his entire inner life is flooded by this basic feeling of devotion for everything which is truly venerable. Reverence awakens in the soul a sympathetic power through which we attract qualities in the beings around us. But he can rise to this higher training if he has previously undergone a rigorous training in devotion. A person who darts from one impression of the outer world to another. at first. the author describes fully the Path of Knowledge. For the spiritually experienced this fact is visible in the aura. His entire soul-life finds in this fundamental feeling its pivot. vanish and are replaced by blue-red tints. cannot find 14 . He begins to see things around him which he could not have seen before. devotion are like nutriment making it healthy and strong. It is not easy. He begins to understand that hitherto he had only seen a part of the world around him. This consists in giving oneself up less and less to impressions of the outer world.matters that in every such moment powers are awakened which otherwise remain dormant. so does reverence in the student vivify all feelings of the soul. Thereby the cognitional faculty is ripened. and feelings are for the soul what food is for the body. In this way the spiritual eyes of man are opened. He performs his duties as hitherto. which would otherwise remain concealed. yellow-red and brown-red in tone. what is described as the human aura. It is the same with the soul. The power obtained through devotion can be rendered still more effective when the life of feeling is enriched by yet another quality.) Noiseless and unnoticed by the outer world is the treading of the Path of Knowledge. The transformation goes on only in the inner part of the soul hidden from outward sight. This is due to the fact that we are inclined to set cognition aside as a faculty by itself — one that stands in no relation to what otherwise occurs in the soul.

but in order that he may devote his learning to the service of the world. but while lending himself to its impressions. Yet if he stops short at the enjoyment he shuts himself up within himself. This would result in the contrary of what is intended. it is very easy to fall into the opposite habit of trying to exploit the enjoyment. At such silent moments every flower. One person sails across the ocean. but rather to renounce any further enjoyment. However much he may live within himself. quietly and alone. He must pass through a host of tempters of his soul. however intensely he may cultivate his ego — the world will reject him. every animal. And thus he will prepare himself to receive quite new impressions of the outer world through quite different eyes. He should rather let his experiences and the messages from the outer world re-echo within his own completely silent self. every action will unveil to him secrets undreamt of. To the world he is dead. The desire to enjoy impression after impression merely blunts the faculty of cognition. and work upon the past experience. for only through enjoyment can the outer world reach him. but once instructed by enjoyment. the traveler with depth of soul and wealth of feeling has different experiences from one who is poor in feeling. Instead of working inwardly. Let no one underestimate the fact that immense sources of error here confront the student.the way to higher knowledge. Only what we experience within ourselves unlocks for us the beauties of the outer world. The student must not blunt himself to the outer world. He does not learn in order to accumulate learning as his own treasure. for him are unveiled the mysterious riddles of existence. he should be directed by his rich inner life. The outer world with all its phenomena is filled with splendor. Enjoyment is to him like a scout informing him about the world. He will only be something to himself and nothing to the world. as it were. the latter. We must learn to remain in touch with our own feelings and ideas if we wish to develop any intimate relationship with the outer world. The student is told to set apart moments in his daily life in which to withdraw into himself. is nurtured and cultivated if the enjoyment once experienced is allowed to revel its message. If he blunts himself to enjoyment he is like a plant which cannot any longer draw nourishment from its environment. The peril here is very great. and only a few inward experiences pass through his soul. The student of higher knowledge considers enjoyment only as a means of ennobling himself for the world. however. another will hear the eternal language of the cosmic spirit. 15 . Thus the student must accustom himself not merely to let the enjoyment reverberate. He is not to occupy himself at such moments with the affairs of his own ego. he passes on to work. When passing through a beautiful mountain district. He should rather open it wide to all the world. It is necessary that he should seek enjoyment. but we must have experienced the divine within ourselves before we can hope to discover it in our environment. They would all harden his ego and imprison it within itself.

These practical rules have no arbitrary origin. He would not tamper with anyone's independence. every idea which becomes your ideal creates within you lifeforces. It is this: Adapt each one of your actions. is due to circumstances which need not be dwelt upon here. clasps by which the component parts of this bond are held together. The recognition that all true teachers of the spiritual life are permeated through and through with this principle will convince all who follow the practical rules proffered to them that they need sacrifice none of their independence. This law must be strictly observed. Inner Tranquility At the very beginning of his course. It was stated in the preceding pages that the bond of union embracing all initiates is spiritual. and in these moments learn to distinguish between the essential and the 16 . but all knowledge pursued for growth to ripeness within the process of human ennoblement and cosmic development brings you a step forward. They rest upon ancient experience and ancient wisdom.In all spiritual science there is a fundamental principle which cannot be transgressed without sacrificing success. and it should be impressed on the student in every form of esoteric training. wheresoever the ways to higher knowledge are indicated. he must immediately take a third law into account. This truth can be expressed in the following short sentence: Every idea which does not become your ideal slays a force in your soul. This difference. and that two laws form. which is of a minor character and is more apparent than real. and frame each one of your words in such a way that you infringe upon no one's free-will. and no student is genuine until he has adopted it as a guide for his whole life. even though they do not always clothe them in the same words. It runs as follows: All knowledge pursued merely for the enrichment of personal learning and the accumulation of personal treasure leads you away from the path. One of the first of these rules can be expressed somewhat in the following words of our language: Provide for yourself moments of inner tranquility. Indeed. Spiritual science now also gives him practical rules by observing which he may tread that path and develop that inner life. and are given out in the same manner. none respect and cherish human independence more than the spiritually experienced. All true teachers of the spiritual life are in agreement as to the substance of these rules. as it were. the student is directed to the path of veneration and the development of the inner life. Whenever the initiate leaves his enclosed spiritual sphere and steps forth before the world. No teacher of the spiritual life wishes to establish a mastery over other persons by means of such rules.

when sought in the right way. Nor must it be supposed that the observance of this rule will really encroach upon the time needed for the performance of his duties. also. But this does not mean that what he does in the time thus set apart has no connection with his daily work. be explained without digression. and he must adopt such a position that he may regard all his sundry experiences from a higher point of view. Our aim in these moments of seclusion must be so to contemplate and judge our own actions and experiences as though they applied not to ourselves but to some other person. is the above rule concerning moments of inner tranquility. His joys and sorrows. Suppose. simple. This attitude cannot be blamed as unjustifiable. five minutes a day will suffice. and applies equally to exceptional circumstances and to the daily affairs of life. This understanding is dependent on the first steps toward higher knowledge. During these periods the student should wrest himself entirely free from his work-a-day life. His thoughts and feelings should take on a different coloring. It all depends on the manner in which these five minutes are spent. the path stands open to tread. The student must set aside a small part of his daily life in which to concern himself with something quite different from the objects of his daily occupation. in itself.non-essential. for we are interwoven with our own actions and experiences. For all who earnestly will. it is part of human nature. his cares. we regard the experiences and actions of others quite differently from our own. On the contrary. in truth. a heavy misfortune befalls us. Should anyone really have no more time at his disposal. whereas those of others we only contemplate. in ordinary life. This cannot be otherwise. It is said advisedly: “expressed in the words of our language. He must stand before himself with the inner tranquility of a judge.” Originally all rules and teachings of spiritual science were expressed in a symbolical sign-language. The student must seek the power of confronting himself. and these steps result from the exact observation of such rules as are here given. How this rule is to be observed will. some understanding of which must be acquired before its whole meaning and scope can be realized. equally simple is its observation. our 17 . in which he occupies himself at such a time must differ entirely from the way in which he performs the rest of his daily duties. When this is attained. at certain times. experiences and actions must pass in review before his soul. for example. as a stranger. he will soon find that just these secluded moments. We need only bear in mind how. But it only achieves its purpose when it is observed in as earnest and strict a manner as it is. therefore. Simple. The way. How different would be our attitude toward a similar misfortune had it befallen our neighbor. give him full power to perform his daily task[s].

He would say: “Oh. If we attain the calm inner survey.own experiences present themselves in a new light. so long as he does not feel within himself the fruits of this inner tranquility. and experiences as before. He performs his duties and. Formerly he may have approached some occupation in a fainthearted way. And each human being can himself alone awaken this higher being within himself. By thus advancing he will gradually become more and more his own guide. As long as we are interwoven with them and stand. He will soon discover how great a source of strength is available to him in these moments thus set apart. and leading to supersensible knowledge. The student must resolve to persevere in the strict and earnest observation of the rule here given. at first. and allow himself less and less to be led by circumstances and external influences. It is as though we had spent the whole day in a place where we beheld the smallest objects at the same close range as the largest. within them. Sorrow and joy. I lack the power to do this as well as 18 . the higher faculties slumbering in every human being. we cling to the non-essential just as much as to the essential. In no way can it estrange him from life. For every human being bears a higher man within himself besides what we may call the work-a-day man. The value of such inner tranquil self-contemplation depends far less on what is actually contemplated than on our finding within ourselves the power which such inner tranquility develops. he will attain firm assurance in all his actions. as it were. having gained a higher life in the moments set apart. He acquires a new outlook on life. the essential is severed from the non-essential. In his whole being he will grow calmer. and a new world will be revealed to an organ of sight of whose presence within them they were never aware. and in the evening climbed a neighboring hill and surveyed the whole scene at a glance. Then the various parts appear related to each other in different proportions from those they bore when seen from within. he can rather devote himself the more thoroughly to this life for the remainder of the day. appear different when we confront ourselves in this way. every thought. As long as this higher being is not awakened. feels the same joys. And no change need take place in the outward life of the student in consequence of this new rule. sorrows. and cease to be put out of countenance by all manner of incidents. He will begin no longer to get angry at things which formerly annoyed him. will remain concealed. The tranquility of the moments set apart will also affect everyday existence. every resolve. Little by little this higher life will make its influence felt on his ordinary life. countless things he formerly feared cease to alarm him. To all who thus persevere the day will come when spiritual light will envelop them. This exercise will not and need not succeed with present occurrences of destiny. This higher man remains hidden until he is awakened. but it should be attempted by the student in connection with the events of destiny already experienced in the past.

flows into the student's outlook. Now. The impatience that was about to make itself felt vanishes. and that in any case it cannot contribute to the improvement of his work. Outward circumstances can only alter the course of his outward life. which can be made while waiting. They assist the growth of the inner man. They take the place of those that had a hampering. and. We easily become impatient when we are kept waiting. Henceforth he says to himself: “I will summon all my strength to do my work as well as I possibly can. instead of mastering this outward life. each fraught with advantage to his whole life. the scope and significance of these facts must be realized.” Now this thought does not occur to him. The waves of outward life constrain the inner man from all sides if. As long as the outer man has the upper hand and control.I could wish. The student must himself give birth to a new and higher man within himself. whereas it was formerly battered to and fro by these waves. this inner man is his slave and 19 . But only the state of calm and serenity here described renders an orderly development possible. this feeling is immediately present within us. he is able — before the word has found its way to his inner self — to take from it the sting which gives it the power to wound or vex. they can never awaken the inner spiritual man. No outward forces can supply space to the inner man. Such a man is like a plant which tries to expand in a cleft in the rock and is stunted in growth until new space is given it. and an interval which would otherwise have been wasted in expressions of impatience will be filled by useful observations.” And he suppresses the thought which makes him faint-hearted. And thus thought after thought. We must bear in mind that the higher man within us is in constant development. on every occasion of impatience. This higher man now becomes the inner ruler who directs the circumstances of the outer man with sure guidance. those faculties also grow which lead to higher knowledge. It can only be supplied by the inner calm which man himself gives to his soul. it masters him. for he knows that this very thought might be the cause of a worse performance on his part. but rather a quite different thought. He begins to steer his own ship on a secure course through the waves of life. Take another example. Thus he may hear a word spoken with the object of wounding or vexing him. This calm and serenity react on the whole being. but — if we tread the path to higher knowledge — we so steep ourselves in our moments of calm with the feeling of the uselessness of impatience that henceforth. Formerly it would indeed have wounded or vexed him. weakening effect. but now that he treads the path to higher knowledge. with the inner man. For it is by his progress in this direction that the student gradually reaches the point where he himself determines the manner in which the impressions of the outer world shall affect him.

He must develop a living feeling for this silent thought-activity. but many of those who did not despair. In this way something begins to live within him which ranges above the purely personal. I have not yet found the ruler within myself. which no longer has anything to do with his own special situation. No doubt a great effort is required in many stations of life to provide these moments of inner calm. And thus he begins to feel and realize. as a complete stranger. He puts away everything that reminds him of such impressions from without. that he belongs to those higher worlds. even if he lived under quite different circumstances and in quite a different situation. All around him there is silence. He listens to the voices within him which speak to him in his moments of tranquility. — Such tranquil contemplation must become a natural necessity in the life of the student. Many have striven for years without noticing any appreciable progress. In spiritual science everything depends upon energy. and uncompromising sincerity with which we confront our own selves. And only in as far as the student earnestly seeks this power can he reach the goal. the more important is the achievement. I am not master of myself. If it depends on something other than myself whether I should get angry or not. These are worlds concerning which his senses and his daily occupation can tell him nothing. Even if he confronts himself as a stranger it is only himself that he contemplates. to put it better. but the greater the effort needed. He begins to deal with his thoughts as with things in space. Something else is needed in addition. then only do I become in the real sense a student. He must pass on to the contemplation of those things which would concern him as a human being. have then quite suddenly achieved the inner victory. as an inner experience. but remained unshaken. But only one side of the student's inner activity is characterized by this birth of his own higher being. He is now plunged in a world of thought. It is of no importance how far anyone can go in a given time. he cultivates an intercourse with the spiritual world. inward truthfulness. or. I must develop the faculty of letting the impressions of the outer world approach me only in the way in which I myself determine. His gaze is directed to worlds higher than those with which every-day life connects him. Thus he now shifts the central point of his being to the inner part of his nature.therefore cannot unfold his powers. He must learn to love what the spirit pours into him. He is removed from the every-day world. and the moment approaches 20 . he looks on those experiences and actions with which he is connected through his particular station of life. He must now disengage himself from it and rise beyond to a purely human level. with all our deeds and actions. Calm inward contemplation and converse with the purely spiritual world fill his soul. the point is that he should earnestly seek. Its noise is silenced. He will soon cease to feel that this thought-world is less real than the every-day things which surround him.

now it resounds through his soul. and he will be helped in this if he does not cling blindly to the thoughts that rise within him. An inner light is shed over the whole external world. he comes to his daily activities with a new. But the student in such moments must not merely indulge in feelings. Through such meditation a complete transformation takes place in the student. speech becomes audible to him. No matter what it may bring him. Rather must he permeate himself with the lofty thoughts by which men already advanced and possessed of the spirit were inspired at such moments. This life of the soul in thought. is called by Gnosis. cosmic whole. and in them the material for his meditation. but that through them hidden beings speak to him. and a second life begins for him. This moment. Through his being there pours a divine stream from a world of divine rapture. which gradually widens into a life in spiritual being. Meditation (contemplative reflection). but strength to live springs from meditation. The seekers of the spirit have themselves set down in such writings the thoughts of the divine science which the Spirit has directed his messengers to proclaim to the world. In the mystic. but now he knows. is one of greatest rapture for the student. All things acquire a fresh value for him. This meditation is the means to supersensible knowledge. fuller power. He should start with the writings which themselves had their origin in just such revelation during meditation. When once this connection is revealed to him in his moments of contemplation. Formerly sound only reached him through his ear. With firm step the student passes through life. It is obvious that such meditation leads more surely to the goal if conducted under the direction of experienced 21 . when first experienced. an inner word is revealed to him. His thoughts must be clear. he goes forward erect. he must not have indefinite sensations in his soul. gnostic and spiritual scientific literature of today the student will find such writings. much more real. That would only hinder him from reaching true spiritual knowledge. In the past he knew not why he labored and suffered. sharp and definite. For now he knows that his labor and his suffering are given and endured for the sake of a great. Out of the silence.when he begins to feel that which reveals itself in the silent inward thought-work to be much higher. the most insignificant experience which offers itself to him. for he comes to realize that the most insignificant action he has to accomplish. He will in no way be estranged from his daily tasks and duties. An inner language. Not weariness. spiritual. It cannot be repeated too often that this transformation does not alienate him from the world. than the things in space. He sees that his thoughts do not merely harbor shadow-pictures. and by Spiritual Science. He discovers that something living expresses itself in this thought-world. He begins to form quite new conceptions of reality. stands in connection with cosmic beings and cosmic events.

Everyone can attain this knowledge. a man rises to union with the spirit. and of kindling the spiritual light. Only the right means must be chosen. this establishes intercourse with the higher spiritual beings. The existence of this eternal being can only be doubted by those who have not themselves experienced it. which is limited by neither birth nor death. Thus meditation is the way which also leads man to the knowledge. he brings to life the eternal in him. When. in each one of us lies the faculty of recognizing and contemplating for ourselves what genuine Mysticism. this kindles the spiritual light. and it is only through meditation that man can attain to such knowledge. only they must realize that what they seek is the advice of a friend. but rather: How can we attain such knowledge? In right meditation the path is opened. and that nothing is further from their nature than what is called the lust for power. by means of meditation. not the domination of a would-be ruler. and Gnosis teach. nor can the eye perceive if the light which makes things visible is wanting. Spiritual Science. The question is often asked: Why does a man know nothing of his experiences beyond the borders of life and death? Not thus should we ask. This alone can revive the memory of experiences beyond the border of life and death. Truly. to the contemplation of his eternal. indestructible. Anthroposophy. Spiritual Science gives the means of developing the spiritual ears and eyes. and their advice and guidance should be sought. Gnosis and Spiritual Science tell of the eternal nature of this being and of its reincarnation. All who apply to those possessing knowledge and experience in these matters will never apply in vain. no one loses his freedom thereby. What would otherwise be mere uncertain groping in the dark becomes under this direction purposeful work. essential being.persons who know of themselves how everything may best be done. and this method of spiritual training: (1) Preparation. 22 . this develops the spiritual senses. It will always be found that they who really know are the most modest of men. Only a being with ears and eyes can apprehend sounds and colors. (2) Enlightenment. (3) Initiation.

enlightenment must be completed before it is even possible to enter upon the stage of initiation. It refers to the three stages through which the training of the spiritual life leads to a certain degree of initiation. wherever he turns his eyes and on every 23 . that the three stages be made to follow in order. Preparation Preparation consists in a strict and definite cultivation of the life of thought and feeling. devoid of earnest perseverance. (3) initiation. (2) enlightenment. and flourishing. life that is budding. for the sake of clarity. are as follows: (1) preparation. The student can observe these events simultaneously. in turn. and on the other hand. But in describing them it is necessary. These exercises bear about the same relation to what will be imparted in the following pages. the attention of the soul is directed to certain events in the world that surrounds us. Certain exercises enable the soul to attain to a conscious intercourse with the spiritual world. In certain respects it is possible to partake of enlightenment. But only so much will here be explained as can be publicly imparted. be completed before the third be started. decaying. and. as the instruction given in a higher strictly disciplined school bears to the incidental training. on the one hand. and on the basis of this proceed further.II The Stages of Initiation The information given in the following chapters constitutes steps in an esoteric training. It is not altogether necessary that the first of these three stages should be completed before the second can be begun. To begin with. and withering. at least in some respects. can lead to nothing at all. through which the psycho-spiritual body becomes equipped with higher senses and organs of activity in the same way that natural forces have fitted the physical body with organs built out of indeterminate living matter. Such events are. all phenomena connected with fading. and in other respects still be in the preparatory stage. The study of Spiritual Science can only be successful if the student retain what has already been indicated in the preceding chapter. The three stages which the above-mentioned tradition specifies. and even of initiation. nor that the second. growing. These are merely indications extracted from a still deeper and more intimate doctrine. Yet it will be necessary to spend a certain time in the stage of preparation before any enlightenment can begin. In esoteric training itself a quite definite course of instruction is followed. the name and character of which will be understood by all who apply this information in the right way. But impatient dabbling.

blossoming and flourishing. but in ordinary circumstances he does not devote himself sufficiently to them. Growth and decay are no longer facts which make indefinite impressions on him as of old. Wherever he observes a definite kind of blooming and flourishing. Thoughts and feelings of a new kind and unknown before will be noticed uprising in the soul. the following experience will ensue. the more often the attention be fixed alternately upon something growing. would merely have flitted through his soul. now swells out and assumes a powerful and energetic form. It is necessary. Indeed. A new world is opened to the student if he systematically and deliberately surrenders himself to such feelings. It is possible to describe approximately what these feelings are like. The soul-world. take possession of you. Yet it must not be thought that much progress can be made if the senses are blunted to the world. but rather they form themselves into spiritual lines and figures of 24 . to the slow rising of the moon on the horizon. He must now allow this feeling to reverberate quietly within himself while keeping inwardly quite still. then only let the feeling which expands to life. then. the more vivid will these feelings become. and the thought which arises in the soul. Both these feelings are forces which. He will soon convince himself that a feeling which heretofore in a similar case. If the necessary tranquility be attained and you surrender yourself to the feeling which expands to life in the soul. so will the organs of clairvoyance build themselves out of the feelings and thoughts thus evoked. for a short time. therefore. He must cut himself off from the outer world. If the attention be frequently fixed on the phenomena of growing. while the phenomena of fading and decaying will produce an experience comparable. and another equally definite with all that is fading and decaying. blooming and flourishing. A quite definite form of feeling is connected with growth and expansion. and entirely surrender himself.occasion they naturally evoke in him feelings and thoughts. begins to dawn upon him. and simply and solely follow what his soul tells him of this blossoming and flourishing. And just as the eyes and ears of the physical body are built by natural forces out of living matter. to this one impression. in due time. The point is that the attention should be directed with perfect inner balance upon both phenomena. when duly cultivated and developed to ever increasing intensity. But this is only the case if the effort be made to cultivate these feelings in the way indicated. in the same way. and upon something else that is fading and decaying. the so-called astral plane. A full conception of them is within the reach of all who undergo these inner experiences. He hurries on too quickly from impression to impression. that he should fix his attention intently and consciously upon these phenomena. lead to the most significant spiritual results. a feeling remotely allied to the sensation of a sunrise will ensue. First look at the things as keenly and as intently as you possibly can. he must banish everything else from his soul.

The soul world (astral plane) broadens out slowly before him. however. forms the best preliminary condition for the development of spiritual faculties. A blooming flower. different forms. the same spiritual figure is presented to the soul. so too. Just as a round table will be seen as round by two normal persons. and not as round by one and square by the other. a tree that is decaying. he will not believe that a wrong thought in his mind may have as devastating an effect upon other thoughts that spread life in the thought world as the effect wrought by a bullet fired at random upon the physical objects it hits. In the soul and thought world. He should not try to make out. This is attained when the student is permeated. the spiritual scientist describes or draws the spiritual forms of the process of growth and decay. Such intellectualizing will only draw him away from the right road. Two students who have reached the corresponding stage of development will always see the same lines and figures under the same conditions. healthy senses and quickened power of observation. and in so doing touches their secrets. He should look out on the world with keen. It should be emphasized that the student must never lose himself in speculations on the meaning of one thing or another. so too. on the path to higher 25 . And these lines and figures have. evoke in his soul different lines. And just as the forms of animals and plants are described in ordinary natural history. feelings and thoughts react upon each other just as do physical objects in the physical world. an animal in the process of growth. according to species and kind. There can be no progress. but rather allow the things to disclose themselves. he is then not far from the stage where he will behold things which have no physical existence. when coupled with a quiet introspective nature. and which therefore remain entirely hidden (occult) from those who have not received suitable instruction and training. though he will not shrink from harboring wrong thoughts and feelings. through and through. with the conscious realization that feelings and thoughts are just as much veritable realities as are tables and chairs in the world of the physical senses. These lines and figures are in no sense arbitrary. the meaning of things. and then give himself up to the feeling that arises within him. As long as the student is not vividly permeated with this consciousness. through intellectual speculation. This feeling pierces through the superficial aspect of things. for the different phenomena. at the sight of a flower.which he had previously suspected nothing. If the student has progressed so far that he can perceive the spiritual forms of those phenomena which are physically visible to his external sight. for these appear harmless to the rest of the world. He will perhaps never allow himself to perform a physically visible action which he considers to be wrong. It should be remarked that artistic feeling. A further point of importance is what spiritual science calls orientation in the higher worlds.

as it were. whether of pleasure or pain. the student will develop within himself the faculty of intermingling. All arbitrary flitting to and fro in thought. there appear significant emotions and thoughts that are fruitful. In the place of petty emotionalism and capricious flights of thought. Just as he. He gains a right position in relation to the things of the spiritual world. On the contrary. so. It is with the latter kind of sound that the student sets to work. The student must learn to feel in this way in the face of the whole of nature. all accidental ebbing and flowing of emotion must be forbidden in the same way. and his soul must be filled with whatever is occurring in the being from which the sound proceeds. but when we hear the cry of an animal. Through her 26 . if we regulate our inner life in this way. we do not attempt to dash right through it. we shall soon find ourselves becoming rich in feelings and creative with genuine imagination. too. He must get beyond the point of caring whether. of withering and decaying in a way that is necessary for his own and the world's advancement. as a physical man. with the being from which the sound proceeds. he follows all processes of growing and flourishing and. If we see a wall before us. finds his way among physical things. but no one should suppose that a mere sense for music can take the place of this inner activity. There are such laws. A person sensitive to music will find it easier than one who is unmusical to cultivate his inner life in this way. we hear the sound and connect a pleasant feeling with it.) When a bell is struck. agreeable or disagreeable. besides our own feeling. or a falling mass. On the one hand. In other words. This can be attained if we forbid ourselves to harbor wrong thoughts and feelings. a distinct and definite result comes into effect in his favor. He must discriminate between sounds that are produced by the so-called inert (lifeless) bodies. detect through it the manifestation of an inward experience of the animal. but turn aside. his path now leads him between growth and decay. In so doing we do not become deficient in feeling. Feelings and thoughts of this kind lead the student to orientation in the spiritual world. a bell. we can. This implants a new faculty in his world of thought and feeling. Through such exercises. The student has also to bestow a further care on the world of sound. we guide ourselves by the laws of the physical world. if systematically and deliberately performed. He must closely unite his own feeling with the pleasure or pain of which the sound tells him. for him. and those which proceed from a living creature (an animal or a human being. They must flow out of the life of the soul itself. for instance.knowledge unless we guard our thoughts and feelings in just the same way we guard out steps in the physical world. the sound is pleasant or unpleasant. which he has already come to know in the way described above. or a musical instrument. He must immerse himself in this foreign thing. too. on the other. for the soul and thought world. He must concentrate his whole attention on the fact that the sound tells him of something that lies outside his own soul. only they cannot impose themselves on us from without.

He must listen. not only all purely intellectual judgment be silenced. to blend himself with the being of another and become identified with it. at the same time. completely shutting down his own person and his opinions and way of feeling. he now is aware of a new language of the soul. he then learns. denial. The student can thus train himself to listen to the words of others quite selflessly. It is not imperative that he should suddenly alter his way of living by trying to attain at all times to this complete inner silence. He must accustom himself to do this in such a way that. for even the wisest can learn incalculably much from children. far beneath him. even when a completely contradictory opinion is advanced. sound becomes the right medium for the perception of soul and spirit. in some respects. of their dissent. the whole of nature begins to whisper her secrets to the student. Through continued exercise of this kind. stir in the inner self of the listener. And whereas hitherto he only heard sound from the so-called inanimate objects. assent or dissent will.resounding tones. as of itself. deliberately selected by himself. for example. and yet while doing so suppress every feeling of greater knowledge or superiority. bring entirely to silence all assent. and more especially. In spiritual research this is systematically practiced. to the statements of people who are. The student must at all times be particularly watchful lest such feelings. the soul develops a new sense of hearing. To this. Then he hears through the words into the soul of the other. even when not on the surface. Of course it implies the very strictest self-discipline. When he practices listening without criticism. Should he advance further in this inner culture. all adverse criticism. dealing with the sounds of nature. when the most hopeless mistake is committed before him. He will have to begin by doing so in special cases. or even assent. he will soon learn that he can hear what hitherto he did not even surmise. one thing more must be added before the highest point in this region can be attained. The point is that in so doing. while listening. Many people in such cases feel themselves impelled to an expression of their assent. all such assent or dissent must be silenced. She is now able to perceive manifestations from the spiritual world which do not find their expression 27 . this new way of listening will creep into his habits. It is useful for everyone to listen in this way to children. at certain times to the most contradictory views and. should still lurk in the innermost recess of the soul. his inner self is absolutely silent. by way of practice. Then quite slowly and by degrees. If someone expresses an opinion and another listens. but the latter leads to a high goal. Of very great importance for the development of the student is the way in which he listens to others when they speak. He begins to hear with the soul. In the student. or more especially. but also all feelings of displeasure. When these exercises are practiced in connection with the other already given. little by little. What was hitherto merely incomprehensible noise to his soul becomes by this means a coherent language of nature. The student feels it his duty to listen. generally speaking.

Gradually truths reveal themselves to the student from the spiritual world. To the practice of all that has here been indicated must be added the ardent study of what the spiritual researchers impart to the world. for instance. Every sentence of spiritual science we hear is of a nature to direct the mind to the point which must be reached before the soul can experience real progress. to direct his whole attention to a comparison of the stone with the animal in the following manner. On the contrary. no other feeling. must mingle with them and disturb what should be an intensely attentive observation. The thoughts here mentioned should pass through his soul accompanied by vivid feelings. Only to those who. powers are at work in your soul which make you clairvoyant. it is a matter of developing certain feelings and thoughts which slumber in every human being and must be awakened. from the living inwardly instilled speech. and an animal. But this does not mean that it is unimportant for us to acquaint ourselves with the writings of spiritual science before we can ourselves hear such inwardly instilled speech. The student says to himself: “The stone has a form. The stone remains motionless in its place. just as natural forces have created out of living matter your eyes and your ears. they are themselves gifted with spiritual life. The student should endeavor. The perception of the “inner word” awakens. And while you follow the words of one who knows. For since these instructions are culled from the living inner word. He hears speech uttered to him in a spiritual way. the beings of the spiritual world remain silent. they are living powers. the reading of such writings and the listening to the teachings of spiritual science are themselves means of attaining personal knowledge. The first step is taken by observing different natural objects in a particular way. The 28 . Enlightenment Enlightenment proceeds from very simple processes. while you read a book that springs from real inner experience. They are not mere words. It is only when these simple processes are carried out with unfailing patience. continuously and conscientiously. a transparent and beautifully formed stone (a crystal). All higher truths are attained through such inwardly instilled speech. train themselves to be really receptive from within. and what we hear from the lips of a true spiritual teacher has been experienced by him in this manner. the animal also has a form. at first. too. and all other methods will prove ineffective if due receptivity for the teachings of the spiritual researcher is lacking. that they can lead to the perception of the inner lightforms. a plant. by selfless listening. As long as one hurls any personal opinion or feeling against the speaker to whom one must listen. In all esoteric training such study belongs to the preparatory period.in sounds perceptible to the physical ear. unmoved by personal opinion or feeling only to such can the higher beings speak of whom spiritual science tells. Here. and no other thought. in stillness.

animal changes its place. In reality. Here it must also be noted that the words “dark” and “light. but in accordance with desireless force. The color proceeding the plant is green which little by little turns into a light ethereal pink. as blue. At first the feelings are only present as long as the observation lasts. is in many ways distorted by those who have only heard of it in an outward. Only. It is instinct (desire) which causes the animal to change its place. but who have their colors. The students gradually learns. and then they grow to something which remains living in the soul. but they never form the subject of genuine esoteric teaching. this exercise must be practiced over and over again. This cannot be otherwise if ordinary language is used. exoteric manner. Out of these feelings and the thoughts that are bound up with them. colors of a spiritual kind are seen. From the stone there flows into the soul the one kind of feeling. and both feelings will always arise. and from the animal the other kind. are served by the form of the animal. The plant is actually that product of nature which in higher worlds resembles. The student has then but to reflect. in certain respects. If the plant should then be included in this observation. plant and animal kingdom. Its organs and limbs are fashioned in accordance with these instincts. to see something like soul and spirit colors. even without the contemplation of an external object. Instincts. in both quality and degree.” (The fact here mentioned. in its bearing on the contemplation of crystals. too. Later on they continue. it will be noticed that the feeling flowing from it lies between the feelings derived from the stone and the animal. every animal has its own particular shade of color. The organs thus formed are spiritual eyes. flows from the stone. with genuine and patient practice. and in this way such practices as crystal-gazing have their origin Such manipulations are based on a misunderstanding. but little by little. all possible intermediate shades are present. these feelings ensue. and while doing so. by their means. They have been described in many books. there arise in the soul two quite separate kinds of feelings. The same does not apply to the stone and the animal. or blue-red. The attempt will probably not succeed at first.) By sinking deeply into such thoughts. for clairvoyant organs. only approximately describe what is meant. Every stone. The form of the stone is not fashioned in accordance with desires. the organs of clairvoyance are formed. Spiritual science describes that which. observing the stone and the animal with rapt attention. It must now be clearly understood that the above-mentioned colors only represent the principal shades in the stone. In reality. often 29 . through enlightenment this world becomes light. and that which is felt as coming from the animal as red or red-yellow. for this language was created to suit physical conditions. In addition to these there are also the beings of the higher worlds who never incarnate physically.” as well as the other expressions used. its constitution in the physical world. The spiritual world with its lines and figures remains dark as long as he has only attained what has been described as preparation. every plant.

often horrible. after enlightenment. Only so much is here imparted as accords with this possibility. leading to initiation--with these things the following chapters will deal. No harm can come to anyone following the way here described. But it is inadvisable to proceed further without paying careful heed to what is said or otherwise imparted by the spiritual researcher. or his receptivity for all physical reality. the student must take care always to enlarge his sympathy for the animal and the human worlds. in the sense of the foregoing exercises. Moreover. and the animal. and that could only lead to perilous results. If this point has been reached. one then encounters sooner or later the beings here mentioned. Once the faculty of seeing with spiritual eyes has been acquired. To give an example: during the elementary exercises on enlightenment. and many dangerous and even despicable practices are attempted. if a man has the strength and the endurance to travel so far that he fulfills the elementary conditions of enlightenment. attention paid to such experienced guidance is the very best thing. up to man. some of them higher. one thing should be noted: no student should spend more time and strength upon these exercises than he can spare with due 30 . It is sought in many ways. failing which it were better to leave untrodden all steps on the path to higher knowledge. throughout his training he must continually increase his moral strength. he will assuredly seek and find the right guidance. And for that. Failing this care. and the senses blunted. some lower than man himself--beings that never enter physical reality. Only. But in any circumstances. How enlightenment proceeds if the student rises. It is necessary that something of the truth should become known. under all circumstances the union of the soul with the spiritual world is effected. In our time the path to spiritual science is sought by many. the wealth of color in these higher worlds is immeasurably greater than in the physical world. Indeed. so long as he does not force matters.wonderful. such exercises would continually blunt that feeling and that sense. in as far as they can and may do so. the plant. the way to a great deal lies open. his inner purity. It is for this reason that they who claim to know something of the truth in these matters place before others the possibility of learning something of esoteric training. from the stone. and how. Indeed. in order to prevent error causing great harm. and his sense for the beauty of nature. one precaution is necessary. It is necessary that the student should lose none of his qualities as a good and noble man. too. which has been described. and his power of observation. the heart would become hardened.

He loses courage. as we know. And even when the first experiences begin to dawn upon the pupil. But what he imparts out of his own experience is a pillar of strength for the one wishing to penetrate through darkness to light. Without patience no genuine results can be attained. In this respect there is a possibility of discouragement for those setting out on the path to higher knowledge. The Control of Thoughts and Feelings When the student seeks the path leading to higher knowledge in the way described in the preceding chapter. the world of spirit and soul had been concealed from his vision and concepts. Courage and self-confidence are two beacons which must never be extinguished on the path to higher knowledge. either because he regards these first experiences as being of no value. and differ entirely in their nature from the conceptions previously formed by the student. he is apt to regard them as illusions. No one will ever travel far who cannot bring himself to repeat. because he had formed quite different conceptions of what he was going to experience. though it may not be apparent to him in the way he perhaps expected. NO one is of use as an esoteric student or will ever attain results of real value who has not learned to wait in the highest and best sense of the word. The teacher. can confer upon the pupil no powers which are not already latent within him.regard to his station in life and to his duties. for the time being. he should not omit to fortify himself. The teacher is aware of the progress made by his pupil long before the latter is conscious of it He knows how the delicate spiritual eyes begin to form themselves long before the pupil is aware of this. if they ignore the experience gathered by responsible investigators. in the external conditions of his life through taking this path. Many abandon the path to higher knowledge soon after having set foot upon it. otherwise he can easily lose heart and abandon all attempts after a short time. It is therefore not surprising if he does not immediately notice the powers of soul and spirit now developing in him. the student must be able to stop and continue quietly his daily work. or because they appear to him to be so insignificant that he cannot believe they will lead him to any appreciable results within a measurable time. The powers and faculties to be developed are of a most subtle kind. He had been accustomed to occupy himself exclusively with the physical world. 31 . and a great part of what he has to say is couched in such terms as to prevent the pupil from losing patience and perseverance before he can himself gain knowledge of his own progress. and not thought of these exercises should mingle with the day's work. throughout his work. because their progress is not immediately apparent to them. and his sole function is to assist in the awakening of slumbering faculties. with one ever present thought. nor should he change anything. After doing an exercise for a few minutes. He must never cease repeating to himself that he may have made quite considerable progress after a certain interval of time.

and while contemplating this insignificant object. This feeling should be cherished and fostered. soul and spirit about with him. apparently. for then only can the perception be developed of all that is invisible in ordinary life. it is quite a simple matter. and reflect as follows: “What I am now picturing to myself in my imagination will later on be enticed from the seed by the forces of earth and light. Long before any distinct perception of progress. and not of his soul and spirit. from the hidden depths of the soul. (Anyone objecting that a microscopical examination would reveal the difference between the real seed and the imitation would 32 . In the artificial imitation of the seed there is no such force present. And yet both appear alike to my eyes. if planted in the soil. contains something invisible which is not present in the imitation. for it can develop into a trustworthy guide. Let him describe to himself the shape. form with intensity the right kind of thoughts. Everyone must say to himself: “In my own world of thought and feeling the deepest mysteries lie hidden. a feeling that he is on the right path. Again. an exercise which has failed. Yet its results are of the greatest consequence. mysterious practices are required for the attainment of higher knowledge. One of the ways by which this development may be carried out will now be indicated. there rises in the student. just as the ordinary person is conscious of his body. he will also be able to form the following thought and couple it with the right feeling: “All that will ultimately grow out of the seed is now secretly enfolded within it as the force of the whole plant. The real seed. therefore. The student becomes conscious of soul and spirit.” If the student thoroughly grasps this thought so that it becomes an inward experience. color and all other qualities of the seed. and that these feelings and thoughts must merely be given a new direction. like almost everything else so far explained. Hence it is highly important to give the proper direction to thoughts and feelings. Let the student place before himself the small seed of a plant. It must be clearly realized that a start has to be made with the thoughts and feelings with which we continually live.over and over again. a plant of complex structure will grow.” Let him build up this plant in his imagination. In the first place let him clearly grasp what he really sees with his eyes. and yet is conscious in a true sense only of his body. no forces of earth or light could avail to produce from it a plant. If I had before me an artificial object which imitated the seed to such a deceptive degree that my eyes could not distinguish it from a real seed. Above all. it is imperative to extirpate the idea that any fantastic. Then let his mind dwell upon the following train of thought: “Out of the seed. and through these thoughts develop certain feelings.” In the end it all resolves itself into the fact that man ordinarily carries body. only hitherto I have been unable to perceive them.” It is on this invisible something that thought and feeling are to be concentrated. if the necessary devotion and sympathy be applied. for a countless number of times.

to have the courage to press onward and not become timorous and faint-hearted. It is not surprising that all this appears to many as illusion. In inner tranquility.” they ask. The plant itself will not become visible until later. On the other hand. The grain of seed will appear as if enveloped in a small luminous cloud. In a sensible-supersensible way. Let him ponder on the thought: “The invisible will become visible.” Particular stress must be laid on the following point: what the student thinks he must also feel with intensity. then after a time — possibly not until after numerous attempts — an inner force will make itself felt. Above all. however. if he were hampered in judging the matters of his daily life as sanely and as soundly as before. But this is precisely the important point: not to confuse spiritual reality with imagination at this difficult stage of human evolution. This force will create new powers of perception. And sufficient time must be taken to allow the thought and the feeling which is coupled with it to bore themselves into the soul. “and such hallucinations?” And many will thus fall away and abandon the path. for it is created by the power of the thoughts and feelings we have stirred to life within ourselves. and further-more. If I could not think. must never for a moment be dulled. as it were. not to say the sobriety of thought. or to experiment with all kinds of exercises. He should examine himself again and again to find out if he has remained unaltered in relation to the circumstances among which he lives. strict care must be taken not to drift at random into vague reveries. What was formerly invisible now becomes visible.) Let the student fully realize that this invisible something will transmute itself later on into a visible plant. The intellectual clarity. and the edges as when under the impression of a bluish tone.only show that he had failed to grasp the point. then that which will only become visible later on could not already make its presence felt to me. The greatest mistake would be made if the student's mental balance were disturbed through such exercises. “What is the use of such visions. the thought mentioned above must become a conscious inner experience. but to use it for the development of psycho-spiritual forces. and they must be accompanied by the same sane. sound thinking which is applied to the details of every-day life. If this be accomplished in the right way. The center of this flame evokes the same feeling that one has when under the impression of the color lilac. it will be felt as a kind of flame. The intention is not to investigate the physical nature of the object. to the exclusion of all other thoughts and disturbances. or whether he may perhaps have become unbalanced. which he will have before him in its shape and color. so that the physically invisible now reveals itself in a spiritually visible way. 33 . Fully conscious self-control must never be lost during all these exercises. To lapse into reveries would be fatal. the necessity must be emphasized of maintaining unimpaired and of perpetually cultivating that healthy sound sense which distinguishes truth from illusion.

” Out of the plant there again grows a kind of spiritual flame-form. just as the unfolding of the flower from the bud is a transformation enacted before our physical eyes. will inevitably go astray and find himself on the path of boundless chimera. is only because these senses cannot perceive the concealed spirit of the being. It must be explicitly emphasized that the colors here described are not seen as the physical eyes see colors. I cannot at present see with my eyes that which guards it from disappearance. something lies hidden which I cannot see. and passes away through death. But if we desire to learn this through personal 34 . But this plant will have developed seeds which. of course. “Nothing will be left of what I now see before me. which is. This could only lead to the bitterest deception. any more than I previously could discern the plant in the grain of seed. and if the corresponding feeling be coupled with it. I again become aware that in what I see. through personal vision. As a further exercise to succeed the one just described. He begins to see in all things the spirit. Thus there is something in the plant which my eyes cannot see. will develop to new plants. Anyone attempting to use others devised by himself. for he can perceive things not only in their present state of being but also in their process of growth and decay. then. correspondingly larger than the one previously described. however. and only such are given in these pages. there will again develop in my soul a force which will ripen into a new perception. Now let him fill his mind with the thought that the time will come when this plant will wither and die. of the secret of birth and death. in their turn. but that through spiritual perception the same feeling is experienced as in the case of a physical color-impression. will in time be no more. For the outer senses a being comes into existence through birth.The trains of thought here indicated have been tested and practiced in esoteric training since the earliest times. To apprehend blue spiritually means to have a sensation similar to the one experienced when the physical eye rests on the color blue. And therewith he has taken the first step toward the gradual solution. This fact must be noted by all who intend to rise to spiritual perception. birth and death are merely a transformation. But the reflection that it produces seeds teaches me that it will not disappear into nothing. Otherwise they will expect a mere repetition of the physical in the spiritual. Anyone having reached this point of spiritual vision is the richer by a great deal. the following may be taken: Let the student place before him a plant which has attained the stage of full development. If I let this thought live within me. I fill my mind entirely with the thought: this plant with its form and colors. of which physical eyes can know nothing. The flame can be felt as being greenish-blue in the center. This. For the spirit. and yellowish-red at the outer edge. in due time. or of which he may have heard or read at one place or another.

It is not intended arbitrarily to create visions. people with considerable psychic gifts who need but a slight impulse in order to find themselves already developed. If this rule is observed. the transformation of which into genuine spiritual vision would still remain to be accomplished. but not so surely as the method here. Direct your attention to this desire. were merely pictured in the imagination. There are. An error fraught with serious consequences would ensue if it were assumed that the desired result could be reached more easily if the grain of seed or the plant mentioned above were merely imagined. but to allow reality to create them within oneself. This might lead to results. take three steps in the perfection of your own character. and that there are persons who have acquired knowledge of the phenomena of birth and death through personal vision. be a mere fragment of the imagination. But before making any attempt in this direction it is imperative for the student to strive for the absolute purity of his moral character. The vision thus attained would. He must be convinced that he would never. This golden rule is as follows: For every one step that you take in the pursuit of higher knowledge. Simple phenomena of human life must first be chosen. in fact. but if you wish to become a chemist you must follow the recognized and reliable course. but by the beings themselves whose spiritual truth we are to contemplate. Once the student has found the beginnings of spiritual vision by means of such exercises. without first going through all that has here been described. avail himself in an evil sense of any power he may gain over his fellow-creatures. under any circumstances. and the methods described above are safer and apply equally to all. He must banish all through of ever using knowledge gained in this way for his own personal benefit. For this reason. and it was still uncertain whether the object of the desire would be 35 . all who seek to discover through personal vision the secrets in human nature must follow the golden rule of true spiritual science. it must not be conjured forth by our ordinary ego. such exercise as the following may be attempted: Recall to mind some person whom you may have observed when he was filled with desire for some object. In order to meet another objection. he may proceed to the contemplation of man himself.vision we must first awaken the requisite spiritual sense in the way here indicated. which may be raised by certain people who have some psychic experience. But they are the exceptions. It is possible to acquire some knowledge of chemistry in an exceptional way. It is best to recall to memory that moment when the desire was at its height. in most cases. The truth must well up from the depths of our own soul. let it at once be admitted that there are shorter and simpler ways.

or to pore over it with clumsy intellect. Ordinary terms are employed which are not intended for such things. The exercise just described may be supplemented by the following: Direct your attention in the same way upon a person to whom the fulfillment of some wish. to begin with. You have acquired these reasoning faculties in a life hitherto confined to the physical world of the senses. the gratification of some desire. and thereby stimulate his fellow-men. If the same rules and precautions be adopted as in the previous instance. yellowish-red in the center. the faculties you are not acquiring transcend this world. The attempt will most likely fail hundreds and hundreds of times. of course. by no means equal to your new experience. to apply to the new and higher perceptions the standard of the old. and reflect on what you can thus observe. spiritual insight will once more be attained. creating an impression of yellow in the center and green at the edges. therefore.attained. Allow this feeling to rise in your soul like a cloud on the cloudless horizon. For you must remember that your reasoning faculties are. Do not attempt to clothe in words what you contemplate in the spirit. because the person whom it concerns was not observed in this particular state of soul for a sufficient length of time. your reflection will be interrupted. and do not disturb them by reflecting and pondering over them too much. A spiritual flame-form will be distinguished. 36 . has been granted. Here again is another important rule for the student: know how to observe silence concerning your spiritual experiences. Again the impression of this picture may be described as flame-like. and take special heed that through the conception thus evoked a feeling should awaken in your soul. and reddish-blue or lilac at the edges. and are therefore too gross and clumsy. Do not try. Make the greatest possible effort to be blind and deaf to everything that may be going on around you. if you have one. Lend yourself freely and without reservation to these spiritual impressions. And now fill your mind with this recollection. Much depends on treating such spiritual experiences with great delicacy. The best thing is not to speak to anyone about them except to your teacher. Only he who has gained some certainty and steadiness in the observation of inner experiences can speak about them. observe silence even toward yourself. and you will begin to notice that through this feeling a power grows in your soul that leads to spiritual insight into the state of soul of the other. Yes. It is just a question of not losing patience. The consequence is that in the attempt to clothe the experience in words we are misled into blending the actual experience with all kinds of fantastic delusions. Attempted descriptions of such experiences in inappropriate words usually only lead to gross self-deception. A spiritual insight will once more be attained. A picture experienced as luminous appears in your field of vision. After many attempts you will succeed in experiencing a feeling In your soul corresponding to the state of soul of the person observed. This spiritually luminous picture is the so-called astral embodiment of the desire observed in that soul. As a rule. Maintain the utmost inner tranquility.

to be disheartened. life itself is a good school — possibly the best school. and with the recognition of the sacred and inviolable nature of that which dwells in each human being. For instance. that to be frightened. Just as man requires nervous force in his physical being in 37 . the student will be convinced of it. Every conceivable effort must be made to prevent this. only these two examples can be given to show how enlightened insight into human nature may be achieved. later on. I must not feel afraid. quite definite qualities are develop which are necessary for initiation into the higher mysteries. The would-be initiate must bring with him a certain measure of courage and fearlessness. The thought that a human being could be merely an object of observation must never for a moment be entertained. Such observation should only be practiced by one who has already risen to the level on which complete certainty is found that thoughts are real things. I must only think of what is to be done. He will then no longer allow himself to think of his fellow-men in a way that is incompatible with the highest reverence for human dignity and human liberty. But before these can be taken. By self-discipline in this direction. though at first its need will be least of all apparent. And he must improve to the extent of feeling. and he will then also become ripe for a deeper insight into the mysterious connections between human nature and all else that exists in the universe. he must swiftly come to the conviction that fear is of no possible use. The student must learn to look danger calmly in the face and try to overcome difficulties unswervingly. one thing more is necessary. By following this path the student approaches closer and closer to the moment when he can effectively take the first steps of initiation. A feeling of reverential awe must fill us. His training should provide for their systematic cultivation.By such observation of his fellow-creatures. And this transformation of his outward demeanor will again react favorably on his soul. the student will have undergone a great inner transformation. the student may easily lapse into a moral fault. even in our recollections. they will at least serve to point out the way to be taken. Self-education must see to it that this insight into human nature should go hand in hand with an unlimited respect for the personal privilege of each individual. however. In this respect. By gaining the inner tranquility and repose indispensable for such observation. upon occasions which formerly inspired him with fear. He must positively go out of his way to find opportunities for developing these virtues. Thus he will be able to help himself further along the road. He will find ways and means of penetrating more and more into the secrets of human nature which are hidden from our external senses. when in the presence of some peril. He may become cold-hearted. He will then soon reach the point where this enrichment of his inner self will lend confidence and composure to his outward demeanor. For the present. are things that are out of the question as far as his own inmost self is concerned.

He must not lose strength in the face of this self-knowledge. He must be capable of pressing on to the future undismayed by any experiences of the past. It is truly and literally as if the attention of someone were called to a danger which had threatened him for a long time. He must be equal to the thought: I shall forget that I have failed in this matter. For in penetrating to the higher mysteries he will see things which are concealed from ordinary humanity by the illusion of the senses. The seer is to behold the working of these forces and the march of destiny. but now that he knows. If the physical senses do not allow us to perceive the higher truth. the destiny of manifested beings is birth and death. He loses certain supports in the outer world which he owes to the very illusion surrounding him. they are for this very reason our benefactors. but of which he knew nothing. He often acted out of greed. It is pre-eminently a question of cultivating this courage and this fearlessness in the inmost depths of thought-life. The veil enshrouding the spiritual eyes in ordinary life is to be removed. he will now become aware how destructive all greed is. though the danger has not been rendered greater by his knowing it. He must be prepared to find that many motives which had actuated him hitherto will do so no longer. he is overcome by fear. He will have to develop quite new motives for his thoughts and actions. Thus he will struggle through to the firm conviction that the fountain-head of strength from which he may draw is inexhaustible. Hitherto he felt no fear. he must cultivate a strong trust in the beneficent powers of existence. so also he requires in his soul nature the force which is only developed in the courageous and the fearless. Things are thereby hidden from us which. The student must learn never to despair over failure. For this purpose he must learn to maintain inner calm and steadiness in the face of difficult circumstances. Reasons that influenced him formerly will now disappear. if realized without due preparation.order to use his physical sense. He will have to recognize that previously he thought and acted in a certain way only because he was still in the throes of ignorance. The forces at work in the world are both destructive and constructive. His own soul reveals itself to the seer as undisguised as the other objects. but strength will fail him unless he brings a surplus on which to draw. however weak and impotent his earthly self may have proved. If the student has acquired these faculties up 38 . and I shall try once more as though this had not happened. would throw us into unutterable consternation. He struggles ever onward to the spirit which will uplift him and support him. and it is just for this purpose that courage and fearlessness are required. and the sight of which would be unendurable. His own nature harbors destructive and constructive forces. He often acted out of vanity. he will now see how utterly futile all vanity is for the seer. But man is interwoven with these forces and with this destiny. The student must be fit to endure this sight.

In these. It is for this reason that the initiates speak a different language from the uninitiated. this will be done in the following chapter. he is then ripe to hear the real names of things.to a certain point. which are the key to higher knowledge. For initiation consists in this very act of learning to call the things of the world by those names which they bear in the spirit of their divine authors. lies the mystery of things. In as far as initiation itself can be discussed. their names. 39 . for the former know the names by which the beings themselves are called into existence.

this experience must be supplied in some other way. for it is a question not of science but of vision. but it is only natural that such discussions should as a rule give quite false impressions of their nature. The secrets of existence are only accessible to an extent corresponding to man's own degree of maturity. caused by its use. enlightenment. At the portal of initiation. yet the way to it can be found by all who have passed through preparation. Whatever lives beyond forms a subject difficult to understand. under quite different circumstances. The initiate of today undergoes experiences which would otherwise come to him much later. and later of plants. and which constitute a normal course of inner development resulting from due application to such exercises as are described in the preceding chapters. by quite different means and in quite a different form. but he can only see and hear them if his feeling is ripe for the perception of the spiritual forms. and initiation as far as the lesser mysteries. colors and tones described in the chapters on Preparation and Enlightenment. For this reason alone the path to the higher stages of knowledge and power is beset with obstacles. for without passing through preparation and enlightenment no one can know anything of these tests and appropriately describe them. which he has to undergo.III Initiation Initiation is the highest stage in an esoteric training concerning which it is possible to give some indications in a book intended for the genuine public. The would-be initiate must come into contact with certain things and facts belonging to the higher worlds. These trials are often discussed in books. A person initiated today without further ado would lack the experience which he will gain during his future incarnations before he can attain to higher knowledge in the normal course of his development. The first trial consists in obtaining a truer vision than the average man has of the corporeal attributes of lifeless things. after many incarnations. A firearm should not be used until sufficient experience has been gained to avoid disaster. animals and human beings. except in some far distant future. therefore. These are the so-called trials. Thus the first instructions given to the candidate for initiation serve as a substitute for these future experiences. This does not mean what at present is called scientific knowledge. the would-be initiate proceeds to learn how the objects of nature and the beings gifted with life manifest themselves to the spiritual ear and the 40 . The knowledge and proficiency conferred by initiation cannot be obtained in any other manner. As a rule.

because the hidden (occult) qualities of things cannot be directly expressed in the words of ordinary writing. and wait for a future incarnation to continue his initiation. and it then needs but little to unseal their spiritual hearing and sight so that they become clairvoyant. and during this growth in a new strength is developed in his soul. In a certain way these things then lie stripped — naked — before the beholder. He will then resume his life. For many people. he should wish to continue the path. as the 41 . so that their self-confidence. be acquired in the lower world. thanks to this knowledge of the higher worlds. In whatever position he may find himself. as a new faculty. resoluteness. In his present incarnation he will prove himself a more useful member of society and of humanity than he was before. The actual teachings manifest themselves in this writing. courage and fortitude have been greatly strengthened in a normal manner while learning to bear sorrow. The pupils of the initiates translate the teachings into ordinary language as best they can. after completing the fire-trial. For physical perception they are concealed as if by a veil. the end consists in the attainment. Such people have passed through a wealth of experience. with the experience it brings of the corresponding trial. of greater and truer selfconfidence. strengthened in body and soul. and the falling away of this veil for the would-be initiate consists in a process designated as the process of Purification by Fire. a higher degree of courage. The occult script reveals itself to the soul when the latter has attained spiritual perception. through which he feels himself impelled to decipher the occurrences and the beings of the spiritual world like the characters of a writing. prudence. as a rule. But if. It is true that he learns many uncommon things of which others can have no inkling. The candidate grows into clairvoyant knowledge in an appropriate way. ordinary life is itself a more or less unconscious process of initiation through the Fire-Trial. This strength. Thus they are often initiates without knowing it. The qualities which can then be seen and heard are hidden from the physical eyes and ears. his firmness. and especially with equanimity and unbroken strength. might possibly awaken in the soul as though of its own accord. For it must be noted that a genuine fire-trial is not intended to satisfy the curiosity of the candidate. disappointment and failure in their undertakings with greatness of soul. but this acquisition of knowledge is not the end. It cannot be learned as an artificial writing is learned and read. and his beneficent influence over his fellows will have greatly increased. for it is traced in the spiritual world and remains there for all time. but the means to the end.spiritual eye. a certain writing-system generally adopted in esoteric training must now be revealed to him. and a magnanimity and perseverance such as cannot. The candidate may always turn back after the fire-trial. The first trial is therefore known as the Fire-Trial.

to prove whether he can move with freedom and assurance in the higher worlds. but it will be found safer to follow the instructions of those who are spiritually experienced. Now for the first time he attains complete certainty in observing the higher worlds. The signs of the occult script are not arbitrarily invented. A regular understanding. and colors reveal themselves to him now in one great connected whole. is now at last possible between the candidate and the initiate in the spheres of higher knowledge. colors. Thanks to this language the student also learns certain rules of conduct and certain duties of which he formerly knew nothing. Such helpers of the world and of humanity pass through life bestowing blessings and performing good deeds. Hitherto he could never know positively whether the things he saw were rightly seen. Yet it must be emphasized that there are people unconsciously gifted with the ability and faculty of performing such actions. He acquires by training the gifts bestowed on others by higher powers for the good of humanity. They teach us the language of things. the higher knowledge in its immediate form can only be imparted by the initiate in the abovementioned sign-language. All the isolated figures. It becomes immediately apparent to the candidate that the signs he is now learning correspond to the forms. Once the student has learned the sign-language there awaits him yet another trial. too. and that he is only now beginning to read in the higher worlds. He works at one occupation or another because one duty or another is imposed on him by outward 42 .soul continually develops. they correspond to the forces actively engaged in the world. He acts out of the higher worlds. Instructions concerning such action can only be read and understood in the writing in question. He works at one occupation or another because one duty he is impelled to action by exterior motives. Having learned these he is able to perform actions endowed with a significance and a meaning such as the actions of one not initiated can never possess. and who have some proficiency in deciphering the occult script. gifts have been bestowed on them which appear supernatural. though they have never undergone an esoteric training. He realizes that all he learned previously was only like learning to spell. tones. In ordinary life he is impelled to action by exterior motives. For reasons here not to be discussed. and tones which he learned to perceive during his preparation and enlightenment. We can sincerely revere these favored of God. What distinguishes them from the candidate for initiation is only that the latter acts consciously and with full insight into the entire situation. but we should not for this reason regard the work of esoteric training as superfluous. For whatever form the intercourse between an initiate and another person may take in ordinary life.

led by such rules. in the course of his activity.circumstances. an official performs the duties that belong to him. it is simply because he often lacks the ability to judge the initiate correctly. for instance. the mother just as good a mother. The nature of this action can be understood by means of the occult script with which he is now familiar. as the training progresses. and in the course of his further training. The father will remain just as good a father to his family. Should he. and the candidate must know how to produce this change. he will find himself faced by a certain definite task. He must perform some action in consequence of observations made on the basis of what he has learned during preparation and enlightenment. nor anyone else will be diverted from his work by becoming an esoteric student. introduce any of his own opinions and desires. the candidate develops this quality in a short time to such a high degree that he would otherwise have to go through many incarnations. as a swimmer is without support when swimming in water that is beyond his depth. But this only happens in special cases. in the eyes of the uninitiated. For this purpose. this does not always appear to be the case. but only through adherence to the rules of conduct revealed to him in the occult script. before he could acquire it to the same extent. all the qualities which make a human being capable and efficient are enhanced in the student to a degree incomprehensible to the uninitiated. showing how these figures appear and are experienced after the action has been performed. The importance of this trial lies again in the acquisition of a quality. At this stage of initiation there are duties to be performed for which no outward stimulus is given. he can act with the same firmness and precision with which. If. If he recognizes his duty and acts rightly. The success can be recognized in the alteration produced by his action in the figures. The candidate will not be moved to action by external pressure. He must now show in this second trial that. This activity must be repeated until the candidate attains absolute poise and assurance. There is no duty in a higher world that can force a person to neglect any single one of his duties in the ordinary world. in order to produce the changes in question in these higher regions of existence. The deeds of the latter are not always intelligible to the former. This trial is known as the Water-Trial. Exact indications are given. and neither the official nor the soldier. On the contrary. because in his activity in these higher worlds the candidate is deprived of the support derived from outward circumstances. in the ordinary course of his development. It need hardly be mentioned that the student must in no way neglect any of his duties in ordinary life because he is living and working in higher worlds. and tones apprehended by his spiritual eyes and ears. or should he 43 . Through his experiences in the higher worlds. It all centers around the fact that he must be guided only by the results of his higher perception and reading of the occult script. his trial has been successful. colors.

and inclinations are causes that produce effects. This is the object in view. even though inclinations and sympathies would like to seduce him from this duty — such a person is unconsciously an initiate in the midst of ordinary life. truth alone must guide. For even as it is difficult for those who have not learned to spell correctly in their childhood to make good this deficiency when fully grown up. has led them to acquire self-control. in order to follow his own willful inclination. and inclinations. superstition. Indeed. The objects of the physical world do not alter. All doubt regarding the higher worlds is removed from him. our wishes. People whose mode of thought tends to fancifulness and superstition can never make progress on the path to higher knowledge. namely. be indispensable for success in this second trial. if this ability has not been acquired to a certain degree in ordinary life. and everything fantastic. Certainty in higher worlds is only likely to be attained when personal opinion is never considered. In the higher worlds. however.diverge for one moment from the laws which he has recognized to be right. or inclination when logical thought demands it. while putting into the background all personal predilection. This is. desires. Here again. whatever the nature of our wishes. for it now remains to be proved whether the candidate is shaping in a way that shows him to be fit for the truth path of knowledge. we must strictly follow the right rules and subdue every arbitrary impulse. With all their laws they reveal themselves to his gaze. Attention should be paid to the training of this faculty during all the previous stages. more difficult to accomplish in the higher stages of existence than in the lower. an unquestionably sound judgment. But he cannot acquire this treasure so long as he is the prey of fancies and illusions. then the result produced would differ entirely from what was intended. a certain measure of initiation thus unconsciously acquired in life will. as a rule. this trial can be more easily passed by those whose life. He will need but little to succeed in this particular trial. One human quality is of very special importance at this stage of initiation. Every prejudice. so too it is difficult to develop the necessary degree of self-control at the moment of looking into the higher worlds. Hence ample opportunity is given him in the course of this trial to develop self-control. Further progress is now only possible if he is able to distinguish illusion. It would indeed be fatal if his imagination and his prejudices ran away with his intellect. There must be perfect readiness to abandon at once any idea. opinion. every cherished opinion with regard to the things in question. from true reality. at first. anyone capable of always performing his duty. Dreamers and 44 . It is indeed a precious treasure that the student is to acquire. desires. If we wish to produce a particular effect in these worlds. He would lose sight of the goal to which his action tended. Anyone having acquired the faculty of following high principles and ideals. must vanish. and confusion would result. before initiation.

For at this stage everything centers round the development of absolute presence of mind. has unconsciously acquired the degree of maturity necessary for the third trial. This trial is known 45 . for him life itself has been a training in this sense. All that the candidate requires is the ability to come quickly to terms with himself. Failure to find this inner strength will leave him standing where he was. There is no time for doubt or hesitation. All is left in his own hands. for he must here find his higher self in the truest sense of the word. ordinary life is itself an esoteric training for many. At this stage. to come to a swift decision without hesitation or delay. He finds here no definite goal to be reached. for success in this trial brings with it a moment of supreme happiness. who have successfully passed the previous trials will fail to find the necessary strength at this point. and the training at this stage is concerned with the perfect development of this quality. Such situations are here meant in which success is instantly lost if action is not rapid. He must rapidly decide in all things to listen to the inspiration of the spirit. without further acquaintance with these mattes. If the candidate is in this way sufficiently advanced. a third trial awaits him. no less than at the others. No one on reading this. and who has turned this ability into a permanent personal quality. For the most dangerous enemies on the way to knowledge of the higher worlds lurk in such fantastical reveries and superstitions. Few of those. Whatever prevents him from listening to the voice of the spirit must be courageously overcome. All the accustomed inducements to act or even to think now cease. whereas a few moments of hesitation would have seen the misfortune an accomplished fact. It is a question of showing presence of mind in this situation. however. A person who is quick to act when a misfortune is imminent. when suddenly confronted with some task or problem in life. Things or people to stimulate him to action are non-existent. should feel an antipathy for this principle of being thrown back on oneself. for only within himself can he find the one central point of vantage where he can gain a firm hold. Every moment of hesitation would prove that he was still unfit. and because over the portal at the entrance to the first trial he read: Without normal common sense all thine efforts are in vain. Yet no one need to believe that the student loses all sense of poetry in life. Either they will have turned back already or they succeed at this point also. Nothing and nobody can give him the strength he needs but he himself alone. This cannot be over-emphasized. are written over the portal leading to the second trial of initiation. all power of enthusiasm because the words: You must be rid of all prejudice. In order not to remain inactive he must not lose himself. For anyone having reached the point of being able. He finds himself in a situation where nothing impels him to act.fantastical people are as unfit for the path to higher knowledge as superstitious people. He must find his way all alone and out of himself.

The candidate learns how to apply the higher knowledge. The only obstacle to giving information in these matters is the lack of understanding on the part of the recipients. If the candidate is found fit for the foregoing experiences. because while undergoing it the candidate can support himself neither upon the firm basis of external incentive nor upon the figures. Everything is left to his own responsibility. Of course this does not mean that experience gained in life should be renounced. No other person. but far more of serving them in the right way and with the necessary tact. It is true. of course. The silence he is to keep refers to something quite different. We must be prepared at every moment that every object and every being can bring to us some new revelation. for he must have full faith in the immediate present. tones. unobscurred by the past. It is not so much a question of withholding the higher truths. But the initiate must have the ability to judge every new experience wholly according to what is inherent in it. and an oath means nothing more than that he has been found qualified to be entrusted with such a responsibility. All that is here said on this subject can only be the slenderest allusion. If we judge the new by the standard of the old we are liable to error. that the higher knowledge does not lend itself to promiscuous talk. are inappropriate and actually misleading. He must be able to destroy the veil of memory which envelops man every moment of his life. and let it react upon him. If we judge something that happens to us today according to the experience of yesterday. he is then given what is called symbolically the draught of forgetfulness. He would be a poor initiate who did not place all the higher knowledge he had acquired at the service of humanity. and he learns in every situation to discover within himself what he has to do. “oath” and “betray”. we are exposed to a multitude of errors. but exclusively upon himself. This means that he is initiated into the secret knowledge that enables him to act without being continually disturbed by the lower memory. and colors which he has learned at the stages of preparation and enlightenment. He acquires this fine quality with regard to things he had previously spoken. as well and as far as this is possible.as the Air-Trial. There is no question of an oath in the ordinary sense of the word. however. no being exacts an oath from him with this intent. It should always be kept in mind as clearly as possible. but rather of an experience that comes at this stage of development. how to place it at the service of humanity. The memory of past 46 . This is necessary for the initiate. but no one having reached the stage of development described above is actually forbidden to say anything. The task now to be performed is often expressed in the statement that the student must take an oath never to betray anything he has learned. These expressions. and especially with regard to the manner in which they were spoken. He then begins really and truly to understand the world. Upon successfully passing this trial the student is permitted to enter the temple of higher wisdom.

Thus doth man ever raise himself. We must not only know them. The second draught presented to the initiate is the draught of remembrance. in a spiritual sense. Had we not gone through a definite experience we should perhaps be blind to the qualities of the object or being that comes before us. They must become our practice.experiences will be of greatest use for the very reason that it enables us to perceive the new. to manifest and administer them in living actions. even as we ordinarily eat and drink. quite as a matter of course. Thus experience should serve the purpose of perceiving the new and not of judging it by the standard of the old. they must come to living expression through man himself. We must unite ourselves and become as one with the higher truths. Ordinary memory would be unequal to this task. There must be no need to keep thinking about them in the ordinary sense. Through its agency he acquires the faculty of retaining the knowledge of the higher truths ever present in his soul. our inclination. In this respect the initiate acquires certain definite qualities. 47 . to that same stature to which nature raised him in a physical sense. and thereby many things are revealed to him which remain concealed from the uninitiated. our habit. but be able. they must flow through him as the functions of life through his organism.

It is only when we ever and again surrender ourselves to a certain definite thought. This feature soon sets its mark on his exterior. his decisions definite. We must not expect an immeasurable view into the higher worlds from one day to the next. If this thought becomes so powerful in the student that it grows into an actual feature of his character. and all that goes under the name of nervousness gradually disappears. even a destructive effect on the higher faculties that slumber in us. digest. Gradually he learns to breath and see with this soul. that any results can be attained. We overlook it in self-deception while it plants itself all the more firmly in the depths of the soul. A particular effort must be made to cultivate the quality of patience.IV Some Practical Aspects The training of thoughts and feelings. The gaze of his eye becomes steady. the movement of his body becomes sure. reddish-brown. and thereby be led some distance further into spiritual science. making it absolutely our own. speak. rotating. is attained when the student introduces into his thoughts and feelings the same orderly system with which nature has endowed his bodily organs that enable him to see. In the following pages some practical aspects of the higher education of soul and spirit will be treated in greater detail. Contentment with the smallest fragment attained. Rules that appear trifling and insignificant must be taken into account. for it will become only that much stronger. or reddish-yellow tones. supposing someone affronts us. and show a regular structure. but I shall wait patiently until higher powers shall have found me worthy of definite enlightenment. This thought is as follows: I must certainly do everything I can for the training and development of my soul and spirit. cloud-like spirals. but he will achieve nothing so long as he fails to master this impatience. They are such that anyone can put them into practice regardless of other rules. It is quite understandable that the student should await results with impatience. must more and more take possession of the soul. dully glimmering in reddish. breath. Enlightenment. or greenish-blue color. Before our training 48 . he is treading the right path. Before this development. introduces into the soul and spirit the same organic symmetry with which nature has constructed the physical body. Every symptom of impatience produces a paralyzing. to speak and hear with the spirit. repose and tranquility. Nor is it of any use to combat this impatience merely in the ordinary sense. and Initiation. The clairvoyant perceives them as interlacing. hear. soul and spirit are undifferentiated masses. This inner regularity leading to higher knowledge. for we should assuredly be disappointed. pursued in the way described in the chapters on Preparation. For example. After this training they begin to assume a brilliant yellowish-green.

He must in no case be under any illusion concerning his own self. for if we are to attain something we must also desire it. and that is by a clear recognition of them. desire and craving must be silenced. and desire will always tend to fulfillment if backed by a particular force. difficult. Such obstacles can only be removed by self-enlightenment. He must only ask when knowledge can serve to perfect his own being in the service of evolution. but in subtle. Anyone making a habit of being truthful with himself opens the portal leading to a deeper insight. This requires him to be honest with himself in his innermost soul. All curiosity must fall away from the student. Such self. the thought is immediately present in the mind of the student that such an affront makes no difference to his intrinsic worth. silent alterations in the life of thought and feeling. If he wishes to have it for his own sake. for these are qualities of the soul before which all higher knowledge shyly withdraws. This force is derived 49 . With a feeling of inner truth he must look his own faults. and should seek every opportunity for such devotional attention. However precious this knowledge is accounted. He must rid himself as much as possible of the habit of asking questions merely for the sake of gratifying a selfish thirst for knowledge. however.knowledge is. Special attention must be paid in esoteric training to the education of the life of desires. It must always be remembered that this training is not carried out in crude outward processes. Of course it is not a case of simply accepting every affront.we should have directed our resentment against the offender. Nevertheless. weaknesses. He should listen devoutly to all that contributes to such an end. he has placed a stone in his way on the path which is to lead him upward. A person can even improve his intellect and reason. Above all things. in whose favor we had the right to intervene. if he quietly and calmly makes it clear to himself why he is weak in this respect. Everything slumbers in the human soul and can be awakened. his delight in knowledge and his devotion to it should in no way be hampered. In a similar case. for the temptation to self-deception is immeasurably great. The moment he tries to excuse to himself any of his weaknesses. and not in a spirit of anger. Patience has the effect of attraction. he will never attain it. but of acting with the same calm composure when dealing with an affront against our own person as we would if the affront were directed against another person. a wave of anger would have surged up within us. and unfitness full in the face. impatience the effect of repulsion on the treasures of higher knowledge. In the higher regions of existence nothing can be attained by haste and unrest. And he does whatever must be done to meet the affront with calm and composure. the student must not crave it if he wishes to attain it. of course. There is only one way to get rid of faults and failings. This does not mean that we are to become free of desire.

he wishes to proceed further. now ennobled and purified. and of studying. That is one of the golden rules for the student. My own anger conceals it from me. We should cultivate a feeling of joy and devotion for what we learn. I cannot see this current as long as I am myself capable of anger. and shall study only for this purpose. and yet clairvoyance has not ensued. Such a desire is altogether useless and leads to no result so long as the person in question has not acquired a knowledge of the laws that govern the nature of the eternal. The gift of clairvoyance only manifests itself when all those qualities which stunt the growth of the latent faculties are suppressed. the beginnings of such seeing and hearing may appear at an earlier period. will enable him to do so. we erect a wall around ourselves in the soul-world. There are certainly many people who would like to learn from their own observation something about their life before birth. For instance. but remain ineffective as long as he is capable of anger. may quickly die. The following example brings this out clearly. have to be combated. It is also no use saying: I particularly wish to examine my previous life. but these are only young and tender shoots which are subjected to all possible error. But if. We must not. and the forces which are to develop the eyes of the soul cannot approach. We must rather persevere in this combating of anger and proceed patiently on our way. The beginnings of such an organ are latent in every human being. curiosity.from a right knowledge. because they have for years combated certain qualities. Do not desire at all until you know what is right in any one sphere. at first. We must rather be capable of abandoning this desire. Many grow impatient or skeptical. with no thought of the above end in view. In that case they have just trained some qualities and allowed others to run riot. and which. with no such intention. If we become angered. suppose that when we are free from anger we shall immediately have a psychic (astral) vision. however. a knowledge of these laws in their subtlest and most intimate character. Of course. of eliminating it altogether. superstition. Other qualities which. Yet this organ is not immediately present the moment anger has been combated to a small extent. are timidity. prejudice. having really acquired this knowledge. if not carefully tended and guarded. The wise man first ascertains the laws of the world. We should learn to cherish and foster a particular desire in such a way that it brings with it its own fulfillment. the mania 50 . vexed or annoyed. For this purpose an organ of vision must have been developed in the soul. his desire. Undoubtedly. then some day we shall find that this eye of the soul has become developed. if a person angers me he sends forth a psychic current into the soul-world. vanity and ambition. like anger and vexation. through the study of spiritual science. anger is not the only failing to be combated for the attainment of this end. and then his desires become powers which realize themselves.

for imparting information. to the cultivation of which the student must devote his care. while reducing to absolute silence any activity within his own soul. There can be no question of that. race. But every spiritual scientist knows that much more depends upon such matters than upon the increase of intelligence and employment of artificial exercises. and even his prejudice. Rather is it true that a correct estimate of all things is to be attained only when we are no longer entangled in prejudice. that a racial prejudice prevents us from seeing into a man's soul. Along with gentleness. gentleness clears the obstacles away and unseals the inner organs. 51 . In our time it is difficult for people to understand how the combating of such qualities can have anything to do with the heightening of the faculty of cognition. because we must combat the prejudices of rank. rather than what we ourselves have to say at the moment on the subject under discussion. This does not mean that he must withhold his opinion. and so forth. and as it grows. become regular in its structure. If anything be said to which we must reply. Every word spoken without having been thoroughly purged in thought is a stone thrown in the way of esoteric training. But he must listen to the speaker as carefully and as attentively as he possibly can and let his reply derive its form from what he has just heard. and the making of distinctions in human beings according to the outward characteristics of rank. and so forth. This thought is as follows: The importance lies not in the difference of our opinions but in his discovering through his own effort what is right if I contribute something toward it. which is one of the chief means used in all esoteric training. that we must close our eyes to the differences between people. It is this ordinary sense that the student must develop in all its delicacy and subtlety. race. another quality will presently be developed in the soul of the student: that of quietly paying attention to all the subtleties in the soul-life of his environment. He must learn to judge what importance it may have for the other person if he opposes the latter's opinion with his own. Harshness scares away the soul-pictures that should open the eye of the soul. and he is treading the right path if this thought lives with him to the extent of becoming a trait of his character. Especially can misunderstanding arise if we believe that we must become foolhardy in order to be fearless. Even in the ordinary sense it is true that the fear of some phenomenon prevents us from estimating it rightly. In such cases one particular thought recurs ever and again to the student. In this example a refined quality of tact is indicated. And here something must be considered which can only be explained by giving an example. Thoughts of this and of a similar nature cause the character and the behavior of the student to be permeated with a quality of gentleness. sex. as a plant expanding in the sunlight. feeling. The soul-life of his environment will impress itself on him in such a way that his own soul will grow. we must be careful to consider the speaker's opinion.

surged within you. Apart from this. because they have certain effects which no experienced spiritual scientist considers desirable. and you will only be able to hear with soul and spirit when you possess these higher senses. Do not expect immediately to see and hear in the world of soul and spirit. It is easier. But they are only difficult of achievement for the impatient and the unpersevering. Something may here be said concerning the environment in which this training should be undertaken. Persevere in silent inner seclusion. these ways can never be made public in their true form. when I have grown sufficiently. By observing them he perfects himself. for this is not without some importance. Just as a lily can never grow into 52 . It is true that the inner laws of these organs are so powerful that this influence cannot be fatally injurious. and which can be avoided by all who really will. reduce to absolute immobility all the thoughts which. This point must be continually emphasized. in a certain sense. The fragments appearing here and there can never lead to profitable results. Every student receives these instructions at the outset. go about your customary daily affairs. and peace of mind. And yet the case differs for almost every person. Since fragmentary information concerning these ways is continually finding its way into publicity. of whose nature and origin they can know nothing. For reasons which only the initiated can understand. wait in patience. Having persevered for a time in silent inner seclusion. must be conscious of the fact that these interests are not without their effect on the development of his spiritual organs. the modern struggle for existence. close the senses to all that they brought you before your training. all his labor is in vain.” and make no attempt to attract forcefully any of these higher powers to yourself. imprinting deeply upon your mind this thought: “Some day. There are other ways which lead more quickly to the goal. for all that you are doing does but contribute to the development of your higher senses. express warning must be given against entering upon them.Gentleness and patient reserve open the soul to the soul-world and the spirit to the spirit-world. happiness. only such things are here imparted as are attended by no danger whatsoever to the health of soul and body. become quite still and silent within. according to your previous habits. as for example. and then the higher worlds will begin to fashion and perfect the organs of sights and hearing in your soul and spirit. to accomplish the first steps along this path than to get the better of the commonest every-day difficulties without this training. but what is here explained has nothing to do with them. because many people form an altogether wrong conception of the difficulties that beset the path to higher knowledge. Anyone practicing in an environment filled only with self-seeking interests. If he neglects them. No other obstacles exist save those which we ourselves place in our own path. but may easily undermine health. I shall attain that which I am destined to attain. It would be far better for people to avoid having anything to do with such things than to risk entrusting themselves to wholly dark forces.

might be very far advanced on the path. the eye of the soul can never grow to anything but its destined shape even though it be subjected to the self-seeking interests of modern cities. now and again. On another this stroke might well have had the effect of paralyzing his powers and undermining his energy. for the esoteric student it becomes the occasion of his enlightenment. while silently seated in his quiet chamber. John's Gospel. he is then fortunate enough to make a journey over the calm or maybe tempestuous ocean. but much depends on the right choice. his environment in the restful peace. This environment develops the inner organs in a harmony which can never ensue in a modern city. however inappropriate its environment. or resounds in his ears that have become spiritually hearing. or of St. Someone. the nurture that comes from the inspired teachings of spiritual research. the walls disappear.a thistle. as they develop. A third perseveres patiently for years without any marked result. the inner dignity and sweetness of nature. too. and a veil falls away from the eyes of his soul. for instance. had been able to breathe the fragrance of pines. so. and a new world expands before his eyes that have become seeing. Yet no city-dweller should fail to give to the organs of his soul and spirit. Another is also so far advanced that this veil only needs to be loosened. Thomas à Kempis. to gaze on snowy peaks. he might be standing. suddenly he becomes a seer. this occurs through some stroke of destiny. and observe the silent activity of woodland creatures and insects. become transparent for his soul. we should instead open our soul to the glorious teachings of the Bhagavad Gita. much that might seem strange to the uninitiated. or of St. Especially fortunate is the student who can carry out his esoteric training surrounded by the green world of plants. spiritual light envelops him. If our eyes cannot follow the woods in their mantel of green every spring. during his childhood at least. But under all circumstances it is well if the student seeks. 53 . at the very entrance of sight and hearing with soul and spirit. so to speak. or among the sunny hills. The spiritually experienced could say much concerning these paths. More favorably situated than the townsman is the person who. There are many ways to the summit of insight. and to the descriptions resulting from spiritual science. day by day. where nature weaves her web of sweet simplicity. Suddenly.

and thoughts. the latter can give nothing but advice. This point should be considered by those who complain that the training is difficult. When pursued in such a spirit. for the training is based on the development of the inner life. To ask of the teacher: “Give me your higher knowledge. but indeed must be a voluntary action. feelings. too. yet they are not harsh. To insist on being admitted to esoteric training without fulfilling the conditions would be equivalent to saying: “Teach me how to paint. higher knowledge can never be attained. Of course. and the teacher must necessarily give advice concerning this inner life. They are the natural outcome of esoteric knowledge. esoteric training can easily appear in the light of a coercion of the soul or the conscience. the conditions are strict. It is true. No one can wholly fulfill them. of course. Just as no one can become a painter who refuses to handle a paint-brush. The first condition is that the student should pay heed to the advancement of bodily and spiritual health. It depends entirely upon the free-will of each individual human being whether or not he choose to tread the same path. however. In this case the gratification of curiosity and desire for knowledge would be the only motive. 1. but nothing can be achieved by it alone so long as the special conditions attached to esoteric training are not accepted. But it must be emphasized that a general desire for higher knowledge is not sufficient. Let us now consider in turn the conditions imposed on the student. He has already passed through the preparatory stages leading to a knowledge of the higher worlds.V The Conditions of Esoteric Training The conditions attached to esoteric training are not arbitrary. Failure or unwillingness to fulfill these strict conditions must entail the abandonment of esoteric training. for the time being. since their fulfillment not only should be.” The teacher can never offer anything unless the recipient comes forward to meet him of his own free-will. and knows from experience what is necessary. It is the effort of will that matters. and everything he says should be accepted in this sense. be felt by many. In the main. but do not ask me to handle a paint-brush. so. This desire will. but everyone can start on the path toward them.” would be an impossible demand. but only the corresponding effort. no one can receive esoteric training who is unwilling to meet the demands considered necessary by the teacher. and the ready disposition to enter upon this path. 54 . but leave me my customary emotions. But there is no question of compulsion when a demand is met out of free choice. If this fact be overlooked. It should be emphasized that the complete fulfillment of any one of these conditions is not insisted upon.

Now. perhaps even an offensive employment than to think: “This work is not good enough for me. The good counsels of others. I am destined for something better. are as a rule superfluous. but the effort to improve in this respect lies within the scope of all. whatever his position. toward nervousness. calm thinking. be honest and truthful with ourselves. often. above all. In fulfilling our duties we must often do things that are detrimental to our health. The unhealthy are not rejected. Duty must in many cases stand higher than health. but they must not imagine that this sort of asceticism will assist them in attaining higher knowledge. excitable life. many may find it desirable for other reasons to change their conditions of life. For him pleasure can only be a means to health and to life. An unhealthy life of thought and feeling will not fail to obstruct the path to higher knowledge. but it is demanded of the student that he should have the will to lead a healthy life. even. in the first instance. a person need only do as much as possible. Sound knowledge can alone proceed from sound human beings. as far as the student is concerned. but pleasure must never stand higher. freely bestowed though generally unsought.” Of special importance for the student is the striving for complete health of mind. upon the individual. Each must endeavor to take care of himself. Many ascribe to their circumstances everything which apparently prevents them from making progress. Nothing should be further removed from the student than an inclination toward a fantastical. to further the health of body and soul. Clear. and fanaticism. Every kind of work can serve the whole of humanity. We must decide at the right moment to place duty higher than the care of our health. Some may derive satisfaction from asceticism just as others can from wine-bibbing. He should 55 . From the physical aspect it will be more a question of warding off harmful influences than of anything else.health does not depend. In this respect he must attain the greatest possible independence. For the latter. and in this connection we must. They say they cannot develop themselves under their conditions of life. with stability of feeling and emotion. exaggeration. and it is a surer sign of greatness of soul to perceive clearly how necessary for this whole is a petty. form here the basis of all work. But just think how much can be avoided with a little good will. There is no use in leading an ascetic life when the underlying motive is the same in this case as in other enjoyments. but no one need do so for the purpose of esoteric training. than life itself.

It should be cherished in stillness within the soul. It is of no avail. and my pupil does not fulfill my expectations. This holds good in all things. If I am a teacher. In such matters each can only begin by reforming himself. to the extent of asking myself: “Is my pupil's deficiency not the result of my own action?” Instead of directing my feelings against him I shall rather reflect on my own attitude. I must not divert my resentment against him but against myself. Much is included in the fulfillment of this condition. Failing this.” I may then also come to the conclusion that this human brother of mine would have become a different man had my teachers taken the same pains with him they took with me. I must feel myself as one with my pupil. he would find his way merely into worlds of his own imagination. This does not imply that such a thought should be immediately translated into external acts of agitation. his own pet opinions would assert themselves. Proceeding from such an attitude. I suspend my judgment and say to myself: “I am. like him. than excitable and fantastic. quietly letting all things make their impression on him and reveal their message. great or small. instead of higher worlds. He should be at pains to do justice to life on every occasion. but the student works in 56 . in the sense of the foregoing thoughts. Then quite gradually it will set its mark on the outward demeanor of the student. a change will come over the student's whole way of thinking. in place of truth. It is easy to decide what men ought to be. I shall reflect on the fact that something was given to me which was withheld from him. Such an attitude of mind. All one-sided and extravagant tendencies in his sentiments and criticisms should be avoided. to make general demands on the whole of humanity. Through favorable circumstances I received an education which perhaps alone saved me from a similar fate. that I enjoy my fortune precisely because it was denied him. he should meet the demands of lie with steady assurance. 2. It is better for the student to be matter-of-fact. only a human being. for instance. And then I shall naturally come to think of myself as a link in the whole of humanity and a sharer in the responsibility for everything that occurs. but each can only fulfill it in his own manner. The second condition is that the student should feel himself co-ordinated as a link in the whole of life.acquire a healthy outlook on all circumstances of life. alters the way I regard a criminal. so that the pupil may in the future be better able to satisfy my demands.

the depths, not on the surface. If would therefore be quite wrong to relate the demand here indicated with an external, least of all political, demands; with such matters this training can have nothing to do. Political agitators know, as a rule, what to demand of other people; but they say little of demands on themselves. 3. This brings us to the third condition. The student must work his way upward to the realization that his thoughts and feelings are as important for the world as his actions. It must be realized that it is equally injurious to hate a fellow-being as to strike him. The realization will then follow that by perfecting ourselves we accomplish something not only for ourselves, but for the whole world. The world derives equal benefit from our untainted feelings and thoughts as from our good demeanor, and as long as we cannot believe in this cosmic importance of our inner life, we are unfit for the path that is here described. We are only filled with the right faith in the significance of our inner self, of our soul, when we work at it s though it were at least as real as all external things. We must admit that our every feeling produces an effect, just as does every action of our hand. 4. These words already express the fourth condition: to acquire the conviction that the real being of man does not lie in his exterior but in his interior. Anyone regarding himself as a product of the outer world, as a result of the physical world, cannot succeed in this esoteric training, for the feeling that we are beings of soul and spirit forms its very basis. The acquisition of this feeling renders the student fit to distinguish between inner duty and outward success. He learns that the one cannot be directly measured by the other. He must find the proper mean between what is indicated by external conditions and what he recognizes as the right conduct for himself. He should not force upon his environment anything for which it can have no understanding, but also he must be quite free from the desire to do only what can be appreciated by those around him. The voice of his own soul struggling honestly toward knowledge must bring him the one and only recognition of the truths for which he stands. But he must learn as much as he possibly can from his environment so as to discover what those around him need, and what is good for them. In this way he will develop within himself what is known in spiritual science as the “spiritual balance.” An open heart

57

for the needs of the outer world lies on one of the scales, and inner fortitude and unfaltering endurance on the other. 5. This brings us to the fifth condition: steadfastness in carrying out a resolution. Nothing should induce the student to deviate from a resolution he may have taken, save only the perception that he was in error. Every resolution is a force, and if this force does not produce an immediate effect at the point to which it was applied, it works nevertheless on in its own way. Success is only decisive when an action arises from desire. But all actions arising from desire are worthless in relation to the higher worlds. There, love for an action is alone the decisive factor. In this love, every impulse that impels the student to action should fulfill itself. Undismayed by failure, he will never grow weary of endeavoring repeatedly to translate some resolution into action. And in this way he reaches the stage of not waiting to see the outward effect of his actions, but of contenting himself with performing them. He will learn to sacrifice his actions, even his whole being, to the world, however the world may receive his sacrifice. Readiness for a sacrifice, for an offering such as this, must be shown by all who would pursue the path of esoteric training. 6. A sixth condition is the development of a feeling of thankfulness for everything with which man is favored. We must realize that our existence is a gift from the entire universe. How much is needed to enable each one of us to receive and maintain his existence! How much to we not owe to nature and to our fellow human beings! Thoughts such as these must come naturally to all who seek esoteric training, for if the latter do not feel inclined to entertain them, they will be incapable of developing within themselves that all-embracing love which is necessary for the attainment of higher knowledge. Nothing can reveal itself to us which we do not love. And every revelation must fill us with thankfulness, for we ourselves are the richer for it. 7. All these conditions must be united in a seventh: to regard life unceasingly in the manner demanded by these conditions. The student thus makes it possible to give his life the stamp of uniformity. All his modes of expression will, in this way, be brought into harmony, and no longer contradict each other. And thus he will prepare himself for

58

the inner tranquillity he must attain during the preliminary steps of his training. Anyone sincerely showing the good will to fulfill these conditions may decide to seek esoteric training. He will then be ready to follow the advice given above. Much of his advice may appear to be merely on the surface, and many will perhaps say that they did not expect the training to proceed in such strict forms. But everything interior must manifest itself in an exterior way, and just as a picture is not evident when it exists only in the mind of the painter, so, too, there can be no esoteric training without outward expression. Disregard for strict forms is only shown by those who do not know that the exterior is the avenue of expression for the interior. No doubt it is the spirit that really matters, and not the form; but just as form without spirit is null and void, so also would spirit remain inactive if it did not create for itself a form. The above conditions are calculated to render the student strong enough to fulfill the further demands made on him during this training. If he fail in these conditions he will hesitate before each new demand, and without them he will lack that faith in man which he must possess. For all striving for truth must be founded on faith in and true love for man. But though this is the foundation it is not the source of all striving for truth, for such striving can only flow from the soul's own fountain-head of strength. And the love of man must gradually widen to a love for all living creatures, yes, for all existence. Through failure to fulfill the condition here given, the student will lack the perfect love for everything that fashions and creates, and the inclination to refrain from all destruction as such. He must so train himself that not only in his actions but also in his words, feelings, and thoughts he will never destroy anything for the sake of destruction. His joy must be in growth and life, and he must only lend his hand to destruction, when he is also able, through and by means of destruction, to promote new life. This does not mean that the student must simply look on while evil runs riot, but rather that he must seek even in evil that side through which he may transform it into good. He will then see more and more clearly that evil and imperfection may best be combated by the creation of the good and the perfect. The student knows that out of nothing, nothing can be created, but also that the imperfect can be transformed into the perfect. Anyone developing within himself the disposition to create, will soon find himself capable of facing evil in the right way. It must be clearly realized that the purpose of this training is to build and not to destroy. The student should therefore bring with him the good will for sincere and devoted work, and not the intention to criticize and destroy. He should be capable of devotion, for he must learn what he does not yet know; he should look reverently on that which discloses itself.

59

We thus 60 . insufficiently prepared. and not to willful personal judgment. the conditions attached to esoteric training would be surprising to none. we can learn nothing more. though in their own opinion they are untiringly active. the more do we require the faculty of listening with quiet devotion. And if in learning the student seeks straight thinking and sound judgment. and can only be brought up from their deep shafts after all obstacles have been cleared away. But there is one and only one opinion regarding higher truths and this one opinion is within reach of all who. he need not stunt his devotion by doubts and suspicions. the more delicate are the processes in which we are engaged. We are not reduced to service subjection in listening to some information with quiet devotion and because we do not at once oppose it with our own opinion. it is far better not to judge than to judge adversely. Some come to realize that they are making no progress. The reason is that they have not grasped the meaning of work and devotion in the right way. and so forth. have so risen that they can really behold truth and contemplate it. leads to progress. these are the fundamental qualities which must be demanded of the student. become subtle and delicate in comparison with the processes of the ordinary intellect and of life in the physical world. No truth is forced on anyone. It is true that everyone could find this way unaided. By esoteric training this way is shortened. We can wait until later for a true understanding. due preparation must first be undergone. through work and devotion. center in learning. and learning pursued without devotion will be the least conducive to progress. and that each can and must find them for himself But they lie deeply buried. no dogma is proclaimed. all life and activity in the world of the spirit. Only the love of work. judge in accordance with their pet theories. however. but only perhaps after many incarnations. we must have absolutely the good will to be learners. The higher we climb the ladder of knowledge. But before such an opinion can be reached. Work done for the sake of success will be the least successful. All perception of truth. Therefore if our sole intention is to judge.Work and devotion. a way only is pointed out. It is indeed true that truth and the higher life abide in every soul. Such advice is found in spiritual science. their habitual ways of thought. We should always bear in mind that we do not need to learn what we are already able to judge. Only the experienced can advise how this may be done. Esoteric training. Anyone having advanced some way in the attainment of higher knowledge knows that he owes everything to quiet attention and active reflection. It is for this reason that men arrive at such different opinions and points of view regarding the higher regions. Just as there is only one correct opinion concerning a mathematical problem. and not of success. so also is this true with regard to the higher worlds. Opinions differing from the one true opinion can only be arrived at when people. If this were only considered. If we cannot understand something. The more the sphere of our activity widens out before us.

In the following chapter. it will be shown how this development affects the higher elements of the human organism (the soul-organism or astral body. and it will be possible to penetrate them in a deeper sense.) In this way the indications here given will be placed in a new light. and the spirit or thought-body. and in further connection with the above.reach more quickly a point from which we can cooperate in those worlds where the salvation and evolution of man are furthered by spiritual work. This brings to an end the indications to be given in connection with the attainment of knowledge of higher worlds. 61 .

) In this astral body desires. For only those who know such things as they are here communicated can undertake in full consciousness the exercises that lead to knowledge of the higher worlds. The exercises described in the preceding chapters. but not to exact clairvoyance in the sense of spiritual science. Theosophy. the clear-cut concept of the logical thinker is experienced as a yellowish figure with sharply defined outline. and that failure to pursue this training with open eyes may lead to mediumship. soul and spirit. changeable outlines. while the thoughts of people accessible to the points of view of others are seen to have mobile. the confused thought of the muddled head appears as a figure with vague outline. a pure and noble thought finds its expression in a reddish-violet radiance. The thoughts of a person with one-sided. in the center of which the physical body is discernible. if practiced in the right way. queer views appear sharply outlined but immobile.) The further the student advances in his inner development. When the clairvoyant speaks of “seeing red. passions. Some effects produced upon the soul of the student will here be indicated. at the same time.” he means: “I have an experience. create the impression of a dark red radiance with a definite shape. (In all these and the following descriptions it must be noted that by seeing a color. spiritual seeing is meant. the more regular will be the differentiation within his astral body. a mere color-vision may easily be mistaken for a genuine clairvoyant experience.VI Some Results of Initiation One of the fundamental principles of true spiritual science is that the one who devotes himself to its study should do so with full consciousness. psycho-spiritually luminous to a certain degree. and ideas become visible in a spiritual way. and may be compared to a cloud. he should attempt nothing and practice nothing without knowledge of the effect produced. which is equivalent to the physical experience when an impression of red is received. Without the latter no genuine esoteric training is possible. The latter is only perceptible to the clairvoyant. always explain to those striving for higher knowledge the effects produced on body. for instance. (A description will be found in the author's book. lusts. If this point is over-looked. The latter is confused and undifferentiated in the case of a person of undeveloped inner 62 . Sensual appetites. in a psycho-spiritual way. involve certain changes in the organism of the soul (astral body). A teacher of spiritual science who gives advice or instruction will. for it must be understood that all groping in the dark is discouraged.” This mode of expression is here used because it is perfectly natural to the clairvoyant. if his advice and instructions be followed.

life; yet the clairvoyant can perceive even the unorganized astral body as a figure standing out distinctly from its environment. It extends from the center of the head to the middle of the physical body, and appears like an independent body possessing certain organs. The organs now to be considered are perceptible to the clairvoyant near the following part of the physical body: the first between the eyes; the second near the larynx; the third in the region of the heart; the fourth in the so-called pit of the stomach; the fifth and sixth are situated in the abdomen. These organs are technically known as wheels, chakrams, or lotus flowers. They are so called on account of their likeness to wheels or flowers, but of course it should be clearly understood that such an expression is not to be applied more literally than is the term “wings” when referring to the two halves of the lungs. Just as there is no question of wings in the case of the lungs, so, too, in the case of the lotus flowers the expression must be taken figuratively. In undeveloped persons these lotus flowers are dark in color, motionless and inert. In the clairvoyant, however, they are luminous, mobile, and of variegated color. Something of this kind applies to the medium, though in a different way; this question, however, need not be pursued here any further. Now, when the student begins his exercises, the lotus flowers become more luminous; later on they begin to revolve. When this occurs, clairvoyance begins. For these flowers are the sense-organs of the soul, and their revolutions express the fact that the clairvoyant perceives supersensibly. What was said previously concerning spiritual seeing applies equally to these revolutions and even to the lotus flowers themselves. No one can perceive the supersensible until he has developed his astral senses in this way. Thanks to the spiritual organ situated in the vicinity of the larynx, it becomes possible to survey clairvoyantly the thoughts and mentality of other beings, and to obtain a deeper insight into the true laws of natural phenomena. The organ situated near the heart permits of clairvoyant knowledge of the sentiments and disposition of other souls. When developed, this organ also makes it possible to observe certain deeper forces in animals and plants. By means of the organ in the so-called pit of the stomach, knowledge is acquired of the talents and capacities of souls; by its means, too, the part played by animals, plants, stones, metals, atmospheric phenomena and so on in the household of nature becomes apparent. The organ in the vicinity of the larynx has sixteen petals or spokes; the one in the region of the heart twelve, and the one in the pit of the stomach ten. Now certain activities of the soul are connected with the development of these organs, and anyone devoting himself to them in a certain definite way contributes something to the development of the corresponding organs. In the sixteen-petalled lotus, eight of its sixteen petals were

63

developed in the remote past during an earlier stage of human evolution. Man himself contributed nothing to this development; he received them as a gift from nature, at a time when his consciousness was in a dull, dreamy condition. At that stage of human evolution they were in active use, but the manner of their activity was only compatible with that dull state of consciousness. As consciousness became clearer and brighter, the petals became obscured and ceased their activity. Man himself can now develop the remaining eight petals by means of conscious exercises, and thereby the whole lotus flower becomes luminous and mobile. The acquisition of certain faculties depends on the development of each one of the sixteen petals. Yet, as already shown, only eight can be consciously developed; the remainder then appear of their own accord. The development proceeds in the following manner. The student must first apply himself with care and attention to certain functions of the soul hitherto exercised by him in a careless and inattentive manner. There are eight such functions. The first is the way in which ideas and conceptions are acquired. In this respect people usually allow themselves to be led by chance alone. They see or hear one thing or another and form their ideas accordingly. As long as this is the case the sixteen petals of the lotus flower remain ineffective. It is only when the student begins to take his self-education in hand, in this respect, that the petals become effective. His ideas and conceptions must be guarded; each single idea should acquire significance fore him; he should see it in a definite message instructing him concerning the things of the outer world, and he should derive no satisfaction from ideas devoid of such significance. He must govern his mental life so that it becomes a true mirror of the outer world, and direct his effort to the exclusion of incorrect ideas from his soul. The second of these functions is concerned with the control of resolutions. The student must not resolve upon even the most trifling act without wellfounded and thorough consideration. Thoughtless and meaningless actions should be foreign to his nature. He should have well-considered grounds for everything he does, and abstain from everything to which no significant motive urges him. The third function concerns speech. The student should utter no word that is devoid of sense and meaning; all talking for the sake of talking draws him away from his path. He must avoid the usual kind of conversation, with its promiscuous discussion of indiscriminately varied topics. This does not imply his preclusion from intercourse with his fellows. It is precisely in such intercourse that his conversation should develop to significance. He is ready to converse with everyone, but he does so thoughtfully and with thorough deliberation. He never speaks without grounds for what he says. He seeks to use neither too many nor too few words.

64

The fourth is the regulation of outward action. The student tries to adjust his actions in such a way that they harmonize with the actions of his fellow-men and with the events in his environment. He refrains from actions which are disturbing to others and in conflict with his surroundings. He seeks to adjust his actions so that they combine harmoniously with his surroundings and with his position in life. When an external motive causes him to act he considers how he can best respond. When the impulse proceeds from himself he weighs with minute care the effects of his activity. The fifth function includes the management of the whole of life. The student endeavors to live in conformity with both nature and spirit. Never overhasty, he is also never indolent. Excessive activity and laziness are equally alien to him. He looks upon life as a means for work and disposes it accordingly. He regulates his habits and the care of his health in such a way that a harmonious whole is the outcome. The sixth is concerned with human endeavor. The student tests his capacities and proficiency, and conducts himself in the light of such selfknowledge. He attempts nothing beyond his powers, yet seems to omit nothing within their scope. On the other hand, he sets himself aims that have to do with the ideals and the great duties of a human being. He does not mechanically regard himself as a wheel in the vast machinery of mankind but seeks to comprehend the tasks of his life, and to look out beyond the limit of the daily and trivial. He endeavors to fulfill his obligations ever better and more perfectly. The seventh deals with the effort to learn as much from life as possible. Nothing passes before the student without giving him occasion to accumulate experience which is of value to him for life. If he has performed anything wrongly or imperfectly, he lets this be an incentive for meeting the same contingency later on rightly and perfectly. When others act he observes them with the same end in view. He tries to gather a rich store of experience, ever returning to it for counsel; nor indeed will he ever do anything without looking back on experiences from which he can derive help in his decisions and affairs. Finally, the eighth is as follows: The student must, from time to time, glance introspectively into himself, sink back into himself, take counsel with himself, form and test the fundamental principles of his life, run over in his thoughts the sum total of his knowledge, weigh his duties, and reflect upon the content and aim of life. All these things have been mentioned in the preceding chapters; here they are merely recapitulated in connection with the development of the sixteen-petalled lotus. By means of these exercises the latter will become ever more and more perfect, for it is upon such exercises that the development of clairvoyance depends. The

65

and honesty are in this connection creative forces. Now this lotus flower may be made to develop in another way by following certain other instructions. rational thinking is employed in the training. willfulness and so on in a person who hitherto was free from these defects. as a person habitually lives. even though I believe my intentions to be ever so good. The regulation of the above activities of the soul in the manner described causes the sixteen-petalled lotus to shine in glorious hues. The student must realize. haughtiness. though protracted and difficult. envy. These things must then no longer be laborious. while the new petals remain stunted. but also in errors and instability in ordinary life. The distorted development of a lotus flower results not only in illusions and fantastic conceptions. should a certain degree of clairvoyance be acquired. and dishonesty are destructive forces. but must have become a matter of course. Yet it must be noted that the faculty of clairvoyance cannot make its appearance before a definite degree of development of the soul has been reached. It is here as with the child which needs must burn itself when it touches fire. lead to the true goal and cannot but strengthen morally. and of further importance that he should practice the greatest clarity of 66 . There must be no need for him to be continually watching himself and urging himself on to live in this way. This will ensue especially if too little logical. It cannot appear as long as it is irksome for the student to regulate his life in this manner. If I think or say anything that does not conform with reality. But all such methods are rejected by true spiritual science. Faulty training may easily result in the re-appearance of the earlier petals alone. that actual deeds are needed. and not merely good intentions. I kill something in my spiritual organs. Whoever thinks and speaks what is contrary to truth destroys something in the germ of his sixteen-petalled lotus. the more quickly will he develop this faculty. They are easier to follow than those here described. Such a development may be the cause of timidity. It is of supreme importance that the student should be a rational and clear-thinking person. while mendacity. All the effort and attention of the student must be devoted to the remaining eight. The latter. even though it did so out of ignorance. for they lead to the destruction of physical health and to moral ruin. It has already been explained that eight of the sixteen petals of this lotus flower were developed in a remote past. however. and that these will re-appear of themselves in the course of esoteric development. vanity. It must all have become a matter of habit. Truthfulness.better the student's thoughts and speech harmonize with the processes in the outer world. deceitfulness. uprightness. and imparts to it a definite movement. He is still unfit as long as the activities described above are a matter of special pre-occupation for him The first traces of clairvoyance only appear when he has reached the point of being able to live in the specified way.

so as to collect and have the largest possible number of facts at his disposal when the time comes to form his opinions. until I had acquired reliable grounds for forming my judgment. For the teacher has quite other means of estimating their progress than the students' own statements. too.speech. were already existent and in active use in a remote stage of human evolution. Caution in the formation and pronouncement of judgments becomes. Quite the contrary would have been the case had I. People who begin to have some presentiment of supersensible things are apt to wax talkative on this subject. thereby retarding their normal development. It would be much better for them to remain entirely silent on this subject.) The twelve-petalled lotus situated in the region of the heart is developed in a similar way. Hence these six petals need not now be especially developed in esoteric training. The eight petals now under consideration always become a little hardened through such statements. they appear of themselves and begin to revolve when the student sets to work on the other six. suspended judgment. Bluish-red and reddish-pink shades color the lotus flower as the result of such circumspection. The following example taken. he lets them pass over him silently. The result is an unfavorable influence upon my sixteen-petalled lotus. by degrees. Here again he learns to promote this development by consciously controlling and directing certain inner activities in a special way. On the other hand his receptivity for impressions and experiences increases. I am thereby obliged to reverse my previous judgment. Suppose I hear a piece of news and thereupon immediately form an opinion. will illustrate this point. the special characteristic of the student. and remained silent both inwardly in thought and outwardly in word concerning the whole affair. Shortly afterwards I receive some further news which does not tally with the previous information. 67 . At the beginning of their instruction. (Students will recognize in the conditions attached to the development of the sixteen-petalled lotus the instructions given by the Buddha to his disciples for the Path. Only someone who has achieved a certain degree of clarity should speak about them. The less one talks about these matters the better. whereas in the opposite case dark red and orange shades appear. and to content themselves with mentioning only whether they have been successful or unsuccessful in performing the exercises and observing the instructions given them. Yet there is no question here of teaching Buddhism. but of describing conditions governing development which are the natural outcome of spiritual science. for the sake of clarity. students are as a rule astonishes at the teacher's lack of curiosity concerning their own experiences. whereas they should be kept soft and supple. Half its petals. The fact that these conditions correspond with certain teachings of the Buddha is no reason for not finding them true in themselves. in the first place. not from the supersensible world but from ordinary life.

as figures. a form which expresses them. when developed. Quite different perceptions are received through the twelve-petalled lotus. while a kindly thought is often formed like an opening flower. To begin with. The latter perceives forms. and the more strictly everything of illogical nature is avoided. be likened to warmth and cold. The clairvoyant in whom this sense is developed can describe. Rays of soul-warmth issue from every manifestation of growth and development. as applied to the soul. so that the above-mentioned example may be regarded as a hypothetical case in behalf of clarity. through the sixteen-petalled lotus. These perceptions may. significant thoughts are regular and symmetrical in form. and at the same time endeavor in every case to retain this same method in his own thinking. A clairvoyant equipped with this faculty feels this warmth and cold streaming out from the forms discerned by the sixteen-petalled lotus. reveals to the clairvoyant a deep understanding of the processes of nature. and so on. the twelve-petalled lotus is developed by inwardly controlling the trains of thought. in a sense. It would be noted in passing that esoteric training never develops one organ without the other. The twelve-petalled lotus. pronged form. while a clairvoyant in whom both senses were developed would also notice what can only be described as soul-warmth. Clear-cut. the more suitable will be the form this sense organ develops. A revengeful thought. in the kindly thought. so. 68 . He should not. gives an impression of cold.It must be clearly understood that the perceptions of each single organ of soul or sprit bear a different character. not rigid motionless figures but mobile forms filled with life. the figure described above. for every mode of thought and for every law of nature. Had he developed the sixteen and not the twelve-petalled lotus he would only perceive. for example. but merely by pure chance. flowing from the thought. ruin. while everything in the process of decay. destruction. The thoughts and mentality of other beings and the laws governing natural phenomena become manifest. Just as the sixteen-petalled lotus is developed by cultivating thoughts that conform with truth and are significant. however. The closer thought is made to follow upon thought. The twelve and sixteen-petalled lotus flowers transmit quite different perceptions. for instance. while confused thoughts have wavy outlines. too. assumes an arrow-like. The development of this sense may be furthered in the following manner. and make them conform to logic and sense. Thoughts that dart to and fro like will-o'-the-wisps and follow each other in no logical or rational sequence. the student endeavors to regulate his sequence of thought (control of thought). If the student hears illogical thoughts he immediately lets the right thoughts pass through his mind. He should rather silently co-ordinate the thoughts as they pour in upon him. Neither should he feel himself impelled to correct all the illogical thoughts expressed around him. destroy its form. withdraw in a loveless way from what is perhaps an illogical environment in order to further his own development.

for if he acts from day to day with variable intent he will never develop the faculty here considered. but seeks to put himself into the other's position. A hundred failures cannot rob him of this faith. Timidity and skepticism are banished from his being. He ever remains receptive for everything that confronts him. He harbors a faith in the power of his intentions.” He is far rather ready to test and rectify his views and opinions. The student meets every human being and every creature with this trust. but here again the perfect symmetry of its 69 . and he trusts in the efficacy of his undertakings. The intention has been to show their connection with the spiritual organ known as the twelvepetalled lotus flower. but accepts the inevitable. and eradicates the tendency to fluctuate between the seventh heaven of joy and the depths of despair. is baneful for the lotus here in question. fortune and advancement alike find him ready armed. When the student performs some action he must see to it that his succeeding action follows in logical sequence. he never says to himself: “I don't believe it. and seeks rather to understand everything that comes under his notice. Should some trouble befall him he does not proceed to condemn and criticize. and lets it inspire his every action. so he. and also circumstances. This is the “faith which can move mountains. too. special instructions can be given to bring this lotus flower to fruition. but never a reason for giving up. as long as he can regard it as the right goal. Misfortune and danger. The third requirement is the cultivation of endurance (perseverance). The student suppresses all superfluous criticism of everything that is imperfect. The fifth requirement is impartiality toward everything that life brings. Upon hearing some information. all disharmony of action. The student is impervious to all influences which would divert him from the goal he has set himself. For him. it contradicts my present opinions. As before. does not refuse them an intelligent sympathy. All inconstancy. In this connection we speak of faith and trust.An equal consistency in his actions forms the second requirement (control of actions). He does not consider the opinions of others merely from his own standpoint. obstacles contain a challenge that impels him to surmount them. and endeavors to the best of his ability to give the matter a turn for the best. The reader will recognize in the qualities here described the six attributes which the candidate for initiation strives to acquire. evil and bad. The student endeavors to retain his composure in the face of joy and sorrow. creatures.” The sixth requirement is the cultivation of a certain inner balance (equanimity). The fourth requirement is forbearance (tolerance) toward persons. Even as the sun does not withdraw its light from the bad and the evil.

in addition to all that has been stated. and he would entirely lose his way in life. the regulation of life in the way described can be advantageous to all who cannot or will not undergo esoteric training. certain other injunctions are observed which can only be imparted to the student by word of mouth. It is just for this reason that patience is so necessary in these matters. Consider the following case. In this case. Should these flowers be brought to fruition before they have quietly attained their correct form. Should he attempt esoteric training without conforming to them. Someone is traveling by railway. timid. He would attain a certain clairvoyance. should a certain clairvoyance be attained. may. Formerly he at least stood firmly within the physical world. A person may become intolerant. People as a rule do not realize by what factors their sudden ideas and memories are dominated. and for this reason shun them or hate them. Yet the instructions given above do actually lead to genuine esoteric training. and how they are produced. for instance. the qualities in question may take an evil instead of a good direction. For it does not fail to produce an effect upon the organism of the soul. be the victim of greater blindness than before. acquire some feeling for the sentiments of others. An inner training of a particularly intimate character is necessary for the development of the ten-petalled lotus flower. and more-over. by reason of the inner coldness that overwhelms him when he hears repugnant opinions. suddenly is thought diverges. now he looks beyond this physical world and grows confused about it before acquiring a firm footing in a higher world. his mind is busy with one thought. the observance of these principles is indispensable. and instead of perceiving the truth he would be subject to deceptions and illusions. he 70 .form depends on the development of the qualities mentioned. this could only result in his entering the higher worlds with inadequate organs. but their form is dependent on the method of life described above. All power of distinguishing truth from error would then perhaps fail him. It must ever be borne in mind that the instructions given in esoteric training may go no further than is compatible with the willing readiness shown to develop the lotus flowers to their regular shape. This is of particular importance in the initial stages of clairvoyance. the neglect of which results in this organ being formed into a caricature of its proper shape. The development of this organ may be accelerated if. or he may behave in an objectionable manner. even though slowly. Their maturity can be brought about by the special instructions given in esoteric training. mere caricatures would be the result. or contentious toward his environment. for it is now a question of learning consciously to control and dominate the sense-impressions themselves. but for the most part. As regards the esoteric student. This may even reach the point where. for it is only by this means that a source of countless illusions and fancies is avoided. he is unable to listen.

he went to visit an acquaintance. He remained unconscious of the impression he had received. It is just this source which must be dammed up by all who seek to develop their ten-petalled lotus flower. Reflection upon these matters will show how great is the source of illusion and fantasy contained in such associations. How much in life occurs in such a way! How great is the part played in our life by things we hear and learn. He must practice the power of hearing nothing. He must be shielded as by an inner armor against 71 . as though of its own accord. and thus believes that it all came to him of its own accords. He did not notice that in looking through the window he had caught sight of a person who resembled another intimately connected with the recollected experience. cannot bear a certain color. even in the greatest disturbance. and he actually evades all impressions to which he does not voluntarily respond. Someone reads in the paper about the death of a well-known person. And indeed it is quite true that the thought occurred to him yesterday. but of the effect it produced.recollects an experience that befell him years ago and interweaves it with his present thought. Deeply hidden characteristics in other souls can be perceived by this organ. and if he does not voluntarily take notice of something it is actually non-existent for him. and forthwith claims to have had a presentiment of it yesterday. He remains conscious. For this purpose it is necessary that the student should control and dominate everything that seeks to influence him from outside. For him only those things exist to which he turns his eye or his ear. although he had neither heard nor seen anything that might have given rise to such a thought. The student must avoid all vacuous gazing and mechanical listening. and he must make his eyes unimpressionable to things of which he does not particularly take notice. by an effort of the will he only allows such things to impress him to which his attention is directed. that this particular person would die. The greater the energy and inner activity devoted to this work. Many things leave their mark upon the soul while remaining outside the pale of consciousness. Innumerable illusions are based upon such associations. This can only be achieved by the development of a powerful inner life. The following may occur. only one thing escaped his attention: two or three hours before this thought occurred to him yesterday. but his eyes unconsciously fell on the announcement of the dangerous illness of the person in question. if he does not will to hear. the more extensively will this faculty be attained. he did not actually read it. a newspaper lay on the table. for instance. If he sees something it is because he wills to see it. but their truth depends on the attainment of immunity from the above-mentioned illusions. not of what he saw. and yet this impression resulted in his presentiment. without our consciously realizing the connection! Someone. He should reach the point of really receiving no impressions beyond those he wishes to receive. but does not realize that this is due to the fact that the schoolmaster who used to worry him many years ago wore a coat of that color.

Only by such severe self-discipline can the ten-petalled lotus flower attain its proper form. he will combat it and endeavor to establish a conscious relation between himself and the thing in question. If this strict self-discipline be accompanied by meditation as prescribed in esoteric training.all unconscious impressions. the inclinations and passions of the soul. but rather something which he performs out of love. the soul must rather learn to obey these laws and duties out of its own free inclination. In this connection the student must devote special care to his thought-life. the lotus flower in the region of the pit of the stomach comes to maturity in the right way. He goes still further. also the forces and the hidden attributes of nature. In this way the unconscious elements that intrude into his soul will become fewer and fewer. for it can only be achieved as the result of complete mastery and control of the whole personality through consciousness of self. He rejects all casual ideas and does not connect this thought with another until he has investigated the origin of the latter. The student must not feel duty to be an oppressive power to which he unwillingly submits. and light and color of a spiritual kind are now added to the form and warmth perceptible to the organs described above. and he must learn really to hold at a distance everything to which he should not or does not wish to direct his attention. for the play of unconscious memories is here exceedingly active. The student's inner life must become a life of attention. Still greater difficulty attends the development of the six-petalled lotus flower situated in the center of the body. for instance. If this were not the case. so that body. he feels a particular antipathy for something. The colored aura of living creatures then becomes visible. The body must be so ennobled and purified that its organs incite to nothing that is not in the service of soul and spirit. If. soul and spirit form one harmonious whole. and he must perfect himself in this way to the extent of being 72 . He singles out a particular thought and endeavors to link with it only such other thoughts as he can himself consciously and voluntarily produce. many people would possess this inner sense. This inner sense remains ineffective as long as the powerful outer sense smother and benumb it. the thoughts and ideas of the spirit must be tuned to perfect unison. The talents and faculties of other beings are thereby revealed. dominating it with laws and commandments. all that is around us manifests its spiritual attributes. The soul must not be impelled through the body to lusts and passions which are antagonistic to pure and noble thought. It must be understood that the very greatest care is necessary at this stage of development. for it comes almost immediately into evidence when the impressions delivered by the outer senses are held so completely under control that they become dependent on nothing save attention or inattention. The functions of the body. His task is to develop a free soul that maintains equilibrium between body and spirit. Yet the spirit must not stand like a slave-driver over the soul.

something more than this security is required when. however. A wise renunciation may be a far greater achievement than the struggle for something which. He must no longer require to curb his passions. in as much as they of their own accord follow the good. it interferes with esoteric development. This entry into the spiritual world proper must always run parallel with the development of the lotus flowers. The development of the lotus flowers alone does not assure sufficient security in these higher worlds. if a certain stimulant be avoided for the purpose of selfpurification. The latter will now be described before the remaining lotus flowers and the further organization of the soul-body are discussed. until more favorable physical conditions. though only when their existence is manifested in the astral or soul-world. The development of this lotus flower. through the development of the sixpetalled lotus flower. For example. In this case it may actually be a question of renouncing the ideal to be attained. no one can pass a certain stage of esoteric development. remains unattainable. Nor does it matter whether this desire proceeds from the soul or the body.) The development of the soul-body in the manner described above permits perception in a supersensible world. The six-petalled lotus flower. a renunciation of this kind contributes more toward development than the opposite course. when developed. beings belonging to a world so completely different from the world known to his physical senses. shall be forthcoming. otherwise the student will fall into error and confusion. still higher organs are necessary. but anyone wishing to find his way in 73 . for a virtue practiced under constraint if futile. And yet. is used because to clairvoyant perception the impression received spiritually corresponds to the impression received physically when the physical body is perceived. this proves that the body craves the stimulant. however great the effort made not to humor it. passion (or soul). He would undoubtedly be able to see. but he would remain incapable of forming a correct estimate of what he saw. living beings of independent existence are revealed to his spirit. and that abstinence from it is of no value. (This expression — soul-body — although obviously contradictory when taken literally. this deprivation will only prove helpful if the body suffers no harm from it. So long as self-chastisement is necessary. If there is any lust remaining. Now. perhaps in another life. permits intercourse with beings of higher worlds.free to abandon himself to the functions of the senses. for these should be so purified that they lose the power to drag him down to their level. Should the contrary to be the case. for no one can be easily confused who has attained perfect equilibrium between sense (or body). Indeed. is not advisable unless the student has made great progress on that path of esoteric development which enables him to raise his spirit into a still higher world. the development of the six-petalled lotus flower itself provides a certain security against confusion and instability. under given conditions. and idea (or spirit).

besides the soul-body which is larger than the other two — etheric and physical bodies — and interpenetrates them both. If he exerts this faculty in the case of some person standing before him. just as the action of the heart or stomach is beyond our jurisdiction. development consists 74 . independent of human will and consciousness. It is an extremely delicate and finely organized structure. The etheric body has approximately the size and form of the physical body. To avoid this he must acquire the faculty of hearing what is called the inner world. otherwise he would become a plaything for external forces and powers. These currents and movements are. and need not in any way be connected with the hypothetical ether of physics. By these currents. The student must acquire the power of regulating and controlling the movement of his spiritual organs independently and with complete consciousness. The mere mobility of the lotus flowers is not sufficient. The word ether here is merely used to suggest the fineness of the body in question. and this involves the development not only of the soul-body but also of the etheric body. (I beg the physicist not to be disturbed at the expression “etheric body”. for this purpose the soul-body must be extinguished by an effort of attentiveness in the manner described above. to begin with. Countless currents stream through it in every direction. the clairvoyant can extinguish a physical body from his field of observation so that it becomes physically transparent to him. including animals and plants. The latter is that tenuous body revealed to the clairvoyant as a kind of double of the physical body. Anyone capable of observing it will find a color which is actually non-existent for sense perception but to which the color of the young peach-blossom may be comparable. Just as a person can divert his attention from something in front of him so that it becomes non-existent for him. at a certain stage. This corresponds on a higher plane to an exercise in attentiveness on a lower plane. Even in minerals traces of it can be observed. the etheric body can be examined alone. and forms to a certain extent an intermediate step between the soul nature and the physical body. Otherwise the etheric body will present an ever changing picture owing to its interpenetration by the soul-body. life itself is maintained and regulated. Now.) It is possible for one equipped with clairvoyant powers consciously to suggest away the physical body of a person.this world must not remain stationary at this stage of development.) Its ground-color is different from any of the seven colors contained in the rainbow. there remains visible to his clairvoyant sight only the etheric body. (See the description on the author's book Theosophy. possesses an etheric body. the particles of the etheric body are in continual motion. and this independence remains unaltered so long as we do not take our development in hand in the sense of acquiring supersensible faculties. Every body that has life. so that it practically fills the same space. If desired. For.

so that he is inwardly entirely filled with it. They permeate each petal and regulate its revolutions. The twelve-petalled lotus flower has a particularly close connection with this central organ. They consist of the above-mentioned and similar exercises in meditation and concentration which.precisely in adding to the unconscious currents and movements of the etheric body others that are consciously produced and controlled. and beyond it to the astral body. but a most complicated structure. and who are unquestionably in a position to know whether the directions they give lead to the exact results desired. the greater the circumference to which these rays extend. proceeding on the one side to the sixteen and the two-petalled lotus flowers. then streaming out at the points of the petals. The center is in reality not a mere point. If the student follows the directions that have been given him. A simple start is made with a view to the deepening of the logical activity of the mind and the producing of an inward intensification of thought. if correctly practiced. he introduces into his etheric body currents and movements which are in harmony with the laws and the evolution of the world to which he belongs. Consequently these instructions are reflections of the great laws of cosmic evolution. they lose themselves in outer space. much has already been achieved by the student which can result in the formation of certain quite definite currents and movements in his etheric body. capable of rapid transformation. six and four petals. The student must at certain times let these instructions permeate his soul with their content. and on the other. Other forms and streams of color radiate from this organ to the other parts of the body. from which radiate currents and movements in the greatest possible variety of colors and forms. it is concentrated in one point which is held entirely under 75 . It will also be evident beyond doubt that directions for the development of supersensible faculties can only be the concern of those who have themselves experienced everything which they propose to awaken in others. The higher the development of a person. The object of this development is the formation of a kind of center in the region of the physical heart. When esoteric development has progressed so far that the lotus flowers begin to stir. Thought it thereby made free and independent of all sense impressions and experiences. It is for this reason that the very greatest care must be devoted to the development of the twelve-petalled lotus. completely penetrating and illuminating it. a most wonderful organ. to the flowers of eight. The above will give an idea of the delicate and intimate nature of esoteric training. and of the accuracy needed if the development is to be regular and correct. It glows and shimmers with every shade of color and displays forms of great symmetry. for an imperfection in the latter would result in irregular formation of the whole structure. produce the results described. The most important of these currents flow to the lotus flowers. The currents flow directly into it and through it. the lower side.

he must retain a firm footing upon the earth. This center is not yet in the region of the heart but in the head. He begins to mingle his life with the life of his environment and can let it reverberate in the movements of his lotus flowers. All this is made possible through the radiations from the larynx assuming round forms. This again is effected by persevering with the exercises in concentration and meditation. Thus the individual becomes sensitive to these external streams. All things now acquire a new significance for him. but would lack all true insight into the connection between these higher worlds and the world of our senses. Whereas hitherto the etheric body was not closed to the outer world. And now the time has come to give the complete system of currents and movements its center situated in the region of the heart. and at this point also the stage is reached when the student becomes gifted with the inner word. No esoteric training can be successful which does not first create this center. these currents now have to pass through this membrane. is an unconditional necessity for man at the present stage of evolution. The currents described above place him in touch with the inner being of the world to which he belongs. as it were. and it appears to the clairvoyant as the point of departure for movements and currents. is then moved lower down. so that the life currents from the universal ocean of life flowed freely in and out. these currents branch out and ramify in the most delicate manner and become. If the latter were first formed in the region of the heart the aspiring clairvoyant would doubtless obtain glimpses of the higher worlds. Hitherto this position depended upon external forces proceeding from the physical body. to the region of the larynx. 76 . As a further development. and speak to him of their essential being. of which a number flow to the two-petalled lotus and thence form undulating currents along the hands. a kind of web which then encompasses the entire etheric body as though with a network. The clairvoyant must not become a visionary. Then the currents of the etheric body radiate from this point and illumine the astral space surrounding the individual. once duly fixed. Thus a preliminary center is formed for the currents of the etheric body. Continued practice enables the student to determine for himself the position of this etheric body. This is effected by further exercises in concentration. This. they become perceptible to him. however. Through further development the student is able to turn his etheric body to all sides. The center in the head. This faculty is effected by currents moving approximately along both hands and centered in the two-petalled lotus in the region of the eyes. They become as it were spiritually audible in their innermost self.control.

They pervade him with a rapture of which he had not dreamed before.” Goethe. For the tone of their words follows the movements and rhythms which he has himself formed within himself. The same applies to the remaining three of the four attributes mentioned. The student must so train himself that. the transient. Faust II. for instance. The sayings of the Buddha and the Gospels. A mere intellectual understanding of what is included in these attributes is of no value. could content him. the first of these attributes: The discrimination between truth and appearance. faith and equanimity. they become a force on which he gladly lets his inner senses rest. in his observation of the outer world. If the student has advanced so far. he quietly and patiently ever and again repeats the attempt. creates an inner harmony with these movements. Consider. The third rests in the practice of the six qualities already mentioned in the preceding pages: thought-control. And at the end he will naturally single out the essential and the true at a glance. he distinguishes in everything that confronts him between the non-essential elements and those that are significant and essential. with perfect inner peace. too. The first is the faculty of discriminating in thoughts between truth and appearance or mere opinion.At this point the spiritual world is entered. however. The fourth attribute is the love of inner freedom. whereas formerly the non-essential. In esoteric training there is question of four attributes which must be acquired on the so-called preparatory path for the attainment of higher knowledge. perseverance. as a matter of course. He will only succeed in this if. 77 . as against what is merely apparent. the student listening to the wisdom of the Buddha unites his life with that of the cosmic mysteries. control of actions. and because the latter are an image of certain cosmic rhythms which also at certain points repeat themselves and revert to former modes. For the esoteric student. tolerance. The many repetitions in the sayings of the Buddha are not comprehensible to people of our present evolutionary stage. produce a new effect on him. Devotional surrender to them. “All that is transient is but a seeming” (“Alles Vergänglich ist nur ein Gleichnis. The second attribute is the correct estimation of what is inwardly true and real. ) is a truth which becomes an unquestionable conviction of the soul. he acquires a new understanding for all that the great teachers of humanity have uttered. for they correspond with certain movements in the etheric body. A fact must here be pointed out which can only be understood in the light of what has been said above. He can now have positive knowledge that a Buddha or the Evangelists did not utter their own revelations but those which flowed into them from the inmost being of all things. They must be so incorporated into the soul that they form the basis of inner habits. for instance.

The actual development of these centers is of course dependent on the exercises in concentration described above. the latter make for development and the four attributes bring to fruition. as already indicated. results from the correct estimation of what is true as against what is apparent and non-essential. not an underestimation of them. Once the center in the larynx has been prepared. the free control of the etheric body and its enclosure within a network covering. and. They gave them for the good reason that they were great initiates.Now these four inner habits do actually produce a transformation of the delicate human etheric body. as explained above. it is to this center that the life-currents of the etheric body must be directed. every little thing accomplished. This is liberation. To live in the sense of these great cosmogonies means to work for the attainment of personal spiritual perfection. the center in the head already described is formed and the center in the region of the larynx prepared. If the student acquires this faculty of estimation. and desired that their followers should gradually achieve the development of this finer nature. They can be found in one form or another in all the great cosmogonies that take account of the spiritual world. The most trifling action. the individual frees himself from everything which depends only upon the faculties of his own personal nature. Self-perfection is by no 78 . The founders of the great cosmogonies did not give mankind these teachings from some vague feeling. By the first. For those fetters constrain the individual to regard tings and beings in a manner corresponding to his own personal traits. and it is merely a question of being aware of this importance. But he must not think that he has to perform only such actions which appear significant when judged by the standard of a mere intellectual estimate. The secrets of the spiritual world gain access to his inner self. discrimination between truth and appearance. A correct estimation of the affairs of daily life is required. Out of their knowledge did they shape their moral teachings. has something of importance in the great cosmic household. they are connected with the development of the twelve-petalled lotus in the region of the heart. Only by so doing can man become a servant of the world and of humanity. It will be clear from the above that the instructions given in esoteric training exert a determining influence reaching the innermost depths of human nature. He ceases to view things from his own separate standpoint. and the boundaries of his own narrow self fettering him to this point of view disappear. the facts of the higher worlds will gradually become perceptible to him. Such are the instructions regarding the four qualities mentioned above. It is from this personal manner of regarding things that the student must become liberated and free. They knew how these would act upon the finer nature of man. serves to bring to fruition the etheric organ in the heart region. The fourth attribute. The six virtues of which the third attribute consists have already been dealt with. Once this attribute becomes an inner habit. the longing for liberation.

in other respects it is produced by causes which are beyond human influence.means self-seeking. says to himself: “that is beautiful. if only to a relatively small extent. and thus. and still less to those corresponding to animals. a desire that fills him. he must study those forms which he can realize to have proceeded from the feelings. This applies in a lesser degree to the forms belonging to plants. he must receive that enlightenment which enables him to adapt himself to this new existence. at the outset of this career the student can perceive little beyond this residuum. Their teachings can only be understood if it be remembered that they are the product of knowledge of the innermost depths of human nature. These figures. there appears within this whole world a species of form which remains almost entirely unaffected by human influence. his wishes. Their teaching flows into the soul of men. it adorns the garden. upon seeing it.” and then in the course of his observation changes this thought to: “that is useful. for instance. on others little or no influence. The more perfect a man is. the whole world moves forward. too.” The founders of the great cosmogonies are therefore the great initiates. he must notice that his own thoughts and feelings exert a powerful influence on certain of these figures. But there always remains a residuum of forms in this world upon which such influences are negligible. Quite consciously did they work to further this evolutionary process of humanity. an intention that he 79 . In the first place. and at the proper time. A completely new life opens out before the student when the development of his etheric body begins in the way described above. instincts. Yet he can find that these forms too are influenced by his own thoughts and feelings. The sixteenpetalled lotus. The student can convince himself that these forms proceed neither from minerals nor from artificial objects. enables him to perceive spiritual figures of a higher world. Now. He then learns what forms he himself produces. are full of life and motion. with humanity. for the imperfect man is an imperfect servant of the world and of humanity. He can only discover its nature by observing himself. in the course of his training. And man approaches these great leaders when he uplifts himself. and passions of human beings. again. the better does he serve the world. “If the rose adorns itself. from plants or animals. nor. The great initiates knew. To gain complete understanding. One kind of figure alters immediately if the observer. Indeed. are expressed in these forms. An instinct that dwells in him. and so on.” It is characteristic of the forms proceeding from minerals or from artificial objects that they change under the influence of every thought and every feeling directed upon them by the observer. He must learn now how different these figures can be when caused by different objects or beings. to their heights. and it is out of their knowledge that they shaped the ideals of humanity. for his will. in his own development. but this motion is only partially due to the influence of human thoughts and feelings.

for instance. just as though in the physical world he were surrounded by mirrors and could observe his physical body in that way. desires. The qualities of the soul appear likewise as in a mirror. upon entering this world. He can now observe that inner self as outer world. an entirely new method of judgment must be acquired. Now. before attaining insight into higher worlds.harbors. Thus he learns by gradual experience to deal with himself as hitherto he dealt with the beings around him. There his own desires and passions confront him in animal or. At this stage of development the student has reached the point where he can free himself from the illusion resulting from the initiation of his personal self. To higher knowledge. just as he hitherto regarded as outer world everything that affected his senses. If the student. it follows from what has been said that on this higher plan man's inner life of instincts. he would find himself confronted by the picture of his own soul as though by an enigma. it must be read in reverse. once he has created them. for apart from the fact that things actually pertaining to inner nature appear as outer world. Were the student to obtain an insight into these spiritual worlds without sufficient preparation regarding their nature. ideas displays itself outwardly in definite forms. Passions residing in the lower part of human nature can assume animal forms or similar shapes that hurl themselves against the individual. It is true that animal forms of this world are never quite similar to those of the physical world. a number is perceived. as a picture in a mirror: 265 would mean here in reality. the inner world appears as part of the outer world. A sphere is perceived as thought from its center. has learned by quiet and sincere self-observation to realized the qualities and the defects of his own character. 562. This inner perception must then be translated in the right way. but this striving outward appears in the mirrored reflection as an attack on the individual from whom they proceed. A wish directed toward an outer object appears as a form moving toward the person wishing. he will then. Thus by his conscious thoughts and feelings a person can exercise an influence on all forms which do not proceed from himself. When. and so forth. these passions are headed outward. just like all the other beings and objects. they also bear the character of mirrored reflections of what they really are. People who have failed to test themselves in this 80 . but over those which he brings about in the higher world. they seek satisfaction in the outer world. at the moment when his own inner self confronts him as a mirrored image. are all manifested in these forms: his whole character displays itself in this world of forms. Now. In a higher world man's inner being confronts him as a reflected image. in human forms. find strength and courage to conduct himself in the right way. more rarely. yet they possess a remote resemblance: inexpert observers often take them to be identical. In reality.

and are insufficiently acquainted with their own inner self. Or they may become alarmed at the vision and. and to regard these pictures as timely. and the reality to which these pictures correspond is actually within himself. would fatally obstruct his own progress. will not recognize themselves in their own mirrored image and will mistake it for an alien reality. Through inward application to the fundamental truths derived from spiritual science the student learns to set in motion and then to direct the currents proceeding form the lotus flower between the eyes. This is the moment when the two-petalled lotus in the region of the eyes is required. because they cannot endure the sight. Whereas. Thus is cannot be too often repeated that the only safe entrance into the higher worlds is at the end of a path leading through a genuine knowledge and estimate of one's own nature. of a spiritual kind are first encountered by the student on his progress into higher worlds. but from within this image there appears the true reality of his higher self. these currents disclose spiritual beings of higher worlds. so. He can refer the higher to something already known to him. too. Pictures. for his own self constitutes that psycho-spiritual element of which he is the best judge.way. so that his point of departure is on firm ground. His lower self is before him as a mirrored image. and if the image of his personality first appears to him in a higher world. In either case the person in question. Just as the light renders the physical objects visible. If he has thoroughly realized the nature of his own personality in the physical world. He should be far enough advanced to refrain from desiring reality of a more robust kind at this initial stage. no matter how many other spiritual beings appeared to him. he would find himself unable to discover their nature and qualities. deceive themselves into believing the whole thing is nothing but an illusion which cannot lead them anywhere. The currents form this lotus flower flow toward the higher realities in such a way that the movements in question are fully apparent to the individual. he is then able to compare the one with the other. It is absolutely necessary that the student should experience this spiritual aspect of his own inner self before progressing to higher spheres. the student finds it possible to bring his higher ego in contact with higher spiritual beings. If it now begins to stir. then. through prematurely attaining a certain stage of inner development. 81 . Then threads are spun from the latter to other and higher spiritual realities. He will soon meet something quite new within this world of pictures. Out of the picture of his lower personality the form of the spiritual ego becomes visible. and would soon feel the ground giving way beneath him.

were to refuse the forces coming to it through its mother.It is at this stage of development especially that the value of sound judgment and a training in clear and logical thought come to the fore. so. It would be as though a child. even during physical existence. all-around critical and reasoning faculty are possible even before spiritual things are actually perceived. is now born into conscious existence. The constitution of the spiritual self is similarly conditioned by the laws of common intelligence and reason that govern physical life. Natural. Just as the embryonic child in its incipient feeling for life learns to appreciate what is offered to it. through personal inward experience. and proposed to wait until it could procure them for itself. the laws of selfdevelopment must provide for the necessary capacities with which the higher self can enter existence. The entire world of sound and color would display itself before him. so. after its birth. At this stage of his esoteric development the student realizes. Just as the child when still in the maternal womb lives in accordance with the natural forces to which it has access. An insight into these teachings based on a deeply rooted feeling for truth. the higher self. acquired the requisite forces. A person attaining clairvoyance without such preparation would resemble a child born with eyes and ears but without a brain. out of a dim life instinct. The higher self. sound. is not sound and healthy. can man acquire the powers of the spiritual world before his higher self is born. so that this study becomes a preparation for clairvoyance. to too. The child's health depends upon the normal functioning of natural laws in the maternal womb. he must do this if the latter is to enter the world as a fully developed being.” for without inward application to the results of spiritual research there is no chance whatever of attaining genuine higher knowledge. during gestation. must enter that world with all the necessary organs and aptitudes if it is to be capable of life. The spiritual self matures in the physical self as a child in the mother's womb. but he would be helpless in it. Indeed. It would be quite wrong for anyone to say: “I cannot accept the teachings of spiritual science until I myself become a seer. too. Just as nature must provide for a child being born into the world with suitable eyes and ears. so can the non-seer appreciate the truth of the teachings of spiritual science. which hitherto slumbered unconsciously in an embryonic state. and a clear. through its organs of sense. all that had previously appealed to his sense of truth. These laws governing the development of the higher spiritual organs are none other than the laws of sound reason and morality of the physical world. too. He has now direct knowledge of his 82 . This is not a figurative but a positive birth in the spiritual world. rational life is the basis of all genuine spiritual development. the human higher self lives in accordance with the laws of the spiritual world. No one can give birth to a soundly constituted higher self whose life in thought and feeling. The esoteric knowledge must first be studied. to his intellect and reason. and the being now born. And even as the child. in the physical world.

and he realizes that the teachings and deeds of such men proceed from the inspiration of a higher world. He learns how his higher self is connected with exalted spiritual beings and forms with them a united whole. insight into the laws by which life in the physical world is regulated according to its spiritual connections. the law of karma. He can now mature to still higher faculties and. spiritual world. are the gifts which the student owes to his development at this stage: insight into his higher self. becomes for the seer an image of his own communion with the higher. by means of the life-currents of his etheric body. The socalled initiates of humanity now become vested with reality for him. His former faith. is only one of the forms which his higher being can adopt. He can now distinguish the imperishable in himself from the perishable. He sees how the lower self originates in a higher world. 83 . Personal insight into spiritual reality explains the great significance of these externally visible cults. He becomes aware that there are others above him who have already traversed the stages which still lie before him. thus attaining a high degree of independence from the restrictions of the physical body. he can comprehend the great differences between human beings in regard to their level of perfection. in their ceremonies. He owes this knowledge to his first personal glimpse into this higher world. sacraments.higher self. Thus it is said of a student who has reached this stage. It has been shown how the student. that is. by attaining this stage. He realizes that his lower self. then. He learns to recognize the law of his life. control the higher and actual life-element. that all doubt has vanished from him. becomes in truth a new being. too. He discerns the possibility of working down from his higher self in his lower self. his karma. then. and it is revealed to him how his higher nature outlasts his lower. These. constituting his present existence. Now. insight into the doctrine of the incarnation of this higher being in a lower. The various religions have presented. Religious service. and finally. he learns through personal insight to understand the doctrine of the incarnation of the higher self in the lower. It will become plain to him that he is part of a great spiritual complex and that his qualities and destiny are due to this connection. externally visible patterns of the higher spiritual beings and events. that is. None but those who have not penetrated to the depths of the great religions can fail to recognize this fact. based on reason and sound thoughts. so that he may perfect himself ever more and more. insight into the existence of the great initiates. and rites. is now replaced by knowledge and insight which nothing can undermine.

The truth is not presented to the mind. Disquieting dreams can also be traced to indigestible food. the student's dreams will no longer remain beyond the reach of intellectual guidance as heretofore. from palpitations of the heart. He wakes to discover that he is tightly grasping a corner of the blanket. The more regulated dreams of esoteric students whose etheric body has begun its development retain this symbolical method of expression. and he feels an unpleasant sensation in his hand. He can discern in them law. too. and effect. a person may dream that he has caught some horrible creature. On waking. but they will cease merely to reflect reality connected with the physical body and physical environment. The content. he finds that he has been suffering. of his dreams is changed. Occurrences in the immediate vicinity may also reflect themselves symbolically in dreams. No attentive observer of dream life can fail to detect this characteristic. The striking of a clock may evoke the picture of a troop of soldiers marching by to the beat of drums. The difference between dream and waking consciousness grows ever smaller. except through the medium of a symbolical image. A falling chair may be the occasion of a whole dream drama in which the sound of the fall is reproduced as the report of a gun. they are mingled with similar pictures expressing things and events of another world. like the thoughts and ideas of daily life. cause. For instance. Such dreams must be merely considered as providing the first hint of a higher development. At first the general character of his dream life remains unchanged. A man may dream that he is flying from some pursuer and is stricken with fear. will be mentally controlled and supervised like the impressions and conceptions of waking consciousness. in as far as dreams are distinguished from waking mental activity by the symbolical presentation of what they wish to express.VII The Transformation of Dream Life An intimation that the student has reached or will soon reach the stage of development described in the preceding chapter will be found in the change which comes over his dream life. now begin to assume a more regular character. His dreams. Yet no true mystic will ever make his experiences in dreams the basis of any authoritative account of the higher world. Their pictures begin to succeed each other in sensible connection. and so forth. during sleep. Very soon and as a further result. hitherto confused and haphazard. but on the contrary. While hitherto he discerned only reminiscences of daily life and transformed impressions of his surroundings or of his physical condition. These are the first experiences lying beyond the range of waking consciousness. there now appear before him pictures of a world he has hitherto not known. The dreamer remains 84 . As the dreams due to the latter causes become more connected.

Only developed lotus flowers make it possible for manifestations not derived from the physical world to be imprinted in the same way. That is why we can see nothing in this world but counterfeits and reflections of daily life. When the student has acquired this faculty there arises before his spiritual eyes something of the picture described in the preceding chapter. We engrave in it all our thoughts and perceptions. if successful in this. To begin with. Above all things he can perceive and gain knowledge of his own higher self in this world. but with undeveloped spiritual organs we can form none other than the confused conceptions of it described above. The latter are perceptible to us because our own soul paints its daily experiences in pictorial form into the substance of which that other world consists. for instance. brings full knowledge concerning these engraved impressions derived from other worlds. that is. This is the beginning of life and activity in a new world. These tracings only become visible when the lotus flowers are developed. It must be clearly understood that in addition to our ordinary conscious work-a-day life we lead a second. It is only in so far present for us as. when the gate of the senses is closed during sleep. and he can henceforth discern all that the spiritual world contains as the cause of the physical world. the world of sense could be for a being equipped with no more than rudimentary eyes. We cannot perceive by means of them during waking consciousness because the impressions made on them are very faint. But as already explained. Then. in every human being there are slender rudiments of these lotus flowers.awake in the fullest sense of the word during his dream life. Now. he is led to make the same observations during ordinary waking consciousness. he must learn to take stock of everything he observes in his dreams. Now. he is aware of his mastery and control over his own vivid mental activity. when developed. too. the faint spiritual impressions cannot make themselves felt in the face of the powerful impressions received through the senses. The next task now confronting him is 85 . but will always be at hand for him and reach him in addition to the others. He will so train his attention and receptivity for these spiritual impressions that they need no longer vanish in the face of the physical impressions. unconscious life in that other world. exactly as though he were awake. and at this point esoteric training must set the student a twofold task. Thus. these other impressions begin to emerge confusedly. these experiences consist at first merely of pictures engraved in the spiritual world by our mental activity attached to the physical senses. During our dreams we are actually in a world other than that of our senses. We cannot see the stars during the daytime for a similar reason: their visibility is extinguished by the mighty glare of the sun. and the dreamer becomes aware of experiences in another world. And then the etheric body.

86 . to illumine the objects there. Were the latter kindled elsewhere. making it into its instrument. he will learn how to stir to life the spiritual perceptive force in the organ of the heart and control it through the currents described in the foregoing chapter. really to regard it as his own true self and to act accordingly. But all higher spiritual realities must be related to the physical world. This perceptive force is an element of higher sustainability. this spiritual light organ. that is. but outside the physical body. too. He realizes ever more clearly and intensely that his physical body and what he hitherto called his “I” are merely the instruments of his higher self. as a person enriches his life by using the railway and not merely his legs to cover a certain distance. No one includes as part of himself the vehicle in which he is traveling. just as the sunlight falling on the objects of the physical world renders them visible. It is only when this organ of perception can be sent through the etheric body and into the outer world. so that he never for a moment loses his firm footing in the physical world. The heart organ is only the spot where the individual man kindles. as it were. If the student is to avoid becoming a fantastic visionary he must not impoverish his life through his higher consciousness.” Only this must become a natural concept for him. the spiritual perceptions produced by it would have no connection with the physical world. that the actual spiritual world. from without. Thus it will be seen that complete consciousness of an object in the spiritual world is only possible when man himself casts upon it the spiritual light. even though he says: “I travel”. enrich it. but on the contrary. It is precisely through the heart organ that the higher ego governs the physical self. or rather during his acquisition of the higher consciousness. and man himself must act as a channel through which they flow into it. or feels estranged from it. can be clearly perceived.” his actual conception is: “I carry my body through the door. as already shown. Thence it radiates outward into the surrounding spiritual world rendering it spiritually visible. Now. as composed of objects and beings. the ego which creates this organ of perception does not dwell within. into this higher self. When the student has thus raised himself to a life in the higher ego. so. He adopts an attitude toward his lower self such as a person limited to the world of the senses adopts toward some instrument or vehicle that serves him. when an inwardly developed person says: “I go through the door.to grow. How this perceptive force in the heart organ is created can only be gradually understood in the course of actual development. which proceeds from the organ in question and flows with beautiful radiance through the moving lotus flowers and the other channels of the developed etheric body.

This founding of a spiritual home is called in the language of occult science the building of the hut. so far as these exist in the so-called astral world. is formed in the light of freedom. Just as objects and places in physical space are defined from a fixed point of departure. too. the clairvoyant can at this stage perceive things which are almost or entirely withheld from the senses. Similar forces drive the sap through the capillaries of the plant. He wanders. from place to place in spiritual space. For powers related to all these human characteristics are associated with all physical objects. and take spiritual possession of it. He can. There everything is found which in its nature is similar to human instincts. for instance. Should he. a person sees everything in terms of his physical home. the spiritual objects he perceives. and as though in the interior of. too. desires. but also the spiritual forces mentioned above. To developed spiritual organs of perception all these forces appear gifted with form and color. In physical life. He has no home at first. Natives of Berlin and Paris will involuntarily describe London in a different way. during our childhood. and the surrounding objects to be external to him. this. the feelings of an esoterically developed person toward the things of the spiritual world are very different from the feelings of the undeveloped person toward the things of the physical world. We are born into the latter without our co-operation and instinctively absorb.Now. must be the case in the other world. Spiritual vision at this stage extends to the spiritual counterparts of the physical world. Animal and human impulses are perceptible to him not only through their physical manifestation in the individual. desires and passions. impulses. both of an animal and of a human being. thoroughly investigate it. just as the objects of the physical world have form and color for physical eyes. and passions. The whole range of instincts. appear as an active human impulse. cause the blossoms to unfold and the seed vessels to burst. constitute the astral cloud or aura in which the being is enveloped. tell the 87 . The latter feels himself to be at a particular place in the world of sense. The student. himself founds his own spiritual home in full consciousness. He must seek out some place. The spiritually developed person feels himself to be united with. And yet there is a difference between the spiritual and the physical home. At this stage in his development the student sees not only the crystal and the plant. remain a mere wanderer he would be unable to define any object in spiritual space. seen from a higher standpoint. however. he perceives them just as he perceives tables and chairs in the physical world. however. is cast in its form by powers which. feelings. therefore. Furthermore. and is therefore called the wanderer in the language of occult science. but directly as objects. in fact. In this place he must establish his spiritual home and relate everything else to it. for instance. based on this spiritual home. A crystal. His judgment. a number of ideas by which everything is henceforth involuntarily colored.

They only vanish when the soul has purified herself from all desires inclining toward the physical world. Then only does the soul mount to the higher regions. the corresponding image will show but faintly. These astral images are but faintly perceptible during physical life. Such and similar experiences fill the life of the student during the period described above. but there is no possibility of satisfying this desire because he no longer has a palate. A loving action is accompanied by quite a different astral concomitant from one inspired by hate. the object be attained and the desire satisfied. because the object and the physical organ are both lacking. its relation to the objects in question is similar to the relation of dream consciousness to waking consciousness in ordinary life. however. it will. Senseless desire gives rise to an ugly astral counterpart. The desire for an object. 88 . for instance. become fully awakened at this stage as well. while a feeling evoked by a high ideal creates one that is beautiful. The gourmand. especially in the region of desires. or if. after death. If. by which the soul is tormented. but must climb still higher from this point. in the way a comet is followed by its tail. These experiences evoked by the counterparts of the lower soul-nature after death are called the experiences in the soul-world. when the soul in accordance with her nature still harbors such desires. to the world of spirit. A commercial town has a different astral air from that of a university town. produces a counterpart of this sort in addition to the semblance of the desire itself in the astral world. It only attains its full force after the death of the individual human being. the desire produces an especially powerful counterpart. for their strength is diminished by life in the physical world. at any rate.astral difference between a room full of low or of high-minded people. Even though these images are faint during life in the physical world. The highest achievement of a clairvoyant who has attained the degree of vision described above is that in which the astral counter-effects of animal and human impulses and passions are revealed to him. however. the desire to please his palate. They can be seen by a clairvoyant at the requisite stage of development. the possibility of satisfaction is forthcoming. Not only the physical but also the spiritual atmosphere of a hospital differs from that of a ballroom. they are none the less present. but can no longer satisfy them. In the initial stages of clairvoyance this perceptive faculty is but slightly developed. will still retain. He cannot attain higher spiritual experience at this stage of development. for example. As a result. following man as his world of desire.

dreams are only regarded as a particular manifestation of sleep-life. and dreamless sleep. sleeping and waking. Thus something new is introduced into the world of his senses that enriches it. When no training has been undertaken to attain this knowledge. not only does this new world born out of the dream world come to be in no way inferior to outer physical reality as regards its inner truth. In the foregoing chapter a description was given of the alteration ensuing in the dream-life of the person undertaking the ascent to higher knowledge. waking. dreams linked to the occurrences of the outer world or the conditions of the physical body. the effects are seen of certain higher facts. Only at certain periods dreams emerge from the deep ocean of insensibility. he must not regard these revelations as actual knowledge so long as the same things do not also reveal themselves during ordinary waking life. dreaming sleep. He now need no longer wait for his dreams to live in another world. human consciousness is continually interrupted by the restful interval of sleep. a condition. but facts reveal themselves in it representing a higher reality in the fullest sense of the word. namely. however. This condition then acquires a significance for him similar to the perception. too. namely. True. however. of things with active senses as opposed to inactive senses. dreams have an independent significance apart from the other two conditions. But in time he achieves this as well: he develops this faculty of carrying over into waking consciousness the condition he created for himself out of dream life. These causes are partly revealed to the student in the condition described above and developed out of dream life. For spiritual science. At first. and so forth. Secrets and riddles lie concealed everywhere in the physical world. as experienced by one seeking such higher knowledge. beings. but no one can penetrate to the causes whose perception is confined merely to his senses. and thus only two states are generally spoken of. His dreams lose their meaningless.VIII The Continuity of Consciousness Human life runs its course in three alternating states or conditions. During these intervals the soul knows nothing of the outer world. in ordinary life. The attainment of the higher knowledge of spiritual worlds can be readily understood if a conception be formed of the changes occurring in these three conditions. With continued development. Just as a person born blind and successfully operated upon will recognize the surrounding objects as enriched by all that the eye perceives. in which he by no means remains stationary. to. but he can at any suitable moment put himself into the above condition for the purpose of higher perception. and equally little of itself. things. It can truly be said that the student 89 . irregular and disconnected character and form themselves more and more into a world of law and order. will anyone having become clairvoyant in the above manner perceive the whole world surrounding him peopled with new qualities. In the latter.

such terms must be used to describe the higher worlds. later on. not easy to describe these perceptions. He is less qualified for the higher world unveiling itself in deep sleep. as a natural outcome of his ascent to higher worlds. in due time. he can here. Now this condition is only transitional to still higher stages of knowledge. and therefore only approximate terms can be found to express what does not at all belong to that world. (It should be remarked in passing that for the spiritual world. the student learns another symbolical language. The things and beings of the higher worlds are closely enough related to those of the physical world to enable. the attempt may be made. some sort of conception of these higher worlds to be formed. too. with a little good will. Isolated conscious experiences begin to interrupt the complete insensibility of this deep sleep. the faculty of sight remains the higher. but that this transformation also extends to what was previously a condition of deep dreamless sleep. Only the reader must always bear in mind that such descriptions of supersensible worlds must. The student's first perceptions in this world do not yet extend to the higher colors. The words of ordinary language are only partially adopted in the course of esoteric training. too. The knowledge of this language is acquired during esoteric training itself. for the rest. even though words suitable for the physical world are used. that the radical change. is already more qualified for the world revealing itself in dreaming sleep does he at once perceive colors there. While the experiences during dreaming sleep may fitly be designated as a kind of vision. but only to the lower tones. as described above.opens the eyes of his soul and beholds things which necessarily remain concealed form the bodily senses. does not confine itself to his dream life. be in the nature of simile and symbol. colors are higher than sounds and words. of course. We may speak of perceptible tones and words. It is. to a large extent. therefore the first revelations of it he receives are in tones and words. too.) Now. but that does not preclude the possibility of learning something concerning the higher worlds even fro such ordinary descriptions as those here given. the facts observed during deep sleep may be compared to auricular impressions. and this is only possible by the free use of simile. his next task must be to sense them as clearly and vividly as 90 . There. for our language is only adapted to the physical world. Some idea can be given of those experiences which emerge from the insensibility of deep sleep if they be compared to a kind of hearing. when these experiences during deep sleep first come to the notice of the student. Only because man. ascend to colors and forms. according to his general development. If the student continues his esoteric exercises he will find. Still. Perceptions previously unknown to him emerge from the pervading unknown to him emerge from the pervading darkness of sleep. yet seeing that everything in the world is interrelated.

In the other kind of experiences the attentive observer will discover a certain relationship with the ordinary world in which he lives. but only delays it. At first this presents great difficulty. the perception of these experiences being exceedingly slight. All these experiences are seen to consist of two kinds. remains a secure possession. The latter is under all circumstances detrimental. The most important thing during this initial stage is to remain quiet and composed. The things and beings of this physical world are by no means only what they appear to be for physical perception. all violence must be repressed. Should he at any period not become aware of experiences during sleep he must wait patiently until this is possible. it can never accelerate development. if awaited with patience and composure. Some day this moment will assuredly arrive. his mind tries to conceive and understand the connection existing between things. And he is able to connect with ordinary life whatever comes to him from a higher world. shadowy concepts become sonorous and living in a way comparable only to the tones and the words of the physical world. but is completely in the dark as regards its nature. and not for a moment lapse into any unrest or impatience.possible. what he would like to understand in these things around him but cannot understand with the ordinary intellect. while should it appear momentarily in answer to forcible methods. It is to these ideas and concepts that the experiences during sleep refer. During every-day life man reflects on his environment. hitherto concealed from the student. 91 . that he has had an experience. just as living and substantial as an experience in this physical world can be. This spiritual world. The subjects of his reflections during life. They are the expression and effluence of a spiritual world. The student must cultivate a quiet and yielding receptivity for the gift that is presented to him. The first kind will be totally different from anything that he has ever experienced. he seeks to grasp in thought and idea what his senses perceive. now resounds for him out of his whole environment. The student knows very well. These experiences may be a source of joy and edification. these are the things concerning which the experiences during sleep give him information. it may be completely lost for a long time. Obscure. They are the first harbinger of higher spiritual worlds in which the student will find his way later on. What was formerly only accessible to his thought now becomes actual experience. but otherwise they should be left to themselves for the time being. And this perceptive faculty. It seems to the student ever more and more as though the solution of the riddles over which he ponders is whispered to him in tones and words out of a higher world. Once this perceptive faculty is acquired and the experiences during sleep are present to the student's consciousness in complete lucidity and clarity. on waking. which can be clearly distinguished. his attention should be directed to the following point.

a complete submersion in them. and a world might thus easily be constructed which had nothing to do with the real spiritual world. The acquisition of this faculty will enable him to perceive the spiritual world in its own character. Now man himself forms these higher senses through the exercises indicated by spiritual science. While thus applying himself to the task of concentration and meditation his soul grows within his body. The effort required for concentration and meditation must therefore be carefully and accurately maintained. no such normal being will come to existence in the spiritual spheres. During sleep. when the body rests in as far as its activity is dependent on sense perception. for if that delicate organism lacking all power of resistance chanced to appear during physical every-day life it could not prevail against the harsh and powerful processes of this life. When the isolated experiences during sleep begin. as described. wellproportioned organism. and meditation. The latter must appear at its birth as a harmonious. but a miscarriage incapable of life.It is easy to see that this higher perceptive faculty can prove a blessing only if the opened soul-senses are in perfect order. Here again the student must bear in mind that these experiences during sleep may not be regarded as fully valid knowledge. developed by the individual within himself. just as the ordinary senses can only be used for a true observation of the world if their equipment is regular and normal. however. in the right way. from seed to fruit. for she has literally become a new being. He should therefore beware of constructing out of them a complete whole or even a connected system of knowledge. at first so delicate and inconspicuous. that is. the activity of the higher soul. The latter include concentration. By concentration and meditation the student works upon his soul and develops within it the soul-organs of perception. can come into evidence. the hidden secrets of his environment will be conveyed to his soul as tones and words. for it contains the laws governing the germination and fruition of the higher human soulbeing. The right thing to do is to strive for an ever clearer conception of the 92 . Its activity would be of no account against that of the body. the moment of birth is approaching for the liberated soul. which is a life in such ideas. in which the attention is directed to certain definite ideas and concepts connected with the secrets of the universe. That this higher soul-being should be born during deep sleep will be easily grasped. Through an error in following the instructions. all manner of fantastic ideas and conceptions would be mixed into the soul-world. so long as he is not in a position to carry over his awakened higher soul into waking consciousness as well. The student must continually practice self-control. In this case. the student must realize at this stage of development that he is dealing with separate and more or less isolated spiritual experiences. Now. just as the embryo child grows in the body of the mother. among and within the experiences of the day.

while more and more experiences emerge from erstwhile unconsciousness. These experiences thus link themselves together increasingly of their own accord. At first. the student experiences an ever increasing extension and expansion of consciousness during sleep. on his path to higher knowledge. Anyone having reached this stage of development does not cease experiencing and learning during those intervals when the physical body rests. 93 . as though of their own accord. at a certain stage of development. at which consciousness is retained in the life during sleep. By thus conducting himself the student approaches ever nearer to the attainment of that condition. When his body rests. The condition here indicated is regarded. and through continued application to his prescribed exercises. Yet the less the habits of thought acquired in the physical world are allowed to play into these higher experiences. with those already recorded. without this true unity being disturbed by all manner of combinations and inferences. the world entered during sleep is a completely new revelation. It is needless to say that the reality during sleep is different from physical reality surrounding the physical body. and when the soul receives no impressions through the instrumentality of senses. the better it is. attainable at the end of a long path. and to await the spontaneous arrival of new experiences which will connect themselves. and in the second only unconscious dreamless sleep. This important stage of development. as a kind of ideal.isolated real experiences. What the student first learns is the extension of consciousness into two soul-states. however. The unconscious intervals during sleep-life grow ever smaller. is known in spiritual science as the continuity of consciousness. By virtue of the power of the spiritual world into which he has now found his way. in which the unconsciousness of sleep-life is transformed into complete consciousness. in the first of which only disordered dreams were previously possible. which in any case would only originate in an intellect accustomed to the physical world. The student learns — indeed he must learn if he is to retain a firm footing in the physical world and not become a visionary — to connect the higher experiences of sleep with his physical environment. man lives in surroundings which are just as real as those of his waking daily life.

liable to commit errors 94 .IX The Splitting of the Human Personality During Spiritual Training During sleep no impressions are conveyed to the human soul through the instrumentality of the physical sense-organs. be able to follow consciously everything going on around him. does the soul live in a higher world. this life of the soul continues also during sleep. which are beyond the scope of physical sense observation. These characteristics of life during sleep or in dreams illustrate what is continually taking place in the human being. of course. Ordinarily unconscious of his higher life. He outgrows the principle of being guided by a master and must henceforward undertake to be his own guide. when awake. so too is the life of a person changed through esoteric training. when in that condition. even gathering from them the impulse to act upon the physical body. In the initial stages of his development the student perceives things pertaining to another world without being able to discern their connection with the objects of his daily physical environment. with his ordinary senses. through a successful operation. The soul lives in uninterrupted activity in the higher worlds. The preceding chapters have shown that esoteric training consists in the development of such spiritual sense organs. This was indicated in the last chapter. the esoteric student renders himself conscious of it. affecting them and being affected by them. Just as the physical body is connected and lives with the things and beings of the physical world. and thereby his whole life becomes transformed. As long as the soul remains unseeing in the higher sense it is guided by superior cosmic beings. The soul is then only connected with the finer bodies (the etheric body and the astral body). the student's life during sleep is transformed in the manner described in the foregoing chapter. Now if. And just as the life of a person born blind is changed. The impressions from the ordinary outer world do not find their way to the soul when in that condition. The soul is in full activity during sleep. It should here be noted that a higher degree of clairvoyance is required for the higher perception of ordinary physical environment. The moment this occurs he is. from its previous dependence on a guide. but we can know nothing of this activity so long as we have no spiritual organs of perception through which to observe what is going on around us and see what we ourselves are doing during sleep. In certain respects the soul is actually outside the part of the human being — the so-called physical body — which in waking life is the medium for sense perceptions and thought. as a result of esoteric training. so. But the activity of these finer bodies does not cease during sleep. too. He can at will find his way in his environment as he could. only. he will. as we observe our daily physical environment with our ordinary senses.

It is true that in this case their relation to man is ordained by higher power. the ascent will indeed ensue through experiences surpassing in power and magnitude everything the boldest flights of sense-bound fantasy can picture. assumes too early a certain independence with regard to the experiences of the higher worlds. will be described in the following chapters. even though we know nothing of them. through impatience or arrogance. modesty and humility are far less empty words than in ordinary life. Man must become a partaker of the spirit in order to carry its revelations into the physical world. and anyone desiring to shirk his earthly task and to escape into another world may be certain he will never reach his goal. Yet we must realize that the hostile powers are none the less present. If the student possesses these qualities in the very best sense he may be certain that his ascent into the higher life will be achieved without danger to all that is commonly called health and life. The student meets with horrible powers threatening life at every turn and from every side. It will even be possible for him to make use of certain forces and beings existing beyond physical perception. That is his task. if he cannot wait to gain really sufficient insight into the supersensible laws. But at the same time his own existence is enhanced and the circle of his life enriched by a great and new field of experience. Man's task must be entirely sought for on this earth.totally unknown to ordinary consciousness. If all the measures counseled by true esoteric science are adopted. It is for this reason that so much is found in books dealing with these matters concerning the dangers connected with the ascent into higher worlds. He acts now from a world from which. no disharmony must ensue between the higher experiences and the events and demands of every-day life. and the temptation is great to control these forces for the furtherance of personal and forbidden interests. In these spheres. and yet there can be no question of injury to health or life. It is only because the physical world is dependent upon 95 . higher powers unknown to him influenced him. and must now himself accomplish things which were hitherto done for him without his cooperation. for instance. A real danger can only arise if the student. and it is in the spirit world that the beings dwell who express themselves in the facts of the physical world. Yet the fact is that dangers only arise when the necessary precautions are neglected. Some of these especially important experiences. The student withdraws from this cosmic harmony. the meeting with Guardian of the Threshold. or to employ them wrongly out of a deficient knowledge of the higher worlds. The descriptions sometimes given of these dangers may well make timid souls shudder at the prospect of this higher life. formerly. Above all things. He transforms the earth by implanting in it what he has ascertained in the spiritual world. and that this relation alters when the human being consciously enters this world hitherto concealed from him. Yet what the senses perceive is only part of the world. These higher powers are directed by the universal cosmic harmony.

as described above. These changes are connected with certain processes in the development of the three fundamental forces of the soul. A particular thought. Indeed. and because man can work upon earth. with willing. It would be found contrary to these laws if the sight of an ill-smelling object gave anyone pleasure. only if he is a participator in those worlds in which the creative forces lie concealed — only for these reasons should he have the desire to ascend to the higher worlds. find it stuffy. It is a fact that in higher spiritual development the brain divides into three separate 96 . in a true sense. We hear our name called and follow the call. inevitably evokes a feeling or an activity of will. can be established in the pupil. it should rather act as a strong challenge to one and all to acquire those faculties which every true esoteric student must possess. according to natural laws. these forces are subject to a connection ordained by higher cosmic laws. A particular idea arising in the mind is attended by a particular feeling. life is not termed normal unless such a connection. and willing. the organs of will are connected according to laws with those of thinking and feeling. No one approaching esoteric training with these sentiments. In the latter. founded on the laws of human nature. feeling and thinking are not arbitrary. No one should allow the prospect of these dangers to deter him from esoteric training. When we survey human life we find that everything is built up on such connections. in regular fashion. All this arises from the fact that in the finer soul-vehicles of man the central points of the three forces — thinking. is observed between thinking. feeling. or it is followed by a resolution of the will in equally natural sequence. In the course of higher development. This connection in the finer soul organism has its counterpart in the coarser physical body. At first this severance occurs only within the finer soul organism. and willing. corresponding to human nature. feeling and willing. but at a still higher stage the separation extends also to the physical body. It is true that great changes take place in the student's finer bodies. need fear the slightest danger. We enter a room. and open the window. Man's willing. and thinking. or if anyone. too. feeling and willing — are connected with each other according to laws. These are simple connections between thinking. feeling.the spiritual. Certain ideas are conveyed to him on the assumption that they will be associated. We perceive an ill-smelling object and experience a feeling of disgust. on being questioned. therefore. the threads interconnecting the three fundamental forces are severed. Before esoteric training. We are questioned and we answer. and resolved not to deviate for a moment from these prescribed directions. with his feelings and volitions. After these preliminary observations that should dispel any element of terror. did not answer. feeling. a description of some of the so-called dangers will be given. The success anticipated from a right education or fitting instruction is based upon the presumption that a connection between thinking.

feeling. but it can only do so when liberated from its connection with thinking and feeling within the soul. a fact which before his training would have filled him with glowing love or bitter hatred. and the clairvoyant has means of observing it. the possibility of a three-fold aberration arises for anyone neglecting the injunctions given by esoteric science. for his own soul forces are related to certain fundamental forces of the world. but at the same time the responsibility for this activity is placed entirely in his own hands. The brain of the higher clairvoyant divides into three independently active entities: The thought-brain. He can perform actions through resolutions of the will for which there is not the slightest reason for anyone not having undergone esoteric training. The moment this connection is severed. The student's great achievement is the attainment of complete mastery over the combined activity of the three soul forces. This. nor can it be demonstrated by the keenest instruments. Through the separation of the forces of thinking. thanks to the liberation of the fundamental forces of his soul. The force. This separation is not physically perceptible in the ordinary way. feeling. but the clairvoyant can only perceive it in so far as he is able to project outwards the force lying in his feeling. Thus the organs of thinking. Such an aberration can occur if the connecting threads are severed before the higher consciousness is 97 . Yet it occurs. and he can remain impassive at the thought which formerly would have spurred him on to action. In the supersensible world. hatred becomes a visible phenomenon. and also perceive them. The same applies to the forces of thinking and feeling. and willing. He can henceforth confront. the activity of the will can be exteriorized. unless he himself provides one. It is only through this transformation of his being that the student can enter consciously into relation with certain supersensible forces and beings. And what is said of hatred applies also to far more important phenomena of the physical world. and the will-brain. A feeling of hatred sent out by a person is visible to the clairvoyant as a fine luminous cloud of special coloring. for instance. just as the ordinary person directs outwards the receptive faculty of his eye. their connection henceforth is not maintained by laws inherent in themselves. just as an ordinary person wards off a physical blow that is aimed at him. but must be managed by the awakened higher consciousness of the individual. is the change which the student observes coming over him: that no connection arises of itself between an idea and a feeling or a will-impulse. No impulse urges him from thought to action unless he himself in freedom give rise to this impulse. as though of its own accord.parts. The student can enter into conscious intercourse with them. inherent in the will can affect definite things and the beings of the higher worlds. then. and the clairvoyant can ward off this feeling of hatred. devoid of feeling. and willing become individualized. the feeling-brain.

thinking is ahead of feeling and willing. the three human soul-forces are not equally advanced in their development at any given period of life. in a higher sense. Instead of higher knowledge. at least. had lost all meaning for them. These are the three ways of error into which the student can stray: (1) exuberant violence of will. continually overpowering its possessor. They appear everywhere as cold and unfeeling creatures. When. A violent nature is the result.sufficiently advanced to hold the reins and guide properly the separated forces into free and harmoniously combined activity. The third evil is found when thought predominates. A second deviation occurs when feeling unduly shakes off its proper control. is prevented by the leveling influence of thinking and feeling from lapsing into any particular excesses. can occur through the predominance of one force or another. feeling. a person of such predominating will undertakes esoteric training. The world. Feeling and thought lapse into complete impotence. no injurious irregularity. loveless striving for wisdom. anyone thus gone astray is hardly distinguishable (especially in degree) from an insane or. resulting in a contemplative nature. feeling and thinking cease to exert their regular influence on the will when the latter constantly presses on to great exertions of power If. the most pitiful vacuity and feebleness would become such a person's lot. hostile to life and locked up within itself. the student must not resemble these. for such people. and willing. or which. the individual is scourged by his over-mastering will. for instance. Of course. A person inclined to the revering of others may then diverge into unlimited dependence. should have undergone harmonious development before being released from their inherent connection and 98 . a highly neurasthenic person. As long as the connection between the soul-forces is maintained as established by higher cosmic laws. and also from the ordinary (materialistic) medical standpoint. (2) sentimental emotionalism. For outward observation. Predominating will. No thought ever moves them to an action or a feeling. They flee from every contact with the things of ordinary life as though from something exciting their aversion. then. a person with an inclination toward religious devotion can sink into the most degenerate welter. at any rate. thinking. It is essential for him that the three fundamental soul-forces. another soul-force has the upper hand over its companions. such a person is not sufficiently advanced to control completely the higher consciousness and himself restore harmony. in a second. For as a rule. Or. however. in the case of such inordinate predominance of the feeling life. has no further importance save that it provides them with objects for satisfying their boundless thirst for wisdom. to the extent of losing all personal will and thoughts. rushing from one unbridled action to another. the will pursues its own unbridled way. and (3) cold. In one person.

if destructive or hampering influences of outer life affect him in addition to the great changes taking place in his inner self. What appears to be a harmless characteristic as long as its possessor is without esoteric training. namely. and bodily health are not thereby exposed to continual fluctuation. but much more of taking care that thoughts. He should never be found wanting in presence of mind or in calm penetration of all situations of life. regulated by universal cosmic laws. feelings. For once a mistake is made and one of the soul-forces falls a prey to unbridled excess. 99 .subordinated to the awakened higher consciousness. All this is not so easy for the student to accomplish as it was before esoteric training. the better it is for him. Yet a really serious danger cannot threaten the student until he has acquired the ability to include in his waking consciousness the experiences forthcoming during sleep. is so intensified in an esoteric student that the universally human element. intentions. The unrestrained force pervades the individual's entire personality. He must seek to find everything corresponding to his powers and faculties which can lead him into undisturbed. That is why it is so essential that the waking life of the student should be in every respect regular and healthy. the higher soul comes into existence as a miscarriage. and spirit. In the main. the life of the senses. for the higher experiences now playing into his life act upon his entire existence. that is. a predominance of thinking or feeling or willing. On the other hand. and as it progresses the student only becomes acquainted with the dangers while simultaneously and at the right moment acquiring the full power to rout them from the field. For this reason the student should omit nothing which can secure for him unfailing mastery over his whole being. indispensable for life. reacts during the waking hours on the disturbed equilibrium of the soul. The more capable he is of meeting the demands made by the outer world upon a healthy. As long as there is only the question of illumination of the intervals of sleep. it may be very bad for him if his ordinary waking life affects him in an exciting or irritating way. and for a long time there can be no question of the balance being restored. sound constitution of body. And here it is not so much a question of casting off this unrest and haste in an external sense. soul. becomes obscured. tending to restore the balance. while avoiding everything detrimental to this harmony — everything that brings unrest and feverish haste into his life. the irregularity continues lying in wait for him and may at every turn throw him off the right path. a genuine esoteric training gives rise of itself to all these qualities. harmonious communion with his surroundings. Should anything within these higher experiences not be as it should.

that is. and each of thine evil deeds was attended by its evil results. Thou knewest not why. The lesser Guardian is a sovereign being. powers invisible to thyself watched over thee. The karmic powers. for they are the result of thy previous experiences and thoughts. Destiny struck thee many a hard blow in the past. A truly terrible spectral being confronts him. and willing have become released within him from their inherent connection. and henceforth must thou accomplish for thyself a part of the work which hitherto they performed for thee. beheld all thy deeds in former lives. They. Thou foundest joy and gladness. their effects alone were made manifest. Only some of his most important characteristics can here be indicated. Thou hast thyself to thank for both. however. He does not come into existence. according to thy conduct in lives gone by. and many an ugly flaw. The student meets the lesser Guardian when the threads connecting willing. They saw to it that in the course of thy lives each of thy good deeds brought its reward. The greater Guardian is encountered when this sundering of the connections extends to the physical parts of the body. and all thy most secret thoughts and feelings. They were the instruments of thy destiny.X The Guardian of the Threshold The important experiences marking the student's ascent into the higher worlds include his meeting with the Guardian of the Threshold. They ordained that measure of joy and pain allotted to thee in thine incarnations. in the way described in the foregoing chapter. These were till now unknown to thee. too. at first to the brain. and determined 100 . and thou didst take them as they came. These powers will now partly release thee from their constraining influence. The Guardian proclaims his signification somewhat in the following words: “Hitherto. They ruled over thee as the all-embracing law of karma. Strictly speaking. until the latter has reached the requisite stage of development. The attempt will now be made to describe in narrative form this meeting with the lesser Guardian of the Threshold. and he will need all the presence of mind and faith in the security of his path which he has had ample opportunity to acquire in the course of his previous training. as far as the student is concerned. there are two Guardians: a lesser and a greater. and thinking within the finer astral and etheric bodies begin to loosen. as a result of which the student learns that his thinking. feeling. Each blow was the consequence of a harmful deed in a bygone lie. Thy character shows many a beautiful side. Thanks to their influence thy character formed itself out of thy lifeexperiences and thy thoughts. feeling. were the fruits of former deeds.

Only the powers of destiny who watched over thee beheld me and could thus. for the wisdom of thy destiny. too. to cross this Threshold until thou dost feel thyself entirely free from fear and ready for the highest responsibility. I was present at the hour of thy death. As a form visible to thyself I will never for an instant leave thy side.accordingly thy present self and thy present mode of life. could thus work within thee. Seek not. My spectral form is woven out of thine own life's record. Then. out of all the dread of the strength needed to take full responsibility for all thy thoughts and actions. concealed wisdom. And as long as a single stone is found missing. it will leave the work in thy hands alone. too. so that the hideous stains on my form should be blotted out. whose imperfection ever and again constrained the powers of destiny to lead thee back to a new incarnation upon earth. whenever thou dost act or think wrongly thou wilt straightway perceive thy guilt as a hideous. but even then my form was veiled from thee. Till now thou hast borne me invisibly within thee. they detach themselves from thy personality. . and it was on my account that the Lords of Karma ordained thy reincarnation. once thou hast crossed my Threshold. It was I. Hitherto they were interwoven with thine own being. that power and capacity thanks to which thou couldst labor in a new earth life at the beautifying of my form. shall I again become united with thee for the welfare of thy future activity. then thine own wisdom must become great enough to undertake the task of that other. I would drag thee also down with me into a dark and corrupt world. Only when thou hast made good all thy bygone wrongs and hast so purified thyself that all further evil is. build in thee. though concealed from thee. Hitherto I only emerged from thy personality when death recalled thee from an earthly life. I am that very being who shaped my body out of thy good and evil achievements. But now all the good and evil sides of thy bygone lives shall be revealed to thee. and should this occur. for thee. Now that I have come forth from within thee. then. even as thou canst not behold thine own brain with physical eyes. and it was well that this was so. a thing impossible. And it is only 101 . which has departed from thee. too. And in future. has departed from thee. . or fall a prey to corruption. If thou wouldst avoid this. And . As long as there remains in thee a trace of fear of becoming thyself the guide of thine own destiny. just so long must thou remain standing as though transfixed. in accordance with my appearance. “Yet my Threshold is fashioned out of all the timidity that remains in thee. in the intervals between death and a new birth. demoniacal distortion of my form. or else stumble. only then will my being have become transformed into radiant beauty. that concealed wisdom. for thy welfare and progress. But now they become released from thee. they were in thee and thou couldst not see them. They assume an independent form which thou canst see even as thou beholdest the stones and plants of the outer world. It will pay no further heed to thee. I must become a perfect and glorious being. just so long will this Threshold lack what still remains to be built into it.

Such physical phenomena are no longer necessary for those sufficiently prepared for the higher sight.) What is here indicated in narrative form must not be understood in the sense of an allegory. but by so doing thou hast undertaken. just as I shave ever stood invisible beside thee in the hour of death. I am indeed the Angel of Death. Thou hast formed me. but as an experience of the highest possible reality befalling the esoteric student. without adequate preparation. too. his own character risen out of him into 102 . to be reborn into an imperishable existence. That was attained by producing a cloud of fine substance. and it is to this supersensible encounter that spiritual science conducts him. a kind of frankincense resulting from a particular mixture of a number of substances. and happiness will be thy lot. Formerly I drew my life from thine. thou wilt enter those realms to which thou hast hitherto only had access after physical death. revealing itself to the student's awakened higher sight. as thy duty. The Guardian must warn him not to go a step further unless he feels in himself the strength to fulfill the demands made in the above speech. but I am at the same time the bearer of a higher life without end. Thou dost now enter them with full knowledge. anyone who sees. thou wilt meet beings that are supersensible. but now thou hast awakened me to a separate existence so that I stand before thee as the visible gauge of thy future deeds — perhaps.by thus unconsciously transforming me to complete perfection in ever recurring earthly lives that thou couldst have escaped the powers of death and passed over into immortality united with me. However horrible the form assumed by the Guardian. as thy constant reproach. animating it with the still unredeemed karma of the individual. and henceforth as thou wanderest outwardly visible upon the earth thou wilt at the same time wander in the kingdom of death.” (It will be gathered from the above that the Guardian of the Threshold is an (astral) figure. It is a lower magical process to make the Guardian of the Threshold physically visible also. and I am thine own creation. his unredeemed karma appear before his eyes as a living creature would run the risk of straying into evil byways. Through me thou wilt die with thy body still living. The developed power of the magician is then able to mould the frankincense into shape. in the kingdom of life eternal. to transform me. “Visible do I thus stand before thee today. But I myself must provide thy first acquaintance with that world. and besides this. it is only the effect of the student's own past life. “Into this kingdom thou art now entering. Bulwer Lytton's Zanoni contains in novel form a description of the Guardian of the Threshold. When thou shalt have crossed my Threshold. that is.

it is like an architect making use of workmen for executing the details of a building. He experiences death consciously by laying aside the physical body as one discards a garment that is worn out or perhaps rendered useless through a sudden rent. but for himself nothing of importance is changed in his whole environment. a very real family and national group soul and racial spirit is at work in the life of a family. at the moment of the meeting. His individual character is also connected with it. are vested in beings just as real as the personality in which the character and destiny of the individual man are vested. and it is this same world that now confronts him after death. thought. The student's preparation must aim at enabling him to endure the terrible sight without a trace of timidity and. Besides the separate individuals. lineal or racial destiny. This awakening is brought about by the separation of will. national. The conscious activity of individual persons by no means exhausts everything to be reckoned with in a family. his activity in this world depends upon his belonging to some such community. Thus his physical death is of special importance only for those living with him. If successful. The group soul of a people does not descend into physical reality but dwells in the higher worlds and. or a race. will look down with contempt on the spiritual scientist when he hears that for him. to feel his strength so increased that he can undertake fully conscious the responsibility for transforming and beautifying the Guardian. The entire supersensible world stood open to him before his death. Besides their character. For them the student dies. In the truest sense. a people. In a higher sense. or racial group soul. everyone receives his allotted task from his family. makes use of the physical organs of each individual human being. this meeting with the Guardian results in the student's next physical death being an entirely different event from the death as he knew it formerly. in his prejudice. a nation. the ordinary 103 . or a race. in a certain sense the separate individuals are merely the executive organs of these family group souls. whose perception is still restricted to the world of the senses. Indeed. a nation. and the materialistic thinker. and so on. To feel for the first time that one has oneself called a spiritual being into existence is in itself an experience of deepest significance. The Guardian of the Threshold is also connected with other matters. a race. just as arms and legs are members of the human being. and feeling. families. The spiritual scientist becomes acquainted with higher worlds of which the separate personalities are members. family and national character. that a national group soul makes use of each individual man belonging to that nation for the execution of some work. and races have also their destiny. For persons restricted to their senses these things remain mere general ideas. racial spirits. nations. The person belongs to a family. It is nothing but the truth to say. for instance. Now. in order to work in the physical world.independent existence.

Utter darkness. He looks back on the result of all his previous education as he might on a house crumbling away brick by brick. exalted above all prejudices. and what he had to accomplish for his community. his race. And out of this darkness resounds the Guardian's further admonition: “Step not across my Threshold until thou dost clearly realize that thou wilt thyself illumine the darkness ahead of thee. the student must turn and glance backward. He must step out of the circle of his community. Hitherto he found his way through the world with the coverings enveloping his personality. and feeling are severed. no doubt. did he not.person is by no means initiated into the higher design of his work. What actually happens is that the student adds a new body to his finer soul-body. thought.” Only the esoteric student learns what it means to be entirely cut off from his family. The lamps of the guides whom thou hast hitherto followed will now no longer be available to thee.” To these one must reply: “Who. your race to thank for being what you are? They have brought you up. the insignificance of all such education in respect of the life now confronting him. He alone realizes.' even the fact that you have become such a personality you owe to the spirits of your communities. your nation. but must knowingly collaborate in those of his folk. Many. which he must now rebuild in a new form. then. his race. Yet as an isolated personality he would become hardened in himself and decline into ruin. himself. it is more than a mere symbolical expression to say that when the Guardian has enunciated his first statement. through personal experience. national. He joins unconsciously in the tasks of his people and of his race. it is to their up-bringing that you owe it. even when you say you are `nothing but a human being. Every extension of his horizon necessarily enlarges the scope of his duties. brought you to this freedom? Was it not your family who placed you in the world where you now stand? Have you not your lineage. The Guardian of the Threshold 104 . For everything inculcated by education completely melts away when the threads binding will. And if now. Yes. was directed by higher spirits who made use of his personality. take not a single step forward until thou art positive that thou hast sufficient oil in thine own lamp.” At these words. or racial spirit. will say: “Oh. relieved only by the rays issuing from the Guardian himself. And again. I have entirely freed myself from all lineal and racial connections. I only want to be a human being and nothing but a human being. you are one of the lightbringers and benefactors of your stock and even of your race. unfolds before the student. there arises from the spot where he stands a whirlwind which extinguishes all those spiritual lights that have hitherto illumined the pathway of his life. his nation. he must not only know his own tasks. And now. He puts on a second garment. acquire those powers which are vested in the national and racial spirits. a further revelation made to him by the Guardian of the Threshold is that henceforth these spirits will withdraw their guiding hand from him. From the moment the student meets the Guardian.

so that he perceives clearly on the one hand. His experience at the Threshold will then be attended by a premonition of that felicity which is to provide the keynote of his newly awakened life. Without preparation. The feeling of a new freedom will outweigh all other feelings. at a particular stage of life. That is the second warning received at the Threshold from its Guardian. and racial spirits are revealed to the student in their full activity. and no less clearly on the other hand. and attended by this feeling.now draws aside a veil which till now had concealed deep life-mysteries. that he will henceforward no longer enjoy this guidance. Indeed. But the higher training which makes it possible at all for the student to advance up to the Threshold simultaneously puts him in a position to find the necessary strength at the right moment. must needs take upon himself. how he has hitherto been led. his new duties and responsibilities will appear as something which man. 105 . The family. the training can be so harmonious in its nature that the entry into the higher life is relieved of everything of an agitating or tumultuous character. no one could endure the sight of what has here been indicated. national.

And I must remain bound to this world until I have developed within myself everything that can here be gained. He observes how before his birth he wove the causes which necessarily led to his return into life. and thoughts. For in no other world is an opportunity given to build up and complete this being. I needed the life it provided to acquire qualities unattainable in any other world. any more than a child could be 106 . but this power of vision in the higher world is gradually developed through experience in the lower. the initiate gains a better knowledge and appreciation of the true value of visible nature than was possible before his higher training. The essential facts of life. Yet the possessor of this insight knows that without experience in visible reality he would be totally powerless in that other invisible reality. Consciousness in the invisible world is not possible without spiritual sight. Visible life is explained by the invisible causes. and which can only be brought to its final perfection in this same visible world. No one can be born in the spiritual world with spiritual eyes without having first developed them in the physical world. why one thing makes him happy and another unhappy. too — health and illness. I shall some day become a useful collaborator in another world only by acquiring all the requisite faculties in this physical world. being what I was. includes particular inclinations and habits.XI Life and Death: The Greater Guardian of the Threshold It has been described in the foregoing chapter how significant for the human being is his meeting with the so-called lesser Guardian of the Threshold by virtue of the fact that he becomes aware of confronting a supersensible being whom he has himself brought into existence. Moreover. feelings. birth and death — unveil themselves before his gaze. and he realizes how he himself founded the present in the past. Before he can live in the latter he must have the requisite faculties and instruments which can only be acquired in the visible world. Henceforth he knows that being within himself which is fashioned with all its imperfections in the visible world. He perceives why he loves one thing and hates another. and whose body consists of the hitherto invisible results of the student's own actions. now standing to a certain extent revealed before him.” Thanks to his insight into the supersensible world. for he says to himself: “Once I came into this world because. is likely to underestimate the physical world. he recognizes that death cannot sever him forever from this world. Anyone not possessing this insight and perhaps therefore imagining the supersensible regions to be infinitely more valuable. These unseen forces have become the cause of his destiny and his character. and this may be counted among his most important experiences. and he can also recognize the origin of certain blows of fate that have befallen him. He can understand why his inner self.

born with physical eyes. had they not already been formed within the mother's womb. The sheath he bears is gathered from the preserved remnants of the old world. They owe their present life to an imperfect stage of spiritual existence and are being led. and that out of it everything physical was evolved. From this standpoint it will also be readily understood why the Threshold to the supersensible world is watched over by a Guardian. life acquires quite a new meaning for him. The decaying portion of the old world adheres to the new life blossoming from it. and within this sheath the germ of that being is matured which will live in the future. but its results will be embodied in a higher world. A higher stage of the supersensible world is discerned which will contain the fruits matured in the sense-world. Thus this new life has evolved into a battle with universal death. Death merely expresses the fact that the original supersensible world reached a point beyond which it could not progress by itself. had it not received a fresh lifeimpulse. so that in a certain sense the higher will appear defective without the lower. This comes to expression most clearly in man himself. When the student enters the supersensible world. He knows that the former existed first. Universal death must needs have overtaken it. the higher experiences are shrouded from him until he is fit to behold them. His vision extends to a past in which this physical world was not yet existent. rigid world there sprouted the seeds of a new one. the first into the past and the second into the future. But this pristine supersensible world needed to pass through the sense-world. The sense-world as such will be overcome. for he has long since discarded the prejudice that the supersensible world was developed out of the senseworld. It can only pursue its course when certain things will have developed requisite faculties within the realm of the senses. That is why we have death and life in the world. From the remnants of a dying. The existence of disease and death in the sense-world is thus explained. he discerns in the physical world the seed-ground of a higher world. even within this stage. 107 . therefore. In no case may real insight into those regions be permitted to anyone lacking the requisite faculties. At this point the outlook is directed into the future. He sees that he himself belonged to a supersensible world before coming for the first time into this sense-world. when at the hour of death anyone enters the other world while still incompetent to work in it. These beings are none other than human beings. to that perfection which will make them fit for further work in the higher world. Two outlooks are opened before him. and the process of evolution moves slowly. for without this passage its further evolution would not have been possible.

which finds its expression in the sense-world. The mortal is in its last.” This is the path leading man from death to life. The life of the past came to an end with birth. this task is precisely to gather the fruits of the mortal for the immortal. as it does further in his membership in a race.” In the above the answer will be found to the question why man works his way only gradually through error and imperfection to the good and true. I could never have been born. ideal human type. and so forth. The extent to which he is entangled in the physical sense-world is exposed to the student's view. and passions. and which finds its expression in the physical sense-world. feelings. The time between birth and death is merely an expression for the sum of values wrested from the dying past by the new life. and thoughts are at first dominated by the perishing and the mortal. the more perfectly its members express the pure. or in the organs belonging to them. I am now dying as the result of the entire past in which I am enmeshed. and I can only break their power little by little. His actions. and it stands clearly proved how far removed he still is from attaining that sublime luminous figure which may again dwell in the pure. a nation. The evolution of man through the incarnations in ever higher national and racial forms is thus a process of liberation. The latter gave rise to his sense-organs. Man must extract from the perishable everything that can be extracted. spiritual world. that he can acquire the requisite faculties to lead the world to immortality. and so forth. thanks to the new immortal elements coming to life within me. Thus the first Guardian confronts man as the counterpart of his two-fold nature in which perishable and imperishable are blended. And as he glances at himself as the result of his own work in the past he cannot but say: “I have in me the elements of a decaying world. They are at work in me. impulses. But it is only within this twofold world. he would say: “The perishing world was my task-master.Thus man is twofold: mortal and immortal. Yet the soil of mortal life has matured the seeds of immortal life. A race or a nation stands so much the higher. egotistical wishes and all forms of selfishness. Man must finally appear in 108 . expresses itself in this entanglement. For this reason. and illness is nothing but the continued effect of the dying portions of the past. impulses. I carry them with me into another world. the further they have worked their way from the physical and perishable to the supersensible and imperishable. the immortal in its first stage. If it had merely depended on the past. for peoples and races are but steps leading to pure humanity. and this work alone will enable him to discard the background out of which he has grown. The presence of instincts. desires. Indeed. these organs and all things activating them are doomed to perish The imperishable will not be found in the instincts. but only in the work produced by these organs. Life in the sense-world is wrested from universal death by the newly formed lifegerm. Could he but speak to himself with full consciousness at the hour of his death.

after a time. As a separate freed being. thou needest no longer return to the sense-world. the pilgrimage through ever purer forms of morality and religion is a perfecting process. but I cannot be blessed so long as others remain unredeemed. For this reason the lesser Guardian of the Threshold is joined. For thine own sake. thou canst go forth as a liberator of thy fellows.harmonious perfection. The organs of thinking. which has now entirely liberated itself from physical conditions. but all things else existing in the world of the senses. The meeting with the second Guardian will again be described in narrative form. the product of the past is manifest. The latter. Yet everything that can be extracted from the sense-world must be carried into the supersensible world. In a similar way. containing only so many seeds of the future as could be planted in the course of time. Were man to bring with him only what had been woven into his counterpart out of the past. Thou hast won the right to become a citizen of the supersensible world. feeling. but now. Thou wilt some day be able to unite with me. But now a new era is to begin. Hitherto thou hast sought only thine own release. thou wouldst fain 109 . so that their reciprocal connection is no longer regulated by themselves but by the higher consciousness. and willing extends to the physical body. by the greater Guardian. thus liberated from all physical bonds. but now seek to coordinate thyself with the whole. Thou hast attained thy present degree of perfection thanks to the faculties thou wert able to develop in the sense-world as long as thou wert still confined to it. his earthly task would remain but partially accomplished. This encounter takes place when the sundering of the organs of thinking. Until today thou hast striven as an individual. But now behold me. whence thine activity can now be directed. Now in the Guardian of the Threshold as described above. See how sublimely I tower above all that thou hast made of thyself thus far. so that thou mayst bring into the supersensible world not thyself alone. If thine intention were merely to acquire the faculties necessary for life in the supersensible world. is now confronted by the second Guardian of the Threshold who speaks as follows: “Thou hast released thyself from the world of the senses. thou dost no longer require thy physical body in its present form. feeling and willing will then be controlled from supersensible regions as instruments in the power of the human soul. in which thy liberated powers must be applied to further work in the world of the senses. having thyself become free. When the student has recognized all the elements from which he must liberate himself. for every moral stage retains the passion for the perishable beside the seeds of an ideal future. his way is barred by a sublime luminous being whose beauty is difficult to describe in the words of human language.

Ye all did perforce descend into the sense-world to gather powers needed for a higher world. And if thou dost refuse to apply thy powers in this world. It does not follow that. To separate thyself from thy fellows would mean to abuse those very powers which thou couldst not have developed save in their company.enter at once the kingdom of the supersensible. The gift he receives in the 110 . anyone will naturally follow the white path. I shall therefore bar thine entry into the higher regions of the supersensible world so long as thou hast not applied all the powers thou hast acquired to the liberation of thy companions. and if he places his work at the world's disposal it will entail his renouncement of any further benefit for himself. together with them. others will come who will not refuse. The initiate knows full well what is in store for him if he yields to the temptation of a premature abode in the supersensible world. but I stand before the portal of the higher regions as the Cherub with the fiery sword before Paradise. and without them the powers needed for supersensible existence would fail thee. having sundered thy destiny from theirs. With the powers already at thy disposal thou mayst sojourn in the lower regions of the supersensible world. Thou couldst not have descended had they not done so. union with him looms as a far distant ideal before the soul's vision. For the allurements here are the strongest possible. while thou wilt lose from under thy feet the very ground in which thou wert rooted. although thou and they are inseparably united. Here nothing appeals to his egotism. Thou must now share with thy fellows the powers which. thou didst acquire. when called upon to decide. and I bar thine entrance as long as powers unused in the senseworld still remain in thee. An indescribable splendor shines forth from the second Guardian of the Threshold. The purified world will develop above and beyond thee. Yet there is also the certitude that this union will not be possible until all the powers afforded by this world are applied to the task of its liberation and redemption. and thou shalt be excluded from it. He lays his gifts on the sacrificial altar of humanity. the stream of human evolution will flow over and past him. By fulfilling the demands of the higher light-being the initiate will contribute to the liberation of the human race. That depends entirely upon whether he is so far purified at the time of his decision that no trace of self-seeking makes this prospect of felicity appear desirable. and a higher supersensible world will receive all the fruits of the sense-world. Thus thou wouldst tread the black path. After his liberation he can gain no new powers from the world of the senses. Should he prefer his own premature elevation into the supersensible world.” With these words the greater Guardian makes his presence known soon after the meeting with the first Guardian has taken place. while the others from whom thou didst sever thyself tread the white path. yet thou wouldst be forced to look down on the still unredeemed beings in the physical world. whereas on the other side no special allurements are evident.

Their instructions. it becomes their duty to keep the student away from the supersensible world until he can enter it with the will for selfless collaboration. No one therefore should expect the occultists of the white path to give him instruction for the development of his own egotistical self. love for the world and for his fellows. not following their instructions can never hope to reach the Threshold. for it is indeed the appropriate path for them. on the contrary. Their instructions therefore deal only with the development of powers for collaboration in this work. that is. produce good results or no results. the seeker. deprives himself on the advantage resulting from their assistance. Anyone. understand the demands of the greater Guardian. however. In fact. but no one merely seeking an advantage for himself will ever obtain assistance from the white occultists. upon crossing the Threshold. and it is not the task of the white occultists to shorten the way. really following the instructions of the good occultists will. if followed. 111 . for the latter provides.higher regions of the supersensible world is nothing that comes to him. They never actually refuse anyone. anyone. for the complete gratification of egotism. Each can attain that for himself. Thus they place selfless devotion and self-sacrifice before all other qualities. They do not take the slightest interest in the felicity of the individual man. therefore. Nothing that egotism desires is denied upon the black path. for even the greatest egotist can purify himself. for they are only concerned with the development and liberation of all human beings and all creatures. but only something that flows from him. he. and will not fail to attract those desiring merely their own felicity. Even when they do not refuse their help. for it is no part of their task to lead to egotistical felicity and a mere existence in the supersensible worlds.

through what they are. The experiences through which the human soul lives on the path here described are wholly confined to the realm of psycho-spiritual experience. This can only be denied so long as the illusion is not discarded which arises from observing thought only when the latter is united with other functions. as described in this book. while excluding all perception. They are only possible if equal freedom and independence from the bodily life are attained for certain other inner experiences. as is the case during ordinary consciousness. and every other token of inner life. felt. in and through the human being. There are people who deny the existence of such thoughts. In the ordinary life of the soul. leads the soul through experiences concerning the nature of which it is especially important to avoid all illusions and misconceptions. thoughts that are selfsustaining and from which everything provided by perception or bodily conditioned inner life is excluded. and willed. feeling. Yet an inner exertion is possible which will enable the thinking part of inner life to be experienced as distinct from everything else. willing and so forth. all thoughts are to a certain extent mere reflections of perceptions and of inner experiences. visionary dreaming. wander into undesirable paths. when thoughts are made concerning things outwardly perceived or inwardly felt and willed. thought is almost always mixed with other functions: perception. in which his body has no share.Appendix The path to supersensible knowledge. can be expressed only by those who have never raised themselves to the faculty of experiencing with their souls a self-sustaining life in pure thought. mediumship (spiritism). For others. all memory. Anyone uniting himself with them. For them. knows himself 112 . This view. They believe that no thought is possible that is not extracted from perceptions or from the inner life dependent on the body. the human being is involved in an activity in whose origin his body has no share. This distortion is often due to the fact that persons desirous of following the path described in this book are confused with others who in their search for supersensible reality. and as a result of methods foreign to genuine striving for knowledge. who have lived through this experience. that is. and other degenerate practices. Such thoughts reveal themselves through themselves. These other functions are effectuated by the body. Yet it is but natural that the latter should arise in such questions as are here considered. and to the degree that is does this a process takes place. however. In this connection one of the most serious mistakes occurs when the whole range of inner experience dealt with in true spiritual science is distorted into appearing in the same category as superstition. Something consisting in pure thought alone can be detached from the encompassing soul-life. it is a matter of knowledge that wherever thought dominates the life of the soul to the degree that this thought permeates other soul functions. as spiritual supersensible substance. yet thought plays into them. thoughts which do not themselves originate in what is perceived.

which rests upon the insertion of the human being into the cosmic being. the development of soul-life proceeds in just the opposite direction from that taken by the 113 . people become at once suspicious when an activity confined entirely to the soul is expected of them. Should such people. For anyone familiar with this whole process. Now. so that what occurs in the human being through his will is simultaneously a link in the chain of cosmic occurrence. in addition.to be in a supersensible region and experiences himself outside the physical body. The only question for him is: What prevents such a positive fact from being recognized? And the answer he finds to this question is that the fact does not reveal itself unless the student first cultivates a condition of soul which allows him to become the recipient of this revelation. The experiences of the visionary and the phenomena produced by the medium owe their existence to the fact that a person while thus experiencing and producing is. Human waking life does not run its course completely within the body. less independent of his body than in ordinary perception and willing. the most conscious part of it runs its course on the boundary between the body and the physical outer world. They believe that they themselves give the revelation its content because they prepare themselves to receive it. But what comes to the fore through such revelations is not a supersensible but a sub-sensible world. They expect experiences to which they contribute nothing and which allow them to remain quite passive. He excludes from the life of his soul that function which. thus the process of perception with the organs of sense is as much an extra-physical process penetrating into the body as a permeation of this process from out the body. In the experience of the supersensible as indicated in this book. the human being makes himself independent of his bodily organization in the functions of sense perception and willing. with his soul. in perception and willing. Thus the content and productions of his soul are merely revelations of his bodily life. is the life of will. the human being is to a high degree dependent on his physical organization. so too. makes him independent of his body. Such are the soul-contents provided by the experiences and revelations of the visionary and the medium. in order that something independent of themselves should reveal itself. In the experiences of the visionary and in mediumistic phenomena the human being becomes completely dependent on his body. In this life of the soul running on the boundary of the physical body. the question can no longer arise: Can the soul live through experiences outside the body in a supersensible world? For it would mean denying what he knows from experience. but the function of thought plays into this activity. be ignorant of the simplest scientific requirements for the comprehension of a given fact. they will take for an objective revelation of non-sensible substances contents and productions of the soul in which the soul's conscious participation is reduced below the level maintained in sense-perception and will-impelled action. and in as much as this is the case.

For in the main. The same independence realized in the experience of pure thought is attained by the soul for a far wider range of activity. in the course of that supersensible experience to which the realization of the contents of this book leads. the distance separating the actual fact from the language used to describe it is greater than in descriptions of physical experience. but we experience only this in supersensible fashion. In this connection it must be pointed out that there have been and there still are spiritual scientific signs by means of which supersensible facts are expressed. Thus it is said on page 19 of this book: “Originally all rules and teachings of spiritual science were expressed in a symbolical sign-language. and their combinations. it is especially important to grasp and realize in the clearest possible way this experience of life in pure thought. But what is of far greater importance for supersensible experiences is that. With pure thought we live in the supersensible. a “certain writing system” was mentioned. but bodily revelations confined to the supersensible world. the soul is on the wrong path as far as true knowledge of the supersensible world is concerned: for the soul is seized by the bodily functions.visionary and the medium. And supersensible experience must be a continuation of that life already attained by the soul when united with pure thought.” And on page 82. the soul's experiences are of such a nature that descriptive expressions cannot so easily be found for them as for experiences confined to the world of the senses. for it is from its comprehension that light shines forth to bring correct insight into the nature of supersensible knowledge. the 114 . but one in which nothing supersensible is as yet perceived. this experience is already a supersensible activity of the soul. anyone may easily be led to suppose that such a writing system can be learned in the same way we learn the letters of an ordinary physical language. and what is than experienced is not the revelation of a supersensible world. Care must often be taken not to overlook the fact that to a certain extent. Now. For this reason it is so important to gain knowledge of this union in the right way. in descriptions of supersensible experience. The soul acquires a progressively greater independence of the body than is the case in perceiving and willing. And anyone initiated into the meaning of these symbols attains thereby the means of directing his inner life toward the supersensible realities in question. merely indicating in a delicate way the reality to which it refers. The reader must be at pains to realize that many an expression is intended as an illustration. The moment the life of the soul links below the level of clear consciousness existing in thought. we do not yet experience anything else supersensibly. For the supersensible activity of the soul here meant. * * * (2) Having penetrated to the sphere of the supersensible.

This does not make him useless and incompetent for life. and the healthy other being pursues its course in the old way. It is only to a limited extent correct to say that further personal instruction is necessary beyond that contained in this book. when information is given concerning the construction of supersensible cognitive processes. These can be found by anyone who reads correctly. the resulting events occur as described. and it may be of importance for him or her. today we have reached a stage in the evolution of humanity in which spiritual scientific knowledge must become far more widely disseminated than formerly. In earlier times there were reasons for reserving such personal instruction for oral teaching. He develops this state of soul as a second being within himself. completely. The statement that the student needs personal instruction should be understood in the sense that this book itself is personal instruction. but it would be false to believe that there are any cardinal points not mentioned in this book. so that it can be surveyed with full consciousness. The statement can be made that what is imparted in this book can be realized by every soul. while the supersensible cognitive process engages the whole human being. The unfolding trainee knows how to hold the two beings apart in full consciousness and how to make them act and react on each other in the right way. nor does he lose his interest and skill in it and become a spiritual researcher the whole day long. gain the revelation of such a writing through personal experience. which the soul can personally determine according to the indications given. For this reason. It must be placed within the reach of everyone to a quite different extend from what was the case in older times.soul should. above all. Hence the book replaces the former oral instruction. The supersensible says something to the soul which the soul must translate into these illustrative signs. Let the reader take this book as a conversation between the author and himself. It is of course true that the student's manner of experience in the supersensible world will shed its light over his whole being. The whole human being becomes an eye or an ear. but far from distracting him from life. it appears as though a transformation of 115 . so that in the moment of such cognition the whole human being is engaged. and. No doubt someone may need assistance. The necessity of adopting the existing method of description is due to the fact that every cognitive process directed toward the supersensible calls the whole human being into action. in the contemplation of the supersensible. Yet when correctly read it will be found that nothing more is intended than a description of the inner soul state required of anyone in those moments of life at which he confronts the supersensible world. And in the course of this realization. * * * (3) The descriptive instructions given in this book appear at first sight to require the complete alteration of the whole human being. it makes him more capable and his life more productive.

You can help by clicking here. in the supersensible world. and find it within yourself to help preserve this initiative. the human being's experience of himself in the supersensible world would be like placing him in the sensible world in such a way that the things and processes around him manifested themselves. while he himself had no knowledge of his own body. Won't you please consider how much you value the information provided here. 131 et seq. In reply it must be pointed out that for the experience of supersensible reality it is essential that the human being knew himself as a supersensible being in a supersensible world. It may occur to someone to ask whether such figurative descriptions are necessary. whose reality is fully manifest in the descriptions here given of the lotus flowers and the etheric body. and whether it would not be possible to describe these supersensible experiences in ideas.. without such illustrations. His perception of his own supersensible form in soul-body and etheric body enables him to stand. can apply to other parts of the book. just as he is conscious of himself in the physical world through the perception of his physical body. with a slight alteration. concerning “some results of initiation. THE END The Appeal . * * * (4) I should like to add to what was said on pp.” something which. 116 .the human being were meant. as if nothing were right in the ordinary human being. conscious of himself. Without this vision of his own supersensible nature.. and he should become quite different.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful